Home

TR0129 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference

1. 4 4 Symbol Names User defined symbols A user defined symbol can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit The size of an identifier is only limited by the amount of available memory The case of these characters is significant You can define a symbol by means of a label declaration or an equate or set directive Predefined preprocessor symbols These symbols start and end with two underscore characters _ symbo __ and you can use them in your assembly source to create conditional assembly See section 4 4 1 Predefined Preprocessor Symbols Labels Symbols used for memory locations are referred to as labels It is allowed to use reserved symbols as labels as long as the label is followed by a colon or starts at the first column Assembly Language Reserved symbols Symbol names and other identifiers beginning with a period are reserved for the system for example for directives or section names Instructions are also reserved The case of these built in symbols is insignificant Examples Valid symbol names loop _1 ENTRY a Be _aBC Invalid symbol names 1_loop starts with a number DEFINE reserved directive name 4 4 1 Predefined Preprocessor Symbols The TASKING assembler knows the predefined symbols as defined in the table below The symbols are useful to create conditional assembly Macro Description _ BUILD __ Identifies the bui
2. C Language Return Type Register double rnrm 64 bit struct rnrm Table 1 6 Register usage for function return types Objects larger than 64 bits are returned via the stack 1 9 3 Inlining Functions inline __noinline With the C compiler option optimize inline the C compiler automatically inlines small functions in order to reduce execution time smart inlining The compiler inserts the function body at the place the function is called The C compiler decides which functions will be inlined You can overrule this behavior with the two keywords inline ISO C and__ noinline With the inline keyword you force the compiler to inline the specified function regardless of the optimization strategy of the compiler itself inline unsigned int abs int val unsigned int abs_val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs_val If a function with the keyword inline is not called at all the compiler does not generate code for it You must define inline functions in the same source module as in which you call the function because the compiler only inlines a function in the module that contains the function definition When you need to call the inline function from several source modules you must include the definition of the inline function in each module for example using a header file With the noinline keyword you prevent a function from being inlined __noinline unsigned int
3. 0 c cece teen eee 8 22 8 7 1 Defining a Processor 3 tices ack erinan n E E EE anon eee ood ata eee eee eas 8 22 8 7 2 Instantiating Derivatives cdeeeect cet orwin dpe dertiaddadedeteindeeged need baboon 8 22 8 7 3 Defining External Memory and BUSES 0 0 c eee eee tenes 8 23 8 8 Semantics of the Section Setup Definition 00 tet eee 8 24 8 8 1 Setting up a Section s 3 eae eee eee Cee needed eon tes 8 24 8 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition 0c eect tenes 8 25 8 9 1 Defining a Section Layout 0 eee eens 8 25 8 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections 0 cece teens 8 26 8 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections 0 c cece ete 8 30 8 9 4 Creating Symbols 0 nee tee e eee e enna 8 32 8 9 5 Conditional Group Statements 0 c eect eens 8 33 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference vi CERT C Secure Coding Standard 9 1 9 1 Preprocessor PRE iiswisiniert eid niacin hie ceed Se ere bean Sa 9 1 9 2 Declarations and Initialization DCL 0 eee ees 9 2 9 3 Expressions EXP wiz cciwsvk aceite teivten emitted Gana alin bee ape a E E E E 9 2 9 4 Integers INT rieri pide cheat oa ade oti hede dade Mba a SE wad andar 9 3 9 5 Floating Point FLP e errena chal ae Awe AO eae ee Soh de oN tated 9 3 9 6 Arrays ARR og cisco eeictats heey nd Mee pad EEE ona aE eg dawegehaw ERE erdee wae 9 3 9 7 Characters and Strings STR
4. 000s cece eee eee eee 1 18 1 9 5 2 Interrupt Frame frame wc ccc ce ceeded oie eaea cane ee dae gee poate eee epee ba 1 19 1 9 6 Software Break SYSTEM 22 ccs cceauwad awit so eledbons ib qunckeeenndie e ged ede ia 1 19 1 10 Libraries 3320244 ces here cei dake tirade baw diana Glee eae ra teed ohaad epee eeule 1 19 1 10 1 Prinifand Scant Routines gos rcciipresssnetoetei arni iae Eaa wk Cada Ete aig 1 20 C Language 2 1 2 1 INMOCUCHON wcciccrcnnpiegie ban ebar eat ous ea acantdedameg ee eheriaees Cae aren eee bane 2 1 2 2 C Language Extension Keywords 00 cece cece eee enna 2 1 2 3 G Dialect Accepted ss cevaictorsedetatte eee neeee ae eo i NE a EEN 2 1 2 3 1 Standard Language Features Accepted 0 cece eee cece eee ees 2 1 2 3 2 C 0x Language Features Accepted 0 0 c cece eect ett e eens 2 3 2 3 3 Anachronisms Accepted 0 0 cece ete tenet tent neees 2 4 2 3 4 Extensions Accepted in Normal C Mode 0 00 ees 2 4 2 4 GNU EXI6NSiIONS sie 5 2 denteeaeeecdaiigdatneaen neha E eat ot E eae fradet 2 5 2 5 Namespace Support 00 cc cece eee eens 2 13 2 6 Template Instantiation eresie c00ceec bene oes cata eda ened Sernis eee oe ee ee Ee Eni 2 14 2 6 1 Automatic Instantiation 0 0 ee tenet tent a 2 14 2 6 2 Instantiation Modes ssi nke dicho cd pied wae ete Dale ee Gaied Yeas es a ne ele eee eae es 2 15 2 6 3 Instantiation pragma Directives 0 nent nen 2 16
5. 0 0 c eee eens 9 4 9 8 Memory Management MEM 0 cee eee eee eee aae 9 4 9 9 Environment ENV o ccracuse cae ea ddondinies e E eS cecal hb eee WE Deets 9 4 9 10 Signals SIG iesi ae ducks N set he nasal mga aes Mande dooms naan eee eS 9 5 9 11 Miscellaneous MSC 0 0 cece ee nent eens 9 5 MISRA C Rules 10 1 10 1 MISRAHCi1998 fiiin nta nia ae E E aie eald amen ened Masten aparece bees E 10 1 10 2 MISRAHC 2004 int sa irai eee att a anaa aa Books Rhee cee ee Son head 10 5 Index Manual Purpose and Structure Manual Purpose and Structure Windows Users The documentation explains and describes how to use the TASKING MicroBlaze toolset to program a MicroBlaze processor You can use the tools either with the graphical Altium Designer or from the command line in a command prompt window Structure The toolset documentation consists of a user s manual Using the MicroBlaze Embedded Tools which includes a Getting Started section and a separate reference manual this manual Start by reading the Getting Started in Chapter 1 of the user s manual The other chapters in the user s manual explain how to use the compiler assembler linker and the various utilities Once you are familiar with these tools you can use this reference manual to lookup specific options and details to make full use of the TASKING toolset The reference manual describes the C language implementation the C language implementati
6. or a line starts with possibly preceded by white space 11 R Identifiers shall not rely on significance of more than 31 characters 12 A The same identifier shall not be used in multiple name spaces 13 A Specific length typedefs should be used instead of the basic types 14 R Use unsigned char or signed char instead of plain char x 15 A Floating point implementations should comply with a standard 16 R The bit representation of floating point numbers shall not be used A violation is reported when a pointer to a floating point type is converted to a pointer to an integer type 17 R typedef names shall not be reused 18 A Numeric constants should be suffixed to indicate type A violation is reported when the value of the constant is outside the range indicated by the suffixes if any 19 R Octal constants other than zero shall not be used 20 R All object and function identifiers shall be declared before use 21 R Identifiers shall not hide identifiers in an outer scope 22 A Declarations should be at function scope where possible 10 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference x 23 A _ All declarations at file scope should be static where possible 24 R Identifiers shall not have both internal and external linkage x 25 R Identifiers with external linkage shall have exactly one definition 26 R Multiple declarations for objects or functions shall be compatible x 27 A External
7. map dest bus space dest_dbits dest_offset size sre_dbits sre_offset 8 5 1 Defining an Architecture With the keyword architecture you define an architecture and assign a unique name to it The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file architecture name definitions If you are defining multiple core architectures that show great resemblance you can define the common features in a parent core architecture and extend this with a child core architecture that contains specific features The child inherits all features of the parent With the keyword extends you create a child core architecture architecture name_child_arch extends name_parent_arch definitions A core architecture can have any number of parameters These are identifiers which get values assigned on instantiation or extension of the architecture You can use them in any expression within the core architecture Parameters can have default values which are used when the core architecture is instantiated with less arguments than there are parameters defined for it When you extend a core architecture you can pass arguments to the parent architecture Arguments are expressions that set the value of the parameters of the sub architecture architecture name_child_arch parml1 parm2 1 extends name_parent_arch arguments definitions 8 5 2 Defining Internal Buses With the bus keyword you define a bus the combination of data and
8. A friend declaration may refer to a member typedef class A class B typedef B my _b friend class my_b hi When a friend class is declared with an unqualified name the lookup of that name is not restricted to the nearest enclosing namespace scope struct S namespace N class C friend struct S S in g mode N S in default mode hi A friend class declaration can refer to names made visible by using directives namespace N struct A using namespace N struct B void f A a friend struct A in g mode N A 3 not a new declaration of A An inherited type name can be used in a class definition and later redeclared as a typedef struct A typedef int I struct B A typedef I J Refers to A I typedef double I Accepted in g mode i introduces B I In a catch clause an entity may be declared with the same name as the handler parameter try catch int e char e The diagnostic issued for an exception specification mismatch is reduced to a warning if the previous declaration was found in a system header The exception specification for an explicit template specialization for a function or member function does not have to match the exception specification of the corresponding primary template A template argument list may appear following a constructor name in constructor definition that appears outside of the class definition template lt
9. are supported A number of macros are predefined in GNU mode See section 2 10 Predefined Macros A predefined macro can be undefined A large number of special functions of the form builtin xyz e g __builtin_alloca are predeclared Some expressions are considered to be constant expressions even though they are not so considered in standard C and C Examples include char amp struct S 0 gt c 0 char 0 and int Hello amp 0 The macro ___ GNUC ___is predefined to the major version number of the emulated GNU compiler Similarly the macros __GNUC_MINOR__ and _ GNUC_PATCHLEVEL __ are predefined to the corresponding minor version number and patch level Finally _ VERSION __ is predefined to a string describing the compiler version The _ thread specifier can be used to indicate that a variable should be placed in thread local storage requires gnu_version gt 30400 An extern inline function that is referenced but not defined is permitted with a warning Trigraphs are ignored with a warning Non standard casts are allowed in null pointer constants e g int int 0 is considered a null pointer constant in spite of the pointer cast in the middle Statement expressions e g int j j 3 are accepted Branches into a statement expression are not allowed In C mode branches out are also not allowed Variable length arrays destructible entities try catch local non POD class definitions
10. 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Select the default label mode Local or Global Command line syntax symbol scope global local i g l Default il Description With this option you tell the assembler how to treat symbols that you have not specified explicitly as global or local By default the assembler treats all symbols as local symbols unless you have defined them explicitly as global Related information i 5 185 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler use hardware Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Processor entry and select Processor Definition 3 Enable one or more of the options e Barrel shifter present e Divide unit present e Multiply unit present e Floating point unit present e MSRSET and MSRCLR instructions present e PCMPBF PCMPEQ and PCMPNE instructions present Command line syntax use hardware iag You can set the following flags barrel shift b B Barrel shifter divide d D Divide unit fpu f F Floating point unit multiply m M Multiply unit pcemp p P Pattern compare instructions msr s S msrclr and msrset instructions Default BDFMPS Description With this option you tell the assembler whether the MicroBlaze target has a hardware barrel shifter divider floating point multiplier and or hardware support for pattern compare
11. 2 26 C Language Thus despite the faster recompilations precompiled header processing is not likely to be justified for an arbitrary set of files with nonuniform initial sequences of preprocessing directives Rather the greatest benefit occurs when a number of source files can share the same PCH file The more sharing the less disk space is consumed With sharing the disadvantage of large precompiled header files can be minimized without giving up the advantage of a significant speedup in compilation times Consequently to take full advantage of header file precompilation users should expect to reorder the include sections of their source files and or to group include directives within a commonly used header file Below is an example of how this can be done A common idiom is this include comnfile h pragma hdrstop include where comnfile h pulls in directly and indirectly a few dozen header files the pragma hdrstop is inserted to get better sharing with fewer PCH files The PCH file produced for comnfile h can be a bit over a megabyte in size Another idiom used by the source files involved in declaration processing is this include comnfile h include decl_hdrs h pragma hdrstop include decl_hdrs h pulls in another dozen header files and a second somewhat larger PCH file is created In all the source files of a particular program can share just a few precompiled header files If disk spa
12. Effilags You can set the following flags when you specify E without flags the default is ECMP comments c C Keep comments from the C source in the preprocessed output make m M Generate dependency lines that can be used for the makefile noline p P Strip line source position info lines starting with line Description With this option you tell the C compiler to preprocess the C source Under Altium Designer the C compiler sends the preprocessed output to the file name pre where name is the name of the C source file to compile Altium Designer also compiles the C source On the command line the C compiler sends the preprocessed file to stdout To capture the information in a file specify an output file with the option output With preprocess comments you tell the preprocessor to keep the comments from the C source file in the preprocessed output With preprocess make the C compiler will generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile The preprocessor output is discarded The default target name is the basename of the input file with the extension obj With the option make target you can specify a target name which overrules the default target name When implicit inclusion of templates is enabled the output may indicate false but safe dependencies unless no preprocessing only is also used With preprocess noline you tell the preprocessor to strip the line source posit
13. Example To create the file relobj obj instead of asm obj enter asmb output relobj obj asm src Related information J 5 179 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler page length Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option page length to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax page length number Default 72 Description If you generate a list file with the assembler option list file I this option sets the number of lines in a page in the list file The default is 72 the minimum is 10 As a special case a page length of 0 turns off page breaks Related information d gt Assembler option list file Generate list file 5 180 Tool Options Assembler Assembler page width Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option page width to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax page width number Default 132 Description If you generate a list file with the assembler option list file I this option sets the number of columns per line on a page in the list file The default is 132 the minimum is 40 Related information d gt Assembler option list file Gener
14. In this context the word strings means the separate occurrence of a string in a C program So array variables initialized with strings are just initialized character arrays which can be allocated in any memory type and are not considered as strings The MicroBlaze compiler places string literals in data sections If you use the compiler option S romstrings or pragma romstring the compiler places all strings in rodata sections 1 8 Switch Statement The TASKING C compiler supports three ways of code generation for a switch statement a jump chain linear switch a jump table or a binary search table A jump chain is comparable with an if else if else if else construction A jump table is a table filled with jump instructions for each possible switch value The switch argument is used as an index to jump within this table A binary search table is a table filled with a value to compare the switch argument with and a target address to jump to pragma smart_switch is the default of the compiler The compiler tries to use the switch method which uses the least space in ROM table size in ROMDATA plus code to do the indexing For a switch with a long type argument only binary search table code is used For an int type argument a jump table switch is only possible when all case values are in the same 256 value range the high byte value of all programmed cases are the same Especially for large switch statements the ju
15. Make utility option e Environment variables override macro definitions Make utility option m Name of invocation file 5 278 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility Command line syntax Description Displays an overview of all command line options Example The following invocation displays a list of the available command line options tmk Related information i 5 279 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility a Command line syntax a Description Normally the make utility rebuilds only those files that are out of date With this option you tell the make utility to rebuild all files without checking whether they are out of date Example tmk a Rebuilds all your files regardless of whether they are out of date or not Related information J 5 280 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility c Command line syntax c Description Altium Designer uses this option for the graphical version of the make utility when you create sub projects In this case the make utility calls another instance of the make utility for the sub project With the option c the make utility runs as a child process of the current make The option c overrules the option err Example tmk c The make utility runs its commands as a child processes Related information J 5 281 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility D DD Command line syntax D DD Desc
16. You can use all ASCII characters in the assembly source both in strings and in comments Also the extended characters from the ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 set are allowed Some characters have a special meaning to the assembler Special characters associated with expression evaluation are described in section 4 6 3 Expression Operators Other special assembler characters are Character Description Start of a comment Line continuation character or Macro operator argument concatenation Macro operator return decimal value of a symbol v Macro operator return hex value of a symbol Macro operator override local label j Macro string delimiter or Quoted string DEFINE expansion character f String constants delimiter Start of a built in assembly function Location counter substitution Substring delimiter Note that macro operators have a higher precedence than expression operators 4 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction In an instruction the mnemonic is followed by zero one or more operands An operand has one of the following types Operand Description symbol A symbolic name as described in section 4 4 Symbol Names Symbols can also occur in expressions register Any valid register as listed in section 4 5 Registers expression Any valid expression as described in section 4 6 Assembly Expressions address A combination of expression register and symbol
17. _ checksum _ data _ type _ offset 0F00200000232222754E00754F04AF4FAE4E22C3 _ length Start Linear Address Record The Start Linear Address Record contains the 32 bit program execution start address Layout 04 0000 05 address checksum Example 0400000500FF0003F5 _ checksum _ address _ type _ offset length Object File Formats End of File Record The hexadecimal file always ends with the following end of file record 00000001FF _ checksum _ type _ offset _ length MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 7 8 8 Linker Script Language Summary This chapter describes the syntax of the linker script language LSL 8 1 Introduction To make full use of the linker you can write a script with information about the architecture of the target processor and locating information The language for the script is called the Linker Script Language LSL This chapter first describes the structure of an LSL file The next section contains a summary of the LSL syntax Finally in the remaining sections the semantics of the Linker Script Language is explained The TASKING linker is a target independent linker locator that can simultaneously link and locate all programs for all cores available on a target board The target board may be of arbitrary complexity A simple target board may contain one standard processor with some external memory t
18. optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Optimization 3 Select an optimization level in the Optimization level box If you select Custom Optimization 4 Enable the optimizations you want Command line syntax optimize flags Offlags Use the following options for predefined sets of flags optimize 0 O0 No optimization Alias for OCDLTXYZ optimize 1 O1 Default optimization Alias for OcDLtXYZ optimize 2 O2 All optimizations Alias for Ocdltxyz You can set the following flags delete unreferenced sections c C Delete unreferenced sections from the output file shrink dynamic sections d D Remove zero valued immediate prefixes first fit decreasing VL Use a first fit decreasing algorithm to locate unrestricted sections in memory t T Emit smart restrictions to reduce copy table size x X Delete duplicate code sections from the output file y Y Delete duplicate constant data from the output file z Z Try to compress ROM sections of copy table items copytable compression delete duplicate code delete duplicate data copytable item compression aan ne Description With this option you can control the level of optimization the linker performs If you do not use this option optimize 1 is the default Related information db Section 6 8 Linker Opt
19. same as m d y day of the month 1 31 with single digits preceded by a space ISO 8601 date format Y m d last two digits of the week based year 00 99 week based year O000 9999 same as b hour 24 hour clock 00 23 hour 12 hour clock 01 12 day of the year 001 366 month 01 12 minute 00 59 replaced by the newline character local equivalent of AM or PM locale s 12 hour clock time same as 1 M S p same as H M second 00 59 replaced by horizontal tab character ISO 8601 time format H M S ISO 8601 weekday number 1 7 Monday as first day of the week week number of the year Sunday as first day of the week 00 53 ISO 8601 week number 01 53 in the week based year weekday 0 6 Sunday is 0 week number of the year 00 53 week 1 has the first Monday local date representation local time representation year without century 00 99 year with century ISO 8601 offset of time zone from UTC or nothing time zone name if any unistd h The file unistd h contains standard UNIX I O functions These functions are all implemented using the debugger s file system simulation Except for lstat and fstat which are not implemented This header file is not defined in ISO C99 access name mode Use the file system simulation of the debugger to check the permissions of a file on the host mode specifies the type of access and is a bit pattern constructed by a logical OR of the follo
20. 1 2 3 3 ignored with a warning no error int a2 2 7 8 9 9 ignored with a warning no error e Expressions of types void void const void volatile and void const volatile can be dereferenced the result is an lvalue e The restrict __ keyword is accepted It is identical to the C99 restrict keyword except for its spelling e Out of range floating point values are accepted without a diagnostic When IEEE floating point is being used the infinity value is used e Extended variadic macros are supported e Dollar signs are allowed in identifiers e Hexadecimal floating point constants are recognized 2 6 C Language The _asm__ keyword is recognized and equivalent to the asm token Extended syntax is supported to indicate how assembly operands map to C C variables asm fsinx 31 30 x a Map the output operand on x and the input operand on a The e escape sequence is recognized and stands for the ASCII ESC character The address of a statement label can be taken by use of the prefix amp amp operator e g void a amp amp L A transfer to the address of a label can be done by the goto statement e g goto a Multi line strings are supported e g char p abc def ASCII NULL characters are accepted in source files A source file can end with a backslash character Case ranges e g case a z
21. Assembly Language RESUME Syntax RESUME name attribute Description With the SECTION directive you always start a new section With the RESUME directive you can reactivate a previously defined section See the SECTION directive for a list of available section attributes If you omit the attribute the previously defined section with the same name is reactivated ignoring the attribute s If you specify an attribute you reactivate the section with that same attribute You cannot resume sections that have the group or overlay attribute In this case the assembler issues a warning Example SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION etext data text data at 0x0 RESUME text RESUME data RESUME data at 0x0 Related information db SECTION Start a new section First First Second Second Resume Resume Resume text section data section text section data section in the second text section in the first data section in the second data section 4 35 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference SECTION Syntax SECTION name attribute ENDSEC Description With the SECTION directive you define a new section Each time you use the SECTION directive a new section is created It is possible to create multiple sections with exactly the same name To resume a previously defined section use the RESUME directive If you defi
22. C Compiler dep file Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option dep file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax dep file file Description With this option you tell the C compiler to generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile In contrast to the option preprocess make Em the dependency information will be generated in addition to the normal output file By default the information is written to a file with extension d one for every input file When you specify a filename all dependencies will be combined in the specified file Example cpmb dep file test dep test cc The C compiler compiles the file test cc which results in the output file test ic and generates dependency lines in the file test dep Related information db C compiler option preprocess make Generate dependencies for make 5 69 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler dollar Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option dollar to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax dollar Default format No dollar signs are allowed in identifiers Description Accept dollar si
23. Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enter the name of the file in the Include this file before source field or click and select a file Command line syntax include file file Hfile Description With this option set at project level you include one extra file at the beginning of each C source file in your project Ona document level Project Document Options you can overrule this option with another file or no file at all The specified include file is included at the beginning of the compilation This is the same as specifying include file at the very beginning of each of your C source files All files included with include file are processed after any of the files included with include macros file The filename is searched for in the directories on the include search list Example cpmb include file extra h testl cc test2 cc The file extra h is included at the beginning of both test1 cc and test2 cc Related information C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 87 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler include macros file Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option inc
24. MEM32 C MEM33 C MEM34 C MEM35 C Allocate and free memory in the same module at the same level of abstraction The compiler issues this warning when the result of the call to malloc calloc or realloc is discarded and therefore not free d resulting in a memory leak Use realloc only to resize dynamically allocated arrays Only use realloc to resize an array Do not use it to transform an object to an object of a different type Do not access freed memory When memory is freed its contents may remain intact and accessible because it is at the memory manager s discretion when to reallocate or recycle the freed chunk The data at the freed location may appear valid However this can change unexpectedly leading to unintended program behavior As a result it is necessary to guarantee that memory is not written to or read from once it is freed Free dynamically allocated memory exactly once Freeing memory multiple times has similar consequences to accessing memory after it is freed The underlying data structures that manage the heap can become corrupted To eliminate double free vulnerabilities it is necessary to guarantee that dynamic memory is freed exactly once Detect and handle memory allocation errors The result of realloc is assigned to the original pointer without checking for failure As a result the original block of memory is lost when realloc fails Use the correct syntax for flexible array members
25. Tool Options Linker Linker hex format Menu entry Command line syntax hex format flag You can set the following flag start address s S Emit start address record Default hex format s Description With this option you can specify to emit or omit the start address record from the hex file Related information db Linker option output Output file 5 201 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker hex record size Menu entry Command line syntax hex record size size Default 32 Description With this option you can set the size width of the Intel Hex data records Related information d gt Linker option output Output file Section 7 3 Intel Hex Record Format in Chapter Object File Formats 5 202 Tool Options Linker Linker import object Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add one or more files to the Import the following data object files field Command line syntax import object file Description With this option the linker imports a binary file containing raw data and places it in a section The section name is derived from the filename in which dots are replaced by an underscore So when importing a file called my jpg a section with the name my_ jpg is created In your application you can refer to the created
26. W Command line syntax W target Description With this option the make utility considers the specified target file always as up to date and will not rebuild it Example tmk W test abs The make utility rebuilds out of date targets in the makefile except the file test abs which is considered now as up to date Related information i 5 301 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility x Command line syntax X Description With this option the make utility shows extended error messages Extended error messages give more detailed information about the exit status of the make utility after errors Altium Designer uses this option for the graphical version of make Example tmk x If errors occur the make utility gives extended information Related information i 5 302 Tool Options Librarian 5 7 Librarian Options The librarian tlb is a tool to build library files and it offers the possibility to replace extract and remove modules from an existing library You can only call the librarian from the command line The invocation syntax is tlb key_option sub_option library object_file This section describes all options for the make utility Suboptions can only be used in combination with certain key options Keyoptions and their suboptions are therefor described together The miscellaneous options can always be used and are also described separately The librarian is a command line tool
27. architecture mycorearch core mycore 2 architecture mycorearch If the architecture definition has parameters you must specify the arguments that correspond with the parameters For example mycorearch1 expects two parameters which are used in the architecture definition core mycore architecture mycorearchl 1 2 8 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses With the memory keyword you define physical memory that is present on the target board The memory name is used to identify the memory and does not conflict with other identifiers It is common to define internal memory on chip in the derivative definition External memory off chip memory is usually defined in the board specification See section 8 7 3 Defining External Memory and Buses The type field specifies a memory type rom read only memory it can only be written at load time ram random access volatile writable memory writing at run time is possible while writing at load time has no use since the data is not retained after a power down nvram non volatile ram writing is possible both at load time and run time The optional reserved qualifier before the memory type tells the linker not to locate any section in the memory by default You can locate sections in such memories using an absolute address or range restriction see subsection Locating a group in section 8 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections The mau field specifies the
28. d gt Librarian option t Print library contents 5 310 Tool Options Librarian Librarian t Command line syntax t s0 s1 Description Print a table of contents of the library to standard out With the suboption s the librarian displays all symbols per object file s0 Displays per object the library in which it resides the name of the object itself and all symbols in the object s1 Displays only the symbols of all object files in the library Example tlb t mylib lib The librarian prints a list of all object modules in the libary mylib lib tlb t s0 mylib lib The librarian prints per object all symbols in the library This looks like prolog obj symbols mylib lib prolog obj Qabi_callee_save mylib lib prolog obj Qabi_callee restore divl16 obj symbols mylib lib divl6 obj udivl6 mylib lib divl6 obj divl6 mylib lib divl6 obj _urem16 mylib lib divl6 obj rem16 Related information J 5 311 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Librarian V Command line syntax V Description Display version information The librarian ignores all other options or input files Example tlb V The librarian displays version information but does not perform any tasks Related information i 5 312 Tool Options Librarian Librarian w Command line syntax wilevel Description With this suboption you tell the librarian to suppress all warnings above the specified level The l
29. m 5 183 N 5 175 O 5 177 0 5 179 t 5 184 V 5 187 v 5 188 w 5 176 debug information 5 163 5 166 diagnostics 5 168 5 176 5 189 list file 5 173 5 174 5 184 optimization 5 177 preprocessing 5 164 5 171 5 182 5 183 Assembler significant characters 4 2 Assembly Programming in C 1 5 Assembly expressions 4 3 Assembly functions 4 5 arg 4 6 cast 4 6 ent 4 6 defined 4 7 lIsb 4 7 lsh 4 7 lsw 4 7 msb 4 7 msh 4 7 Index msw 4 7 sircat 4 7 strcmp 4 7 strlen 4 8 strpos 4 8 use_barrel_shift 4 8 detailed description 4 6 overview 4 6 Assembly syntax 4 1 atan functions 3 8 atan2 functions 3 8 atanh functions 3 8 atexit 3 18 atof 3 18 atoi 3 18 atol 3 18 atoll 3 18 Binary search table 1 13 binary_switch 1 11 Board specification 8 2 8 22 bool keyword 5 103 break 4 11 bs 4 12 bsb 4 12 bsd 4 12 bsearch 3 19 bsh 4 12 bsw 4 12 btowc 3 23 BUFSIZ 3 12 Build options 5 208 include files path 5 16 5 34 5 86 5 170 5 204 Bus definition 8 2 Buses 8 15 Cc C compiler options 5 1 5 15 align composites 5 3 cert 5 4 check 5 5 compact max size 5 6 debug info 5 7 define 5 8 dep file 5 10 diag 5 11 error file 5 12 extern sdata 5 13 global type checking 5 14 help 5 15 include directory 5 16 include file 5 17 inline 5 18 inline max incr 5 19 inline max size
30. mem_descr 7 type lt reserved gt 1 mem type size expr speed number fill lt fill_values gt 1 mapping e Amem def contains exactly one type statement mau expr e Amem def contains exactly one mau statement non zero size e Amem def contains exactly one size statement e Amem def contains zero or one speed statement if absent the default speed value is 1 e Amem def contains zero or one i11 statement e Amem def contains at least one mapping mem_type rom attrs rx ram attrs rw nvram attrs rwx fill values 3 expr expr lt expr gt 9 bus_def bus bus_name lt bus_descr gt e Abus_def statement defines a bus with the given bus_name as a unique name within a core architecture 8 6 Linker Script Language bus_descr mau expr of data bits mapping legal destination bus only width expr bus width nr e The mau and width statements appear exactly once ina bus_descr The default value for width is the mau size e The bus width must be an integer times the bus MAU size e The MAU size must be non zero e Abus can only have a mapping ona destination bus through dest bus mapping map map_descr lt map _descr gt map descr dest destination dest_dbits range dest_offset expr size expr sre_dbits range src_offset expr e A mapping requires at least the size a
31. n Command line syntax n Description With this option you tell the make utility to perform a dry run The make utility shows what it would do but does not actually perform these tasks This option is for example useful to quickly inspect what would happen if you call the make utility Example tmk n The make utility does not perform any tasks but displays what it would do if called without the option n Related information d gt Make utility option s Do not print commands before execution 5 292 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility p Command line syntax P Description Normally if a command in a target rule in a makefile returns an error or when the target construction is interrupted the make utility removes that target file With this option you tell the make utility to make all target files precious This means that dependency files are never removed Example tmk p The make utility never removes target dependency files Related information de 5 293 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility q Command line syntax q Description With this option the make utility does not perform any tasks but only returns an exit code A zero status indicates that all target files are up to date a non zero status indicates that some or all target files are out of date Example tmk q The make utility only returns an exit code that indicates whether all target files are up to date o
32. nonstd qualifier deduction 5 117 nonstd using decl 5 118 old for init 5 126 old line commands 5 127 old specializations 5 128 option file 5 129 output 5 131 pch 5 132 pch dir 5 133 pch verbose 5 134 pending instantiations 5 135 preprocess 5 136 remarks 5 137 remove unneeded entities 5 138 rtti 5 139 schar 5 140 signed bitfields 5 141 special subscript cost 5 142 strict 5 143 strict warnings 5 144 suppress vibl 5 145 sys include 5 146 template directory 5 147 timing 5 148 trace includes 5 149 type traits helpers 5 150 uchar 5 151 undefine 5 152 use pch 5 153 using std 5 154 variadic macros 5 155 version 5 156 warnings as errors 5 157 wchar_t keyword 5 158 xref file 5 159 A 5 143 a 5 144 D 5 68 E 5 136 Index e 5 73 F 5 108 f 5 129 H 5 87 l 5 86 j 5 124 L 5 93 0 5 131 r 5 137 s 5 140 t 5 90 U 5 152 u 5 151 5 156 V 5 156 w 5 125 X 5 159 x 5 74 diagnostics 5 157 preprocessing 5 68 5 87 5 136 C dialect 2 1 accepted 2 1 anachronisms accepted 2 4 C 0x language features accepted 2 3 normal C mode extensions 2 4 standard language features accepted 2 1 C language features accepted 2 1 C 0x 2 3 C style comments 5 23 C working paper 5 64 Call graph 4 13 calloc 3 7 3 18 calls 4 13 cast 4 6 cbrt functions 3 9 ceil funct
33. tradeoff 0 AN If you have not used the option optimize the compiler uses the default optimization In this case it is still useful to specify a trade off level Related information d C compiler option optimize Specify optimization level 5 52 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler uchar u Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat char variables as unsigned Command line syntax uchar u Description By default char is the same as specifying signed char With this option char is the same as unsigned char Related information d 5 53 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler undefine U Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option undefine to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax undefine macro_name Umacro_name Description With this option you can undefine an earlier defined macro as with undef This option is for example useful to undefine predefined macros However the following predefined ISO C standard macros cannot be undefined _ FILE _ current source filename LINE current source line number int type TIME___ hh mm ss _ DATE___ mmmddyyyy __STD
34. 2 6 4 Implicit INGIUSION j425 ccc cele Caued ba ba oa Cea dak de Gan EO EEE Rao Hee RE ee eS 2 17 2 6 5 Exported Templates s erreira een nren bgaee abated EEE Oe OAE E heeded 2 18 2 6 5 1 Finding the Exported Template Definition 0 0 cece eee 2 18 2 6 5 2 Secondary Translation Units 0 ete eens 2 19 2 6 5 3 Libraries with Exported Templates 0 eee t tee uraura inana 2 19 2 7 IMMINING FUNCIONS si irendi Rds a e dee eee a a Ea A ee a Weak 2 20 2 8 Externi Inline FUNCHONS vesecrspiririre antee e a o E E ane A EEEa EN 2 20 2 9 Pragmas to Control the C Compiler 0 cece eee eens 2 21 2 10 Predefined Macros a4 cota pods cna ddd ceed calnedeere ek amc a E AO ia i nde tows iai 2 22 2 11 Precompiled Headers icrai cape iaaead cin esaa Da aia Genes Bleed ep eae ee ae eke ea ees 2 24 2 11 1 Automatic Precompiled Header Processing 0c cece eee eee e et ee eee t ene 2 24 2 11 2 Manual Precompiled Header Processing 000 eee cence ete teeta ees 2 26 2 11 3 Other Ways to Control Precompiled Headers 00 cece eee eee eees 2 26 2 11 4 Performance ISSUCS err eas ce torai Paoli See ddan ede dala Cae eE EE eed One Oe EPEa Sas 2 26 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Libraries 3 1 3 1 INMODUCHON teticsirnthdtaeiiake ee aa tad cee Wane Sead SA Rae es das 3 1 3 2 EIDrary FUNCIONS sare tefl gd Seaton ahh a aaa le pe hel ane eae ae ae ao we Rae 3 3 3 2 1 ASSEMLN 5 64 cla Pati Od
35. 5 94 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler long lifetime temps Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option long lifetime temps to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax long lifetime temps Description Select the lifetime for temporaries short means to end of full expression long means to the earliest of end of scope end of switch clause or the next label Short is the default Related information d 5 95 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler long long Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option long long to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax long long Description Permit the use of long long in strict mode in dialects in which it is non standard Related information i 5 96 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler make target Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option make target to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax make target name Description With this option you can o
36. Disable recognition of the typename keyword Related information dE C compiler option no implicit typename Disable implicit typename determination 5 123 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no use before set warnings j Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Suppress C compiler used before set warnings Command line syntax no use before set warnings j Description Suppress warnings on local automatic variables that are used before their values are set Related information d C compiler option no warnings Suppress all warnings 5 124 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Suppress all warnings Command line syntax no warnings W Description With this option you suppress all warning messages Error messages are still issued Related information d C compiler option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 5 125 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler old for init Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C
37. EQU 0x4000 gets no type SECTION text _ START SECTION data MYSYMBOL2 EQU 0x4100 gets type data MYSYMBOL3 EQU START gets type of the expression because START is defined in a section with type CODE the symbol gets type CODE END You cannot redefine the used symbols Related information d gt SET Set temporary value to a symbol 4 21 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference EXTERN Syntax EXTERN symbol type symbol type Description With the EXTERN directive you define an external symbol It means that the symbol is referenced in the current module while it is defined outside the current module You must define the symbols either outside any module or declare it as globally accessible within another module with the GLOBAL directive The type of the global symbol which is referenced with the EXTERN directive is determined from its definition The assembler then uses the type information of the EXTERN directive to check the symbol s use if the symbol does not fit the instruction s operand the assembler issues a warning If you do not specify type the assembler does not check the use of the specified symbol Each target has a specific set of types as described in the SECTION Start a new section directive If you do not use the EXTERN directive and the symbol is not defined within the current module the assembler issues a warning and inserts the EXTERN directive Exa
38. Import global section symbol 4 24 Assembly Language IF ELIF ELSE ENDIF Syntax IF expression ELIF expression the ELIF directive is optional ELSE the ELSE directive is optional ENDIF Description With the IF ENDIF directives you can create a part of conditional assembly code The assembler assembles only the code that matches a specified condition The expression must evaluate to an integer and cannot contain forward references If expression evaluates to zero the IF condition is considered FALSE any non zero result of expression is considered as TRUE You can nest IF directives to any level The ELSE and ELIF directive always refer to the nearest previous IF directive Example Suppose you have an assemble source file with specific code for a test version for a demo version and for the final version Within the assembly source you define this code conditionally as follows IF TEST code for the test version ELIF DEMO code for the demo version ELSE code for the final version ENDIF Before assembling the file you can set the values of the symbols TEST and DEMO in the assembly source before the IF directive is reached For example to assemble the demo version TEST SET 0 DEMO SET 1 You can also define the symbols in Altium Designer as preprocessor macros in dialog Project Project Options Assembler Preprocessing assembler option define Related informat
39. The processor definition The processor definition describes an instance of a derivative Typically the processor definition instantiates one derivative only single core processor A processor that contains multiple cores having the same homogeneous or different heterogeneous architecture can also be described by instantiating multiple derivatives of the same or different types in separate processor definitions If for a derivative A no processor is defined in the LSL file the linker automatically creates a processor named A of derivative A This is why for single processor applications it is enough to specify the derivative in the LSL file db See section 8 7 Semantics of the Board Specification for a detailed description of LSL in the processor definition The memory and bus definitions optional Memory and bus definition are used within the context of a derivative definition to specify internal memory and on chip buses In the context of a board specification the memory and bus definitions are used to define external off chip memory and buses Given the above definitions the linker can convert a logical address into an offset into an on chip or off chip memory device See section 8 7 3 Defining External Memory and Buses for more information on how to specify the external physical memory layout Internal memory for a processor should be defined in the derivative definition for that processor The board specification
40. The processor definition and memory and bus definitions together form a board specification LSL provides language constructs to easily describe single core and heterogeneous or homogeneous multi core systems The board specification describes all characteristics of your target board s system buses memory devices I O sub systems and cores that are of interest to the linker Based on the information provided in the board specification the linker can for each core e convert a logical address to an offset within a memory device e locate sections in physical memory e maintain an overall view of the used and free physical memory within the whole system while locating The section layout definition optional The optional section layout definition enables you to exactly control where input sections are located Features are provided such as the ability to place sections at a given load address or run time address to place sections in a given order and to overlay code and or data sections Which object files Sections constitute the task that will run on a given core is specified on the command line when you invoke the linker The linker will link and locate all sections of all tasks simultaneously From the section layout definition the linker can deduce where a given section may be located in memory form the board specification the linker can deduce which physical memory is still available while locating the section See section 8 9 Semanti
41. Use the ISO C99 syntax for flexible array members instead of an array member of size 1 Only free memory allocated dynamically Freeing memory that is not allocated dynamically can lead to corruption of the heap data structures Allocate sufficient memory for an object The compiler issues this warning when the size of the object s allocated by malloc calloc or realloc is smaller than the size of an object pointed to by the result pointer This may be caused by a sizeof expression with the wrong type or with a pointer type instead of the object type 9 9 Environment ENV ENV32 C All atexit handlers must return normally The compiler issues this warning when an atexit handler is calling a function that does not return No atexit registered handler should terminate in any way other than by returning CERT C Secure Coding Standard 9 10 Signals SIG SIG30 C Call only asynchronous safe functions within signal handlers IG32 C Do not call longjmp from inside a signal handler Invoking the longjmp function from within a signal handler can lead to undefined behavior if it results in the invocation of any non asynchronous safe functions likely compromising the integrity of the program 9 11 Miscellaneous MSC MSC32 C Ensure your random number generator is properly seeded Ensure that the random number generator is properly seeded by calling srand 9 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 9 6 10 MISRA C
42. With this option you tell the assembler not to distinguish between upper and lower case characters By default the assembler considers upper and lower case characters as different characters AN Disabling the option Assemble case sensitive in Altium Designer is the same as specifying the option case insensitive on the command line Assembly source files that are generated by the compiler must always be assembled case sensitive When you are writing your own assembly code you may want to specify the case insensitive mode Example When assembling case insensitive the label Labe1Name is the same label as labelname Related information de 5 161 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler check Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option check to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application The assembler reports any warnings and or errors Related information d gt C compiler option check Check syntax 5 162 Tool Options Assembler Assembler debug info g Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler
43. as float otherwise unrecognized as macro __embedded_ cplusplus Defined as 1 in Embedded C mode __EXCEPTIONS Defined when exception handling is enabled exceptions _ FILE __ Expands to the current source file name _ func __ Same as _ FUNCTION __ in GNU mode __IMPLICIT USING STD Defined when the standard header files should implicitly do a using directive on the std namespace using std __JMP_BUF ELEMENT TYPE Specifies the type of an element of the setjmp buffer This macro is used when building the C library JMP_BUF NUM ELEMENTS Defines the number of elements in the setjmp buffer This macro is used when building the C library LINE _ Expands to the line number of the line where this macro is called __NAMESPACES Defined when namespaces are supported this is the default you can disable support for namespaces with no namespaces __NO_LONG LONG Defined when the long long type is not supported This is the default 2 22 C Language Macro Description NULL_EH REGION NUMBER Defines the value used as the null region number value in the exception handling tables This macro is used when building the C library __PLACEMENT DELETE Defined when placement delete is enabled __ PRETTY FUNCTION _ Defined to the name of the current function This includes the return type and parameter types of the function An er
44. conversion of a string literal to char dropping the const That conversion however applies only to simple string literals Allowing it for the result of a operation is an extension char p x abc def Default arguments may be specified for function parameters other than those of a top level function declaration e g they are accepted on typedef declarations and on pointer to function and pointer to member function declarations Non static local variables of an enclosing function can be referenced in a non evaluated expression e g a sizeof expression inside a local class A warning is issued In default C mode the friend class syntax is extended to allow nonclass types as well as class types expressed through a typedef or without an elaborated type name For example typedef struct S ST class C friend S OK requires S to be in scope friend ST OK same as friend S friend int OK no effect friend S const Error cv qualifiers cannot appear directly he In default C mode mixed string literal concatenations are accepted This is a feature carried over from C99 and also available in GNU modes wchar_t str a L b OK same as L ab In default C mode variadic macros are accepted This is a feature carried over from C99 and also available in GNU modes In default C mode empty macro arguments are accepted a feature carried over from C99 A
45. e Assignment to this in constructors and destructors is allowed This is allowed only if anachronisms are enabled and the assignment to this configuration parameter is enabled e Abound function pointer a pointer to a member function for a given object can be cast to a pointer to a function e Anested class name may be used as a non nested class name provided no other class of that name has been declared The anachronism is not applied to template classes e A reference to a non const type may be initialized from a value of a different type A temporary is created it is initialized from the converted initial value and the reference is set to the temporary e A reference to a non const class type may be initialized from an rvalue of the class type or a derived class thereof No additional temporary is used e A function with old style parameter declarations is allowed and may participate in function overloading as though it were prototyped Default argument promotion is not applied to parameter types of such functions when the check for compatibility is done so that the following declares the overloading of two functions named f int f int int f x char x return x Note that in C this code is legal but has a different meaning a tentative declaration of is followed by its definition e When option nonconst ref anachronism is set a reference to a non const class can be bound to a class rvalue of the same type or a derived ty
46. embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e tis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines Mmymap generate a map file test obj input file Lc mylibs additional search path for system libraries Specify the option file to the linker lkmb option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line lkmb Mmymap test obj Lc mylibs Related information db 5 222 Tool Options Linker Linker output o Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Output Format 3 Enable one or more output formats Command line syntax output filename format addr_size offilename format adar_size You can specify the following formats ELF ELF DWARF IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records Description By default the linker generates an output file in ELF DWARF format named after the first input file with extension abs With this option you can specify an alternative filename and an alternative output format The default output format is t
47. group_page page lt expr gt 1 page_size expr lt range lt range gt gt 9 gt 0 1 group_run_address run_addr lt load_or_run_addr gt 1 group_type clustered contiguous ordered overlay e For non contiguous groups you can only specify group_alignment and attributes e The overlay keyword also sets the contiguous property e The clustered property cannot be set together with contiguous or ordered on a single group load_or_run_addr addr_absolute addr_range lt addr_range gt addr_absolute 2 expr memory_reference expr e An absolute address can only be set on ordered groups addr_range expr expr memory _reference memory_reference expr expr e The parent of a group with an addr_range or page restriction cannot be ordered contiguous or clustered e The end address is not part of the range memory reference mem lt proc_name gt 1 mem_name e A proc_name refers to a defined processor e Amem_name refers to a defined memory if_statement if expr section_statement lt else section _statement gt 1 8 12 Linker Script Language section_creation_statement section section name section_specs lt section_statement2 gt gt 9 section_specs section_spec lt section_spec gt gt 0 section_spec attributes fill_spec size expr p blocksize expr Pp overflow section_name section_
48. on the command line the name of the memory device that was emitted with extension hex or sre Optionally you can specify a basename which prepends the generated file name AN The linker always outputs a debugging file in ELF DWARF format and optionally an absolute object file in Intel Hex format and or Motorola S record format Example To generate Intel Hex output files for each defined memory enter the following on the command line lkmb chip output myfile IHEX testl obj In this case this generates the file myfile_memname hex Related information d gt Linker option output Output file Section 7 2 Motorola S Record Format Section 7 3 Intel Hex Record Format in Chapter Object File Formats 5 192 Tool Options Linker Linker define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Click on User macro click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input 4 Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click outside the cell to confirm 5 Optionally click in the Value field and enter a definition Then click outside the cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the linker LSL file preprocessor If you only specify a macro na
49. or you specify more than one input files the control program names the generated list file s after the specified input file s with extension 1st Example This example generates the list files 1 1st and 2 1st for 1 c and 2 c If in this example also a name had been specified it would be ignored because two input files are specified cemb l c 2 c list files Related information Gb Assembler option list file Generate list file Assembler option list format List file formatting options 5 255 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program IsI file d Command line syntax Isl file file diile Description A linker script file contains vital information about the core for the locating phase of the linker A linker script file is coded in LSL and contains the following types of information e the architecture and derivative definition describe the core s hardware architecture and its internal memory e the board specification describes the physical memory available in the system e the section layout definition describes how to locate sections in memory With this option you specify a linker script file via the control program to the linker If you do not specify this option the linker does not use a script file You can specify the existing file mb 1s1 or the name of a manually written linker script file You can use this option multiple times The linker processes the LSL files in the order
50. ptr Deallocates the memory space pointed to by pir which should be a pointer earlier returned by the malloc or calloc function realloc ptr size Deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a new object with size size while preserving its contents If the new size is smaller than the old size some contents at the end of the old region will be discarded If the new size is larger than the old size all of the old contents are preserved and any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object will have indeterminate values 3 2 15 math h and tgmath h The header file math h contains the prototypes for many mathematical functions Before ISO C99 all functions were computed using the double type the float was automatically converted to double prior to calculation In this ISO C99 version parallel sets of functions are defined for double float and long double They are respectively named function function function1 All long type functions though declared in math h are implemented as the double type variant which nearly always meets the requirement in embedded applications The header file tgmath h contains parallel type generic math macros whose expansion depends on the used type tgmath h includes math h and the effect of expansion is that the correct math h functions are called The type generic macro if available is listed in the second column of the tables below Trigonometric and hyperbolic fun
51. run addr mem page page_size priority select stack size heap size reserved size attributes rwx se i alloc_allowed absolute ranged copytable section Lf size blocksize attributes rwx ELLI overflow else 8 9 1 Defining a Section Layout With the keyword section_layout you define a section layout for exactly one address space In the section layout you can specify how input sections are placed in the address space relative to each other and what the absolute run and load addresses of each section will be You can define one or more section definitions Each section definition arranges the sections in one address space You can precede the address space name with a processor name and or core name separated by colons You can omit the processor name and or the core name if only one processor is defined and or only one core is present in the processor A reference to a space in the only core of the only processor in the system would look like my__space A reference to a space of the only core on a specific processor in the system could be my_chip my_space The next example shows a section definition for sections in the my_space address space of the processor called my_chip 8 25 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference section_layout my chip my_ space locate direction section statements With the optional keyword direction you specify whether the linker starts locating
52. suppress vtbl Suppress definition of virtual function tables 5 77 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler friend injection Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option friend injection to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax friend injection Default friend names are not injected Description Controls whether the name of a class or function that is declared only in friend declarations is visible when using the normal lookup mechanisms When friend names are injected they are visible to such lookups When friend names are not injected as required by the standard function names are visible only when using argument dependent lookup and class names are never visible Related information db C compiler option no arg dep lookup Disable argument dependent lookup 5 78 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler g Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Allow GNU C extensions Command line syntax Qt Description Enable GNU C compiler language extensions Related information db Section 2 4 GNU Extensions in chapter C Language 5 79 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Refer
53. u Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option uchar to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax uchar u Description By default char is the same as specifying signed char With this option char is the same as unsigned char Related information d C compiler option schar Plain char is signed 5 151 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler undefine U Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option undefine to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax undefine macro_name Umacro_name Description Remove any initial definition of identifier name as in undef undefine options are processed after all define options have been processed You cannot undefine a predefined macro as specified in section 2 10 Predefined Macros except for __STDC__ __ cplusplus SIGNED CHARS Example To undefine the predefined macro___ cplusplus cpmb undefine _ cplusplus test cc Related information C compiler option define Define preprocessor macro Section 2 10 Predefined Macros in chapter C Language 5 152 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler use pch Menu
54. 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enter the name of the file in the Include this file before source field or click and select a file Command line syntax include file file Hfile Description With this option set at project level you include one extra file at the beginning of the assembly source file The specified include file is included before all other includes This is the same as specifying INCLUDE file atthe beginning of your assembly source Example asmb include file myinc inc testl src The file myinc inc is included at the beginning of test 1 src before it is assembled Related information Gb Assembler option include directory Include files path Section 5 4 How the Assembler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Assembler of the user s manual 5 171 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designer always removes the object file when errors occur during assembling Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during assembling the resulting object file obj may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated object file when an error occurs By default the assembler removes the generated object file when an error occurs This is useful when you use th
55. 23 sidlib h and wchar h The initial conversion state is specified by ps The input sequence of multibyte charactersis specified indirectly by src wesrtombs s src n ps Restartable version of westombs See section 3 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h The initial conversion state is specified by ps The input wide string is specified indirectly by src mbrtowc pwc s n ps Converts a multibyte character s to a wide character pwc according to conversion state wertomb s wc ps btowc c wetob c mbrlen s n ps ps See also mbtowc in section 3 2 23 sidlib h and wchar h Converts a wide character wc to a multi byte character according to conversion state ps and stores the multi byte character in s Returns the wide character corresponding to character c Returns WEOF on error Returns the multi byte character corresponding to the wide character c The returned multi byte character is represented as one byte Returns EOF on error Inspects up to n bytes from the string s to see if those characters represent valid multibyte characters relative to the conversion state held in ps 3 23 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 3 2 28 wctype h Most in wctype h represent the wide character variant of declared in ctype h and are discussed in section 3 2 3 ctype h and wetype h In addition this header file provides extensible locale specific wide character classification wctype property iswctype wc desc Con
56. 30 99 are reserved for rules C compiler invocation With the C compiler option cert you can enable one or more checks for the CERT C Secure Coding Standard recommendations rules With diag cert you can see a list of the available checks or you can use a three letter mnemonic to list only the checks in a particular category For example diag pre lists all supported checks in the preprocessor category 9 1 Preprocessor PRE PRE01 C Use parentheses within macros around parameter names Parenthesize all parameter names in macro definitions to avoid precedence problems PRE02 C Macro replacement lists should be parenthesized Macro replacement lists should be parenthesized to protect any lower precedence operators from the surrounding expression The example below is syntactically correct although the operator was omitted Enclosing the constant 1 in parenthesis will prevent the incorrect interpretation and force a compiler error define EOF 1 should be 1 int getchar void void f void if getchar EOF operator omitted t an MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference PRE10 C PRE11 C Wrap multi statement macros in a do while loop When multiple statements are used in a macro enclose them in a do while statement so the macro can appear safely inside if clauses or other places that expect a single statement or a statement block Braces alone will not work in all situations as the macro expansio
57. 4 46 Assembly Language Example Decimal Value Operator Instead of substituting the formal arguments with the actual macro call arguments you can also use the value of the macro call arguments Consider the following source code that calls the macro MAC_A after the argument AVAL has been set to 1 AVAL SET 1 MAC A 3 AVAL If you want to replace the argument val with the value of AVAL rather than with the literal string AVAL you can use the operator and modify the macro as follows MAC_A MACRO reg val addik r reg r reg val ENDM Example Hex Value Operator The percent sign is similar to the standard decimal value operator except that it returns the hexadecimal value of a symbol Consider the following macro definition GEN_LAB MACRO LAB VAL STMT LAB SVAL STMT ENDM The macro is called after NUM has been set to 10 NUM SET 10 GEN_LAB HEX NUM NOP The macro expands as follows HEXA NOP The VAL argument is replaced by the character A which represents the hexadecimal value 10 of the argument VAL Example Argument String Operator To generate a literal string enclosed by single quotes you must use the argument string operator in the macro definition Consider the following macro definition STR_MAC MACRO STRING DB STRING ENDM The macro is called as follows STR_MAC ABCD The macro expands as follows DB ABCD Within double quotes
58. 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 R The right hand operand of a shift operator shall lie between zero and one less than the width in bits of the underlying type of the left hand operand This violation will only be checked when the shift count evaluates to a constant value at compile time The unary minus operator shall not be applied to an expression whose underlying type is unsigned The comma operator shall not be used Evaluation of constant unsigned integer expressions should not lead to wrap around The underlying bit representations of floating point values shall not be used A violation is reported when a pointer to a floating point type is converted to a pointer to an integer type The increment and decrement operators should not be mixed with other operators in an expression Control statement expressions Control flow 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 2z 3 3332393 2 233333 2 R R Assignment operators shall not be used in expressions that yield a Boolean value Tests of a value against zero should be made explicit unless the operand is effectively Boolean Floating point expressions shall not be tested for equality or inequality The controlling expression of a for statement shall not contain any objects of floating type The three expressions of a for statement shall be concerned only with loop co
59. 8 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition for detailed descriptions of LSL in the architecture definition The derivative definition The derivative definition describes the configuration of the internal on chip bus and memory system Basically it tells the linker how to convert offsets on the buses specified in the architecture definition into offsets in internal memory A derivative definition must be present in an LSL file Microcontrollers and DSPs often have internal memory and I O sub systems apart from one or more cores The design of such a chip is called a derivative When you design an FPGA together with a PCB the components on the FPGA become part of the board design and there is no need to distinguish between internal and external memory For this reason you probably do not need to work with derivative definitions at all There are however two situations where derivative definitions are useful 1 When you re use an FPGA design for several board designs it may be practical to write a derivative definition for the FPGA design and include it in the project LSL file 2 When you want to use multiple cores of the same type you must instantiate the cores in a derivative definition since the linker automatically instantiates only a single core for an unused architecture MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference db See section 8 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition for a detailed description of LSL in the derivative definition
60. 9 no_pch 2 26 Functions 1 14 1 19 intrinsic 1 16 parameter passing 1 14 return types 1 14 novector 1 11 NULL 3 12 O offset 4 32 offsetof 3 12 open 3 4 Operands 4 2 Operator keywords 5 60 Optimization 5 37 5 177 5 221 code compaction 5 18 5 26 inlining 5 19 optimize for speed size 5 52 reverse inlining 5 26 optimize endoptimize 1 10 Option file 5 39 5 129 5 222 5 265 5 291 Options saving restoring 5 39 5 129 5 222 Output file 5 131 P page 4 33 Parameter passing 1 14 Passing options 5 267 PCH mode automatic 2 24 5 132 manual 2 26 5 67 5 153 perror 3 17 pow functions 3 9 Pragma can_instantiate 2 16 do_not_instantiate 2 16 hdrstop 2 24 2 26 instantiate 2 16 no_pch 2 26 Pragmas 1 8 in C 2 21 Precompiled header 2 24 automatic 2 24 5 132 create 2 26 5 67 directory 2 26 5 133 file cannot be used 5 134 manual 2 26 messages 5 120 performance 2 26 pragmas 2 26 prefix 2 25 use 2 26 5 153 Predefined macros 2 22 Predefined preprocessor macros 1 12 4 3 Predefined preprocessor symbols 4 3 Preprocessing 5 164 5 182 5 263 5 268 8 3 storing output 5 41 5 136 printf 3 13 3 15 conversion characters 3 14 printf versions 1 20 Priority for global initialization functions 5 89 Processor definition 8 2 8 22 profile 1 10 Profiling 5 42 5 269 profiling 1 10 protect 1 10 ptrdiff_t 3 12 putc 3 16 putchar 3 16 puts 3 16 putwc 3 16 pu
61. 9g DDEMO 1 test c Specify the option file to the C compiler cmb option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line cmb g DDEMO 1 test c Related information dd 5 39 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler output o Menu entry Altium Designer names the output file always after the C source file Command line syntax output file 0 file Description With this option you can specify another filename for the output file of the compiler Without this option the basename of the C source file is used with extension src Example To create the file output src instead of test src enter cmb output output sre test c Related information i 5 40 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler preprocess E Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enable the option Store the C Compiler preprocess output lt file gt pre Command line syntax preprocess flags Effiags You can set the following flags when you specify E without flags the default is ECILMP comments c C Keep comments from the C source in the preprocessed output includes i l Generate a list of included source files list I L Generate a list of macro definitions make m M Generate dependency lines that can be used for the makefile noline p P St
62. AICI OIC k Removed Sections JOC a kkk d h k k kie k k R a ann II ICC ICCC R A R A A E IIR RI E K Perr nnn nn Section File Library Symbol Reason l text libe 33 printf_int obj cmba 1ib dummy unreferenced text libe 103 fgetc obj cmba lib fgetc unreferenced text libe 117 ungetc obj cmba 1ib ungetc unreferenced text libe 124 _filbuf obj cmba lib _filbuf unreferenced ST MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The meaning of the different parts is Tool and Invocation This part of the map file contains information about the linker its version header information binary location and which options are used to call it Used Resources This part of the map file shows the memory usage at memory level and space level The largest free block of memory Largest gap is also shown This part also contains an estimation of the stack usage Memory The names of the memory as defined in the linker script file 1s1 Code The size of all executable sections Data The size of all non executable sections not including stacks heaps debug sections in non alloc space Reserved The total size of reserved memories reserved ranges reserved special sections stacks heaps alignment protections sections located in non alloc space debug sections In fact this size is the same as the size in the Total column minus the size of all other columns Free The free memory are
63. By default this part is not shown in the map file You have to turn this part on manually with linker option map file format lsl processor and memory info You can print this information to a separate file with linker option Isl dump Locate Rules This part of the map file shows the rules the linker uses to locate sections Address space The names ofthe address spaces as defined in the linker script file 1s1 The names are constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Type The rule type ordered contiguous clustered unrestricted Specifies how sections are grouped By default a group is unrestricted which means that the linker has total freedom to place the sections of the group in the address space absolute The section must be located at the address shown in the Properties column 6 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference ranged floating ranged float The section must be located anywhere in the address ranges shown in the Properties column end addresses are not included in the range The sections must be located in some address range with a size not larger than shown in the Properties column the first number is the page size the second part is the address range restriction within the page Both the ranged and the floating restriction apply In the Properties column the range restriction is listed first followed by the floating restr
64. Chapter Tool Options compactmaxmatch value Control the maximum size of a match db See C compiler option compact max size in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options extension isuffix Enables a language extension to specify imaginary floating point constants With this extension you can use an i suffix on a floating point constant to make the type Imaginary extern symbol Force an external reference extern assembler directive even when the symbol is not used in the module d gt See assember directive EXTERN in section 4 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language 1 8 C Language extern_sdata endextern_sdata With this pragma you tell the compiler to use small data addressing for external data as well as for symbols defined in the current module endextern_sdata restores the default setting for the extern sdata option Gs See C compiler option extern sdata in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options inline noinline smartinline Instead of the qualifier inline you can also use pragma inline and pragma noinline to inline a function body int w X Y Z pragma inline int add int a int b int i 4 return a b pragma noinline void main void add 1 2 z add x y If a function has an inline or _noinline function qualifier then this qualifier will overrule the current pragma setting d See se
65. Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option old for init to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax old for init Description Control the scope of a declaration in a for init statement The old cfront compatible scoping rules mean the declaration is in the scope to which the for statement itself belongs the default standard conforming rules in effect wrap the entire for statement in its own implicitly generated scope Related information Gls C compiler option no for init diff warning Disable warning for old for scoping 5 126 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler old line commands Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option old line commands to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax old line commands Description When generating source output put out line directives in the form nnn instead of line nnn Example To do preprocessing only without comments and with old style line control information enter cpmb preprocess old line commands test cc Related information Gb C compiler option preprocess Preprocessing only 5 127 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler old specializations Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dia
66. DEFINE directive definitions can be expanded Take care when using constructions with quotes and double quotes to avoid inappropriate expansions Since DEFINE expansion occurs before macro substitution any DEFINE symbols are replaced first within a macro argument string DEFINE LONG short STR_MAC MACRO STRING MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING ENDM If the macro is called as follows STR_MAC sentence 4 47 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference it expands as MESSAGE I This is a LONG STRING MESSAGE I This is a short sentence Macro Local Label Override Operator If you use labels in macros the assembler normally generates another unique name for the labels such as LOCAL M L000001 The macro operator prevents name mangling on macro local labels Consider the following macro definition INIT MACRO addr LOCAL lwi r3 r13 addr __base_r13 ENDM The macro is called as follows LOCAL INIT LOCAL The macro expands as LOCAL M L000001 lwi r3 r13 LOCAL __ base _r13 If you would not have used the operator the macro preprocessor would choose another name for LOCAL because the label already exists The macro would expand like LOCAL M L000001 lwi r3 r13 LOCAL_M L000001 __ base _r13 4 9 4 Using the FOR and REPEAT Directives as Macros The FOR and REPEAT directives are specialized macro forms to repeat a block of source statements You c
67. Implicit source file inclusion 5 121 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no stdinc no stdstlinc Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no stdine or no stdstlinc to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no stdinc no stdstlinc Description With option no stdinc you tell the C compiler not to look in the default include directory relative to the installation directory when searching for standard include files With option no stdstlinc you tell the C compiler not to look in the default include st1 directory relative to the installation directory when searching for standard STL include files This way the C compiler only searches in the include file search paths you specified Related information db Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 122 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no typename Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no typename to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no typename Default typename is recognized as a keyword Description
68. LSL object similar to an LSL group The run_addr argument specifies the location of the first vector id 0 This can be a simple address or an offset in memory see the description of the run time address in subsection Locating a group in section 8 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections A vector table defines symbols _1c_ub_ fooand_1c_ue_foo pointing to start and end of the table vector table vtable vector _size m size n run_addr x See the following example of a vector table definition vector table vtable vector_size 4 size 256 run_addr 0 template text vector template template _symbol _lc vector_target vector prefix _vector_ id_symbol_prefix foo no_inline default empty or fill foo or fill 1 2 3 4 or i1l1 loop vector id 0 fill _ START vector id 12 fill 0Oxab 0x21 0x32 0x43 vector id 1 11 fill 0 vector id 18 23 fill loop The template argument defines the name of the section that holds the code to jump to a handler function from the vector table This template section does not get located and is removed when the locate phase is completed This argument is required The template_symbol argument is the symbol reference in the template section that must be replaced by the address of the handler function This symbol name should start with the linker prefix for the symbol to be ignored in the link phase This argument is re
69. MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the memory This field is required The size field specifies the size in MAU of the memory This field is required The speed field specifies a symbolic speed for the memory 1 4 1 is the fastest 4 the slowest The linker uses the relative speed of the memories in such a way that optimal speed is achieved The default speed is 1 The map field specifies how this memory maps onto an internal bus Mappings are described in section 8 5 4 Mappings The optional 111 field contains a bit pattern that the linker writes to all memory addresses that remain unoccupied during the locate process The result of the expression or list of expressions is used as values to write to memory each in MAU memory mem_name type rom mau 8 fill Oxaa size 64k speed 2 map map_description With the bus keyword you define a bus in a derivative definition Buses are described in section 8 5 2 Defining Internal Buses 8 21 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 7 Semantics of the Board Specification Keywords in the board specification processor derivative bus mau width map memory type reserved rom ram nvram mau size speed sp gt map map dest bus space dest_dbits dest_offset size src_dbits sre offset 8 7 1 Defining a Processor If you have a target board with multiple processors that have the same derivative you need to instantiate each individua
70. MAUs and fills the gap with NOP instructions SECTION text ALIGN 12 WRONG not a power of two the instruction assembler aligns this instruction at 16 MAUs and issues a warning Assembly Language BREAK Syntax BREAK Description The BREAK directive causes immediate termination of a macro expansion a FOR loop exansion or a REPEAT loop expansion In case of nested loops or macros the BREAK directive returns to the previous level of expansion The BREAK directive is for example useful in combination with the IF directive to terminate expansion when error conditions are detected Example FOR MYVAR IN 10 TO 20 assembly source lines IF MYVAR gt 15 BREAK ENDIF ENDREP 4 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference BS BSB BSH BSW BSD Syntax label BS expression1 expression2 label BSB expression1 expression2 label BSH expression1 expression2 label BSW expression1 expression2 label BSD expression1 expression2 Description With the Bs directive Block Storage the assembler reserves a block of memory The reserved block of memory is initialized to the value of expression2 or zero if omitted With expression you specify the number of minimum addressable units MAUs you want to reserve and how much the location counter will advance The expression must be an integer greater than zero and cannot contain any forward re
71. N A lt double gt f also returns 0 Ni x The lookup of names in template instantiations does not conform to the rules in the standard in the following respects e Although only names from the template definition context are considered for names that are not functions the lookup is not limited to those names visible at the point at which the template was defined e Functions from the context in which the template was referenced are considered for all function calls in the template Functions from the referencing context should only be visible for dependent function calls Argument Dependent Lookup When argument dependent lookup is enabled this is the default functions made visible using argument dependent lookup overload with those made visible by normal lookup The standard requires that this overloading occurs even when the name found by normal lookup is a block extern declaration The C compiler does this overloading but in default mode argument dependent lookup is suppressed when the normal lookup finds a block extern 2 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference This means a program can have different behavior depending on whether it is compiled with or without argument dependent lookup no arg dep lookup even if the program makes no use of namespaces For example struct A A operator A double void f A al A operator A int al 1 0 calls operator A double with arg dependent looku
72. Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option non romable to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax non romable Description With this option you tell the linker that the application must not be located in ROM The linker will locate all ROM sections including a copy table if present in RAM When the application is started the data sections are re initialized and the BSS sections are cleared as usual This option is for example useful when you want to test the application in RAM before you put the final application in ROM This saves you the time of flashing the application in ROM over and over again Related information i 5 217 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker no rescan Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Libraries 3 Disable the option Rescan libraries to solve unresolved externals Command line syntax no rescan Description When the linker processes a library it searches for symbol definitions that are referenced by the objects and libraries processed so far If the library contains a definition for an unresolved reference the linker extracts the object that contains the definition from the library The linker processes object files and libraries in the order in which they appear on the command line When al
73. Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option user provided initialization code to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax user provided initialization code i Description It is possible to use your own initialization code for example to save ROM space With this option you tell the linker not to generate a copy table for initialize clear sections Use linker labels in your source code to access the positions of the sections when located If the linker detects references to the TASKING initialization code an error is emitted it is either the TASKING initialization routine or your own not both Note that the options no rom copy and non romable may vary independently The copytable compression optimization optimize t is automatically disabled when you enable this option Related information i 5 226 Tool Options Linker Linker verbose v extra verbose vv Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option verbose or extra verbose to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax verbose extra verbose v vv Description With this option you put the linker in verbose mode The linker prints the link phases while it processes the files In the extra verbose mode t
74. Rules 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 ae ese 3 A A switch expression should not represent a Boolean case Every switch shall have at least one case Floating point variables shall not be used as loop counters A for should only contain expressions concerning loop control A violation is reported when the loop initialization or loop update expression modifies an object that is not referenced in the loop test Iterator variables should not be modified in a for loop Functions shall always be declared at file scope Functions with variable number of arguments shall not be used Functions shall not call themselves either directly or indirectly A violation will be reported for direct or indirect recursive function calls in the source file being checked Recursion via functions in other source files or recursion via function pointers is not detected Function prototypes shall be visible at the definition and call The function prototype of the declaration shall match the definition Identifiers shall be given for all prototype parameters or for none Parameter identifiers shall be identical for declaration definition Every function shall have an explicit return type Functions with no parameters shall have a void parameter list An actua
75. Rules Summ ary chapter contains an overview of the supported and unsupported MISRA C rules 10 1 MISRA C 1998 This section lists all supported and unsupported MISRA C 1998 rules db See also section 2 7 2 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s Manual LN A number of MISRA C rules leave room for interpretation Other rules can only be checked in a limited way In such cases the implementation decisions and possible restrictions for these rules are listed x means that the rule is not supported by the TASKING C compiler R is a required rule A is an advisory rule R The code shall conform to standard C without language extensions x A Other languages should only be used with an interface standard A Inline assembly is only allowed in dedicated C functions x A Provision should be made for appropriate run time checking R Only use characters and escape sequences defined by ISO C R Character values shall be restricted to a subset of ISO 106460 1 R Trigraphs shall not be used R Multibyte characters and wide string literals shall not be used R Comments shall not be nested oO ON OA e 0O N A Sections of code should not be commented out In general it is not possible to decide whether a piece of comment is C code that is commented out or just some pseudo code Instead the following heuristics are used to detect possible C code inside a comment a line ends with
76. a default argument template lt class T gt struct A void f T template lt class T gt void A lt T gt f T value T Function declarations that are not definitions can have duplicate parameter names void f int i int i Accepted in GNU C mode Default arguments are retained as part of deduced function types A namespace member may be redeclared outside of its namespace A template may be redeclared outside of its class or namespace namespace N template lt typename T gt struct S template lt typename T gt struct N S The injected class name of a class template can be used as a template template argument template lt template lt class gt class T gt struct A template lt class T gt struct B A lt B gt a he A partial specialization may be declared after an instantiation has been done that would have used the partial specialization if it had been declared earlier A warning is issued template lt class T gt class X X lt int gt xi template lt class T gt class X lt T gt The or gt operator may be used in an integral constant expression if the result is an integral or enumeration constant struct A enum el 1 int main A a int x a el Accepted in GNU C mode return 0 2 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e Strong using directives are supported using namespace debug _ attribute _ strong e Partial specializati
77. abs int val unsigned int abs_val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs_val Using pragmas inline noinline smartinline Instead of the inline qualifier you can also use pragma inline and pragma noinline to inline a function body pragma inline unsigned int abs int val unsigned int abs_val val if val lt 0 abs_val val return abs_val pragma noinline void main void int i i abs 1 If a function has an inline __noinline function qualifier then this qualifier will overrule the current pragma setting With the pragma noinline pragma smartinline you can temporarily disable the default behavior that the C compiler automatically inlines small functions when you turn on the C compiler option optimize inline 1 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1 9 4 Intrinsic Functions Some specific assembly instructions have no equivalence in C ntrinsic functions give the possibility to use these instructions Intrinsic functions are predefined functions that are recognized by the compiler The compiler generates the most efficient assembly code for these functions The compiler always inlines the corresponding assembly instructions in the assembly source rather than calling it as a function This avoids parameter passing and register saving instructions which are normally necessary during function calls Intrinsic functions produce very efficient assembly code Though it
78. action in the copy table This property makes the sections in the group writable which causes the linker to generate ROM copies for the sections 8 27 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e The effect of the nocopy field is the opposite of the copy field It prevents the linker from generating ROM copies of the selected sections 2 Define the mutual order of the sections in the group By default a group is unrestricted which means that the linker has total freedom to place the sections of the group in the address space e The ordered keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the same order in the address space as they appear in the group but not necessarily adjacent Suppose you have an ordered group that contains the sections A B and C By default the linker places the sections in the address space like A B C where section A gets the lowest possible address With direction high_to_lowin the section_layout space properties the linker places the sections in the address space like C B A where section A gets the highest possible address e The contiguous keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the group in a single address range Within a contiguous group the input sections are located in arbitrary order however the group occupies one contigous range of memory Due to alignment of sections there can be alignment gaps between the sectio
79. architecture definition Normally the linker automatically tries to maximize the size unless you specified the keyword fixed group heap myheap size 2k The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the heap _lc_ub heap name for the begin of the heap and _1lc_ue_heap_name for the end of the heap The linker allocates space for the heap when a reference to either of the section labels exists in one of the input object files Reserved section The keyword reserved tells the linker to create an area or section of a given size The linker will not locate any other sections in the memory occupied by a reserved section with some exceptions Optionally you can assign a name to a reserved section With the keyword size you can specify a size for a given reserved area or section group reserved myreserved size 2k 8 30 Linker Script Language The optional 111 field contains a bit pattern that the linker writes to all memory addresses that remain unoccupied during the locate process The result of the expression or list of expressions is used as values to write to memory each in MAU The first MAU of the fill pattern is always the first MAU in the section By default no sections can overlap with a reserved section With alloc_allowed absolute sections that are located at an absolute address due to an absolute group restriction can overlap a reserved section The same applies for r
80. assembly directive Define macro Undefine DEFINE symbol or macro 4 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Overview of listing control assembly directives Directive Description LIST NOLIST Print do not print source lines to list file PAGE Set top of page size of page TITLE Set program title in header of assembly list file Overview of HLL directives Directive Description CALLS Pass call tree information 4 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives ALIGN Syntax ALIGN expression Description With the ALIGN directive you tell the assembler to align the location counter When the assembler encounters the ALIGN directive it moves the location counter forwards to an address that is aligned as specified by expression and places the next instruction or directive on that address The alignment is in minimal addressable units MAUs The assembler fills the gap with NOP instructions for code sections or with zeros for data sections If the location counter is already aligned on the specified alignment it remains unchanged The location of absolute sections will not be changed The expression must be a power of two 2 4 8 16 If you specify another value the assembler changes the alignment to the next higher power of two and issues a warning Examples SECTION text ALIGN 16 the assembler aligns instruction this instruction at 16
81. box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Inthe List file format section enable or disable the types of information to be included Command line syntax list format flags Lilags You can set the following flags 0 Same as LDEGILMNPQRSVWXYZ all options disabled 1 Same as Ldegilmnpqrsvwxyz all options enabled section d D Section directives SECTION symbol e E Symbol definition directives generic expansion g G Generic instruction expansion generic i I Generic instructions line I L C preprocessor line directives macro m M Macro dup definitions e g MACRO empty line n N Empty source lines newline conditional p P Conditional assembly IF ELSE ENDIF equate q Q Assembler EQU and SET directives relocations r R Relocation characters r hll s S HLL symbolic debug information SYMB equate values v V Assembler EQU and SET values wrap lines w W Wrapped source lines macro expansion x X Macro expansions cycle count y Y Cycle counts macro expansion z Z Define expansions Default LdEGiIMnPqrsVwXyZ Description With this option you specify which information you want to include in the list file On the command line you must use this option in combination with the option list file I Related information d gt Assembler option list file Generate list file
82. broken down time in the structure pointed to by tp into a string in the form Mon Jan 21 16 15 14 2004 n 0 Returns a pointer to this string ctime timer Converts the calender time pointed to by timer to local time in the form of a string This is equivalent to asctime localtime timer gmtime timer Converts the calender time pointed to by timer to the broken down time expressed as UTC Returns a pointer to the broken down time localtime timer Converts the calendar time pointed to by timer to the broken down time expressed as local time Returns a pointer to the broken down time Formatted time The next function has a parallel function defined in wchar h stdio h wchar h strftime s smax fmt tm tp wstrftime s smax fmt tm tp Formats date and time information from struct tm tp into s according to the specified format fmt No more than smax characters are placed into s The formatting of strf time is locale specific using the LC_TIME category see section 3 2 13 locale h You can use the next conversion specifiers 3 21 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference a A b B C C d D e F g G h H l j mM M N p r R S t T u U V N W X X y Y Z Z 3 2 26 abbreviated weekday name full weekday name abbreviated month name full month name local date and time representation same as a b e T Y last two of the year day of the month 01 31
83. cannot be used Example cpmb pch pch verbose test cc Related information C compiler option pch Automatic PCH mode Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 134 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler pending instantiations Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option pending instantiations to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax pending instantiations n where n is the maximum number of instantiations of a single template Default 64 Description Specifies the maximum number of instantiations of a given template that may be in process of being instantiated at a given time This is used to detect runaway recursive instantiations If n is zero there is no limit Example To specify a maximum of 32 pending instantiations enter cpmb pending instantiations 32 test cc Related information d Section 2 6 Template Instantiation in chapter C Language 5 135 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler preprocess E Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enable the option Store the C compiler preprocess output lt file gt pre Command line syntax preprocess flags
84. chapter provides a detailed description of the options for the C compiler C compiler assembler linker control program make program and the librarian 5 1 C Compiler Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that in Altium Designer you cannot run the compiler separately If you compile a single C source file from within Altium Designer the file is also assembled However you can set options specific for the compiler Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional C compiler options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt To call the compiler from the command line use the following syntax cmb option file The input file must be a C source file c or ic 5 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus chara
85. checksum_byte gt Example S70500000000FA checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S7 records is identical to SO S8 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 3 at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S8 record which contains the program start address Layout S 8 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt checksum_byte gt Example S804FF0003F9 _ checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S8 records is identical to SO S9 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 2 at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S9 record which contains the program start address S9 is the corresponding termination record for S1 records Layout S 9 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt checksum_byte gt MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Example 9030210EA _ checksum _ address _ length The checksum calculation of S9 records is identical to SO Object File Formats 7 3 Intel Hex Record Format Intel Hex records describe the hexadecimal object file format for 8 bit 16 bit and 32 bit microprocessors The hexadecimal object file is an ASCII representation of an absolute binary object file There are six different types of records e Data Record 8 16 or 32 bit formats e End of File Record 8 16 or 32 bit formats e Extended Segment Address Record 16 or 32 bit formats e Start Segment Addre
86. class T gt struct A static const int i hi template lt class T gt const int A lt T gt i e When doing nonclass prototype instantiations e g gnu_version 30400 and above a template static data member with an invalid aggregate initializer is accepted the error is diagnosed if the static data member is instantiated struct A A double val hi template lt class T gt struct B static const A I 1 hi template lt class T gt const A B lt T gt I 1 1 0 0 0 hi The following GNU extensions are not currently supported e The forward declaration of function parameters so they can participate in variable length array parameters e GNU style complex integral types complex floating point types are supported e Nested functions 2 12 C Language 2 5 Namespace Support Namespaces are enabled by default You can use the command line option no namespaces to disable the features When doing name lookup in a template instantiation some names must be found in the context of the template definition while others may also be found in the context of the template instantiation The C compiler implements two different instantiation lookup algorithms the one mandated by the standard referred to as dependent name lookup and the one that existed before dependent name lookup was implemented Dependent name lookup is done in strict mode unless explicitly disabled by another command line option or when depende
87. class T gt struct A A hi template lt class T gt A lt T gt A lt T gt When gnu_version lt 30400 an incomplete type can be used as the type of a nonstatic data member of a class template class B template lt class T gt struct A B b hi C Language A constructor need not provide an initializer for every nonstatic const data member but a warning is still issued if such an initializer is missing struct S int const ic S Warning only in GNU C mode error otherwise hi Exception specifications are ignored on function definitions when support for exception handling is disabled normally they are only ignored on function declarations that aren t definitions A friend declaration in a class template may refer to an undeclared template template lt class T gt struct A friend void f lt gt A lt T gt he When gnu_version is lt 30400 the semantic analysis of a friend function defined in a class template is performed only if the function is actually used and is done at the end of the translation unit instead of at the point of first use A function template default argument may be redeclared A warning is issued and the default from the initial declaration is used template lt class T gt void f int i 1 2 template lt class T gt void f int i int main f lt void gt A definition of a member function of a class template that appears outside of the class may specify
88. compaction Example To limit the maximum number of instructions in functions that the compiler generates during code compaction cmb optimize compact compact max size 100 test c Related information C compiler option optimize compact Optimization code compaction C compiler option max call depth Maximum call depth for code compaction 5 6 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler debug info g Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Debug Information 3 Enable the option Generate symbolic debug information 4 Enable or disable the suboptions Command line syntax debug info suboption g suboption You can set the following suboptions when you specify g without suboption the default is gd small 1 c Emit small set of debug information default 2 d Emit default symbolic debug information all 3 a Emit full symbolic debug information Description With this option you tell the compiler to add directives to the output file for including symbolic information This facilitates high level debugging but increases the size of the resulting assembler file and thus the size of the object file For the final application compile your C files without debug information When you specify a high optimization level debug comfort may decrease Therefore the compiler issues a warning if the cho
89. computes the result of sum modulo 256 and subtracts the remainder from 256 two s complement Therefore the sum of all bytes following the header is zero Extended Linear Address Record The Extended Linear Address Record specifies the two most significant bytes bits 16 31 of the absolute address of the first data byte in a subsequent Data Record 02 0000 upper_address checksum 7 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The 32 bit absolute address of a byte in a Data Record is calculated as address offset index modulo 4G where address is the base address where the two most significant bytes are the upper_address and the two least significant bytes are zero offset is the 16 bit offset from the Data Record index is the index of the data byte within the Data Record 0 for the first byte Example 0200000400FFFB _ checksum _ upper address _ type _ offset _ length Data Record The Data Record specifies the actual program code and data length offset 00 data checksum The length byte specifies the number of data bytes The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating Data records The default buffer length is 32 bytes The offset is the 16 bit starting load offset Together with the address specified in the Extended Address Record it specifies an absolute address in memory where the data is to be located when loaded by a tool Example
90. current module This option is an addition to the option sdata External data that falls within the threshold of option sdata is not considered part of sdata If you want external data to be part of this too also specify option extern sdata If you use option extern sdata you must use the option sdata with the same value for all modules in your application Example To put all global static and external data objects with a size of 8 bytes or smaller into the sdata section cmb sdata 8 extern data test c Related information d gt C compiler option sdata size 5 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler global type checking Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Perform global type checking on C code Command line syntax global type checking Description The C compiler already performs type checking within each module Use this option when you want the linker to perform type checking between modules Related information d Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler help Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax help item You can specify the following arguments intrinsics i Show the list of intrinsic functions options 0 Show extended option descriptions pragmas p Show the list of supported pra
91. directive It enables you to specify where the set of header files subject to precompilation ends For example include xxx h include yyy h pragma hdrstop include zzz h Here the precompiled header file will include processing state for xxx h and yyy h but not zzz h This is useful if the user decides that the information added by what follows the pragma hdrstop does not justify the creation of another PCH file e pragma no_pch may be used to suppress precompiled header processing for a given source file e Command line option pch dir directory name is used to specify the directory in which to search for and or create a PCH file Moreover when the host system does not support memory mapping and preallocated memory is used instead then one of the command line options pch create pch or use pch if it appears at all must be the first option on the command line 2 11 4 Performance Issues The relative overhead incurred in writing out and reading back in a precompiled header file is quite small for reasonably large header files In general it does not cost much to write a precompiled header file out even if it does not end up being used and if it is used it almost always produces a significant speedup in compilation The problem is that the precompiled header files can be quite large from a minimum of about 250K bytes to several megabytes or more and so one probably does not want many of them sitting around
92. distinction between trivial and nontrivial constructors has been implemented as has the distinction between PODs and non PODs with trivial constructors e The linkage specification is treated as part of the function type affecting function overloading and implicit conversions e extern inline functions are supported and the default linkage for inline functions is external e A typedef name may be used in an explicit destructor call e Placement delete is implemented e An array allocated via a placement new can be deallocated via delete e Covariant return types on overriding virtual functions are supported e enum types are considered to be non integral types e Partial specialization of class templates is implemented e Partial ordering of function templates is implemented e Function declarations that match a function template are regarded as independent functions not as guiding declarations that are instances of the template e tis possible to overload operators using functions that take enum types and no class types e Explicit specification of function template arguments is supported 2 2 C Language Unnamed template parameters are supported The new lookup rules for member references of the form x A B and p gt A B are supported The notation template and gt temp1late etc is supported In a reference of the form f gt g with g a static member function f is evaluated The ARM specifies that
93. e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in sets of eight bytes If an argument is NULL its corresponding address locations are flled with zeros Double word arguments are stored as is Floating point values are not allowed If the evaluated argument is too large to be represented in a double word the assembler issues a warning and truncates the value In case of character strings each ASCII value of the character is stored in successive locations starting at the least significant byte of a double word DD AB D gt 0x000000000004142 0x000000000000000 second argument is empty 0x000000000000044 Example TABLE DD 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DD A B C D Related information d gt BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DB_ Define Byte DH Define Half Word DW Define Word 4 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference DEFINE Syntax DEFINE symbol string Description With the DEFINE directive you define a substitution string that you can use on all following source lines The assembler searches all succeeding lines for an occurrence of symbol and replaces it with string If the symbol occurs in a double quoted string it is also replaced Strings between single quotes are not expanded This directive is useful for prov
94. else if else construction jump switch Force jump table code A jump table is a table filled with jump instructions for each possible switch value The switch argument is used as an index to jump within this table binary switch Force binary lookup table code A binary search table is a table filled with a value to compare the switch argument with and a target address to jump to smart_switch Let the compiler decide the switch method used d gt See Section 1 8 Switch Statement tradeoff level Specify tradeoff between speed 0 and size 4 d gt See also C compiler option tradeoff t vector_offset offset Specify base address for interrupt vectors Gls See C compiler option vector offset in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options novector Do not generate interrupt vectors and reference to interrupt handler in run time library d gt See C compiler option novector in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference warning number With this pragma you can disable warning messages If you do not specify a warning number all warnings will be suppressed db See also C compiler option no warnings w weak symbol Mark a symbol as weak weak assembler directive The symbol must have external linkage which means a global or external object or function A static symbol cannot be declared weak A weak external reference i
95. encounters a NOLIST directive The assembler does not print the NOLIST directive and subsequent source lines When the assembler encounters the LIST directive it resumes printing to the list file starting with the LIST directive itself It is possible to nest the LIST NOLIST directives Example Suppose you assemble the following assembly code with the assembler option list file SECTION text source line 1 NOLIST source line 2 LIST source line 3 END The assembler generates a list file with the following lines SECTION text x source line 1 LIST d source line 3 END Related information db Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 5 3 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 4 28 Assembly Language MACRO ENDM Syntax macro_name MACRO argumeni argumenit meee definition_statements ENDM Description With the MACRO directive you define a macro Macros provide a shorthand method for handling a repeated pattern of code or group of instructions You can define the pattern as a macro and then call the macro at the points in the program where the pattern would repeat The definition of a macro consists of three parts e Header which assigns a name to the macro and defines the arguments e Body which contains the code or instructions to be inserted when the macro is called e Terminator which indicates the end of the macro definition ENDM dir
96. entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Precompiled Headers 3 Enter a filename in the Use precompiled header file field Command line syntax use pch filename Description Use a precompiled header file of the specified name as part of the current compilation If peh automatic PCH mode or create pch appears on the command line following this option its effect is erased Example To use the precompiled header file with the name test pch enter cpmb use pch test pch test cc Related information C compiler option pch Automatic PCH mode C compiler option create pch Create precompiled header file Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 153 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler using std Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option using std to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax using std Default implicit use of the std namespace is disabled Description Enable implicit use of the std namespace when standard header files are included Note that this does not do the equivalent of putting a using namespace std in the program to allow old programs to be compiled with new header files it has a
97. expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in successive address locations If an argument is NULL its corresponding address location is flled with zeros Integer arguments are stored as is but must be byte values within the range 0 255 floating point numbers are not allowed If the evaluated expression is out of the range 256 255 the assembler issues an error For negative values within that range the assembler adds 256 to the specified value for example 254 is stored as 2 In case of single and multiple character strings each character is stored in consecutive bytes whose lower seven bits represent the ASCII value of the character The standard C escape sequences are allowed DB R 0x52 DB AB D 0x41420043 second argument is empty Example TABLE DB 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DB A B C D Related information d gt BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DH Define Half Word DW Define Word DD Define Double Word 4 14 Assembly Language DD Syntax label DD argument argument Description With the DD directive Define Double Word you allocate and initialize one double word of memory for each argument One double word is 64 bits An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant
98. for interrupt vectors C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler Section 1 9 5 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 5 35 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Inthe Error reporting field select one of the following options e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Suppress specific warningsn If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas or as a range of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number number w number number Description With this option you can suppress all warning messages or specific warning messages On the command line this option works as follows e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number or a range only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific warnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line cmb test c no warnings 135 136 Related information d gt C compiler option warni
99. formats e Assembler List File Format e Linker Map File Format Chapter 7 Object File Formats Contains a description of the following object file formats e ELF DWARF 2 Object Format e Motorola S Record Format e Intel Hex Record Format Chapter 8 Linker Script Language Contains a description of the linker script language LSL Chapter 9 CERT C Secure Coding Standard Contains an overview of the supported CERT C Secure Coding Standard recommendations and rules viii Manual Purpose and Structure Chapter 10 MISRA C Rules Contains a description the supported and unsupported MISRA C code checking rules Conventions Used in this Manual Notation for syntax The following notation is used to describe the syntax of command line input bold Type this part of the syntax literally italics Substitute the italic word by an instance For example filename Type the name of a file in place of the word filename Encloses a list from which you must choose an item Encloses items that are optional For example cmb Both cmb and cmb are valid commands Separates items in a list Read it as OR You can repeat the preceding item zero or more times Example emb option filename You can read this line as follows enter the command cmb with or without an option follow this by zero or more options and specify a filename The following input lines are all valid cmb test c cmb g test c cmb g s test
100. function or has one of the following values SIG _DFL Default behaviour is used SIG_IGN The signal is ignored The function returns the previous value of signalfunction for the specific signal or SIG_ERR if an error occurs 3 2 18 stdarg h The facilities in this header file gives you a portable way to access variable arguments lists such as needed for as fprintf and vfprintf va_copy is new in ISO C99 This header file contains the following macros va_arg ap type Returns the value of the next argument in the variable argument list It s return type has the type of the given argument type A next call to this macro will return the value of the next argument va_copy va_list dest This macro duplicates the current state of src in dest creating a second pointer into the va_list src argument list After this call va_arg may be used on src and dest independently va_end va_list ap This macro must be called after the arguments have been processed It should be called before the function using the macro va_start is terminated ANSI specification va_start va_list ap This macro initializes ap After this call each call to va_arg will return the value of the next lastarg argument In our implementation va_list cannot contain any bit type variables Also the given argument lastarg must be the last non bit type argument in the list 3 2 19 stdbool h This header file contains the following macro definitions These names fo
101. h The MicroBlaze does not support complex numbers 3 2 3 ctype h and wctype h The header file ctype h declares the following functions which take a character c as an integer type argument The header file wetype h declares parallel wide character functions which take a character c of the wchar_t type as argument ctype h wctype h Description isalnum iswalnum Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character or a number A Z a z 0 9 isalpha iswalpha Returns a non zero value when c is an alphabetic character A Z a z isblank iswblank Returns a non zero value when c is a blank character tab space isentrl iswentrl Returns a non zero value when c is a control character isdigit iswditit Returns a non zero value when c is a numeric character 0 9 isgraph iswgraph Returns a non zero value when c is printable but not a space islower iswlower Returns a non zero value when c is a lowercase character a z isprint iswprint Returns a non zero value when c is printable including spaces ispunct iswpunct Returns a non zero value when c is a punctuation character such as r isspace iswspace Returns a non zero value when c is a space type character space tab vertical tab formfeed linefeed carriage return isupper iswupper Returns a non zero value when c is an uppercase character A Z isxdigit iswxdigit Returns a non zero value when c is a hexadecimal digit O 9 A F a f tolowe
102. inner scope shall not use the same name as an identifier in an outer scope and therefore hide that identifier A typedef name shall be a unique identifier A tag name shall be a unique identifier No object or function identifier with static storage duration should be reused No identifier in one name space should have the same spelling as an identifier in another name space with the exception of structure and union member names No identifier name should be reused The plain char type shall be used only for storage and use of character values signed and unsigned char type shall be used only for the storage and use of numeric values typedefs that indicate size and signedness should be used in place of the basic types bit fields shall only be defined to be of type unsigned int or signed int bit fields of type signed int shall be at least 2 bits long Octal constants other than zero and octal escape sequences shall not be used Declarations and definitions 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 x 8 8 x 8 9 x 8 10 8 11 8 12 10 6 Functions shall have prototype declarations and the prototype shall be visible at both the function definition and call Whenever an object or function is declared or defined its type shall be explicitly stated For each function parameter the type given in the declaration and definition shall be identical and the return types shall also be identical If objects or functions are declared
103. instructions Jump chains With this optimization the assembler replaces chained jumps by a single jump instruction For example a jump from a to b immediately followed by a jump from b to c is replaced by a jump from a to c Optimize instruction size With this optimization the assembler tries to find the shortest possible operand encoding for instructions Related information d gt Section 5 5 Assembler Optimizations in chapter Using the Assembler of the user s manual 5 177 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional assembler options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the assembler options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the assembler Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing Option fil
104. instructions and or the msrset and msrcl1r instructions This way the assembler can use the optional barrel shift divide multiply pattern compare and or msrset msrc1r instructions Related information i 5 186 Tool Options Assembler Assembler version V Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax version V Description Displays version information of the assembler The assembler ignores all other options or input files Related information J 5 187 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler verbose v Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax verbose y Description With this option you put the assembler in verbose mode The assembler prints the filenames and the assembly passes while it processes the files so you can monitor the current status of the assembler Related information i 5 188 Tool Options Assembler Assembler warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Treat warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors number Description If the assembler encounters an error it stops assembling When you use this option without arguments you tell the assembler to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the assembler will be non ze
105. left to right Parenthetical expressions have the highest priority innermost first Valid operands include numeric constants literal ASCII strings and symbols Type Oper Name Description ator parenthesis Expressions enclosed by parenthesis are evaluated first Unary plus Returns the value of its operand minus Returns the negative of its operand complement Returns complement integer only logical negate Returns 1 if the operands value is 0 otherwise 0 For example if buf is 0 then buf is 1 Arithmetic ba multiplication Yields the product of two operands division Yields the quotient of the division of the first operand by the second With integers the divide operation produces a truncated integer modulo Integer only yields the remainder from a division of the first operand by the second addition Yields the sum of its operands subtraction Yields the difference of its operands Shift lt lt shift left Integer only shifts the left operand to the left zero filled by the number of bits specified by the right operand gt gt shift right Integer only shifts the left operand to the right sign bit extended by the number of bits specified by the right operand Relational lt less than lt less or equal Returns gt greater than an integer 1 if the indicated condition is TRUE gt greater or equal an integer 0 if the indicated condition is FALSE equal l not equa
106. library only All other product components fall under the TASKING license agreement For an STL Programmer s Guide you can see http www sgi com tech stl index html The following C libraries are delivered with the product Libraries Description cpmb x s lib C libraries x exception handling s single precision floating point stlmb x s lib STLport C libraries 3 2 Libraries 3 2 Library Functions The following sections list all library functions grouped per header file in which they are declared Some functions are not completely implemented because their implementation depends on the context where your application will run These functions are for example all I O related functions Where possible these functions are implemented using file system simulation FSS This system can be used by the debugger to simulate an I O environment which enables you to debug your application A number of wide character functions are available as C source code but have not been compiled with the C library To use complete wide character functionality you must recompile the libraries with the macro WCHAR_SUPPORT_ENABLED and keep this macro also defined when compiling your own sources See C compiler option define D in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter 5 Tool options 3 2 1 assert h assert expr Prints a diagnostic message if NDEBUG is not defined Implemented as macro 3 2 2 complex
107. line Assembly source files that are generated by the compiler must always be assembled and thus linked case sensitive When you have written your own assembly code and specified to assemble it case insensitive you must also link the obj file case insensitive Related information ie 5 191 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker chip output c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Output Format 3 Enable the options Intel HEX records and or Motorola S records Command line syntax chip output basename format adar_size c basename format adar_size You can specify the following formats IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records The addr_size specifies the size of the addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 or 4 bytes default For Motorola S you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4 bytes S3 records default In Altium Designer you cannot specify the address size because Altium Designer always uses the default values Description With this option you specify the Intel Hex or Motorola S record output format for loading into a PROM programmer The linker generates a file for each ROM memory defined in the LSL file where sections are located memory memname type rom The name of the file is the name of the Altium Designer project or
108. macro expands to DS 8 4 9 2 Calling a Macro To invoke a macro construct a source statement with the following format label macro_name arg arg 7 comment where label An optional label that corresponds to the value of the location counter at the start of the macro expansion 4 45 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference macro_name The name of the macro This may not start in the first column arg One or more optional substitutable arguments Multiple arguments must be separated by commas comment An optional comment The following applies to macro arguments e Each argument must correspond one to one with the formal arguments of the macro definition If the macro call does not contain the same number of arguments as the macro definition the assembler issues a warning e fan argument has an embedded comma or space you must surround the argument by single quotes e You can declare a macro call argument as null in three ways enter delimiting commas in succession with no intervening spaces macroname ARG1 ARG3 the second argument is a null argument terminate the argument list with a comma the arguments that normally would follow are now considered null macroname ARG1 the second and all following arguments are null declare the argument as a null string e No character is substituted in the generated statements that reference a null argument 4 9 3 Using Operators for Macro Arguments The assembler
109. member function or static data member may be excluded using the do_not_instantiate pragma For example pragma instantiate A lt int gt pragma do_not_instantiate A lt int gt f The template definition of a template entity must be present in the compilation for an instantiation to occur If an instantiation is explicitly requested by use of the instantiate pragma and no template definition is available or a specific definition is provided an error is issued template lt class T gt void f1 T No body provided template lt class T gt void g1 T No body provided C Language void fl int Specific definition void main int i double d 1 i f1 d gl i gl d pragma instantiate void fl int error specific definition pragma instantiate void gl int error no body provided 1 double and g1 doub1le will not be instantiated because no bodies were supplied but no errors will be produced during the compilation if no bodies are supplied at link time a linker error will be produced A member function name e g A lt int gt f can only be used as a pragma argument if it refers to a single user defined member function i e not an overloaded function Compiler generated functions are not considered so a name may refer to a user defined constructor even if a compiler generated copy constructor of the same name exists Overloaded member functions can be instantiated by providing t
110. min T const amp a T const amp b return a lt b a b If there are no errors the instantiations are generated in the output associated with the primary translation unit This may also require that entities with internal linkage in secondary translation units be externalized so they can be accessed from the instantiations in the primary translation unit 2 6 5 3 Libraries with Exported Templates Typically a non export library consists of an include directory and a lib directory The include directory contains the header files required by users of the library and the 1ib directory contains the object code libraries that client programs must use when linking programs With exported templates users of the library must also have access to the source code of the exported templates and the information contained in the associated et files This information should be placed in a directory that is distributed along with the include and lib directories This is the export directory It must be specified using the command line option template directory when compiling client programs The recommended procedure to build the export directory is as follows 1 For each et file in the original source directory copy the associated source file to the export directory 2 Concatenate all of the et files into a single et file e g mylib et in the export directory The individual et files could be copied to the export directory but hav
111. more than once their types shall be compatible There shall be no definitions of objects or functions in a header file Functions shall be declared at file scope Objects shall be defined at block scope if they are only accessed from within a single function An external object or function shall be declared in one and only one file An identifier with external linkage shall have exactly one external definition All declarations and definitions of objects or functions at file scope shall have internal linkage unless external linkage is required The static storage class specifier shall be used in definitions and declarations of objects and functions that have internal linkage When an array is declared with external linkage its size shall be stated explicitly or defined implicitly by initialization MISRA C Rules Initialization 9 1 R All automatic variables shall have been assigned a value before being used This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that violations are reported not only for variables that are guaranteed to be uninitialized but also for variables that are uninitialized on some execution paths Braces shall be used to indicate and match the structure in the non zero initialization of arrays and structures In an enumerator list the construct shall not be used to explicitly initialize members other than the first unless all items are explicitly initialized Arithmetic type c
112. most one or operator All uses of the pragma directive shall be documented This rule is really a documentation issue The compiler will flag all pragma directives as violations defined shall only be used in one of the two standard forms Pointer arithmetic should not be used 10 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 x 116 x 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 pu po Rees Ee e BD R R R DDUVDIDTDIIDIDII2IT R R R No more than 2 levels of pointer indirection should be used A violation is reported when a pointer with three or more levels of indirection is declared No relational operators between pointers to different objects In general checking whether two pointers point to the same object is impossible The compiler will only report a violation for a relational operation with incompatible pointer types Non constant pointers to functions shall not be used Functions assigned to the same pointer shall be of identical type Automatic address may not be assigned to a longer lived object The null pointer shall not be de referenced A violation is reported for every pointer dereference that is not guarded by a NULL pointer test All struct union members shall be fully specified Overlapping var
113. n wescoll sl s2 wesxfrm sl1 s2 n wcehar h Compares the first n characters of s7 to the first n characters of s2 Returns lt 0 if s7 lt s2 0 if s7 s2 or gt 0 if s7 gt s2 Compares string s7 to string s2 Returns lt 0 if s7 lt s2 0 if s s2 or gt O if s7 gt s2 Compares the first n characters of s7 to the first n characters of s2 Returns lt 0 if s7 lt s2 0 if s1 s2 or gt 0 if s7 gt s2 Performs a local specific comparison between string s7 and string s2 according to the LC_COLLATE category of the current locale Returns lt 0 if s1 lt s2 Oif s s2 or gt 0 if s7 gt s2 See section 3 2 13 locale h Transforms a local string s2 so that a comparison between transformed strings with strcmp gives the same result as a comparison between non transformed strings with strcol11 Returns the transformed string s7 Description memchr s c n strchr s c strrchr s c strspn s set strespn s set strpbrk s set strstr s sub strtok s delim wmemchr s c n weschr s c wesrchr s c wesspn s set wescspn s set wespbrk s set wesstr s sub westok s delim Miscellaneous functions stdio h wchar h Checks the first n characters of s on the occurence of character c Returns a pointer to the found character Returns a pointer to the first occurence of character c in string s o
114. objects should not be declared in more than one file 28 A The register storage class specifier should not be used 29 R The use ofa tag shall agree with its declaration 30 R All automatics shall be initialized before being used This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that violations are reported not only for variables that are guaranteed to be uninitialized but also for variables that are uninitialized on some execution paths 31 R Braces shall be used in the initialization of arrays and structures 32 R Only the first or all enumeration constants may be initialized 33 R The right hand operand of amp amp or shall not contain side effects 34 R The operands of a logical amp amp or shall be primary expressions 35 R Assignment operators shall not be used in Boolean expressions 36 A Logical operators should not be confused with bitwise operators 37 R Bitwise operations shall not be performed on signed integers 38 R A shift count shall be between 0 and the operand width minus 1 This violation will only be checked when the shift count evaluates to a constant value at compile time 39 R The unary minus shall not be applied to an unsigned expression 40 A sizeof should not be used on expressions with side effects x 41 A The implementation of integer division should be documented 42 R The comma operator shall only be used in a for condition 43 R Don t use implicit co
115. option you tell the compiler to keep constant strings in ROM If you use this option you can access these strings only with the rom keyword With this option enabled strings are not copied to RAM at startup to save RAM memory Strings in ROM cannot be modified and access is slower than access to strings in RAM Related information i 5 45 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler runtime r Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Debug Information 3 Enable the option Run time checks 4 Enable one or more of the following suboptions to select which run time checks should be performed e Bounds checking e Report unhandled case in a switch e Malloc consistency checks Command line syntax runtime flags r flags You can set the following flags when you specify r without flags the default is rbcm bounds b B bounds checking case c C report unhandled case in a switch malloc m M malloc consistency checks Description This option controls a number of run time checks to detect errors during program execution Some of these checks require additional code to be inserted in the original application code and may therefore slow down the program execution The following checks are available Bounds checking Every pointer update and dereference will be checked to detect out of bou
116. or All macro identifiers in preprocessor directives shall be defined before use except in ifdef and ifndef preprocessor directives and the defined operator There shall be at most one occurrence of the or preprocessor operators in a single macro definition The and preprocessor operators should not be used The defined preprocessor operator shall only be used in one of the two standard forms Precautions shall be taken in order to prevent the contents of a header file being included twice Preprocessing directives shall be syntactically meaningful even when excluded by the preprocessor All else elif and endif preprocessor directives shall reside in the same file as the if or ifdef directive to which they are related Reserved identifiers macros and functions in the standard library shall not be defined redefined or undefined The names of standard library macros objects and functions shall not be reused The validity of values passed to library functions shall be checked Dynamic heap memory allocation shall not be used The error indicator errno shall not be used The macro offsetof in library lt stddef h gt shall not be used The setjmp macro and the long jmp function shall not be used The signal handling facilities of lt signal h gt shall not be used The input output library lt stdio h gt shall not be used in production code The library functions atof atoi and atol from library lt stdli
117. perspective to that of regular included templates However an instantiation of an exported template involves at least two translation units one which requires the instantiation and one which contains the template definition When a file containing definitions of exported templates is compiled a file with a et suffix is created and some extra information is included in the associated ti file The et files are used later by the C compiler to find the translation unit that defines a given exported template When a file that potentially makes use of exported templates is compiled the compiler must be told where to look for et files for exported templates used by a given translation unit By default the compiler looks in the current directory Other directories may be specified with the command line option template directory Strictly speaking the et files are only really needed when it comes time to generate an instantiation This means that code using exported templates can be compiled without having the definitions of those templates available Those definitions must be available when explicit instantiation is done The et files only inform the C compiler about the location of exported template definitions they do not actually contain those definitions The sources containing the exported template definitions must therefore be made available at the time of instantiation In particular the export facility is not a mechanism for avoid
118. section 2 7 2 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s Manual AN A number of MISRA C rules leave room for interpretation Other rules can only be checked in a limited way In such cases the implementation decisions and possible restrictions for these rules are listed x means that the rule is not supported by the TASKING C compiler R is a required rule A is an advisory rule Environment 1 1 R 1 2 R x13 R x14 R x15 A All code shall conform to ISO 9899 1990 Programming languages C amended and corrected by ISO IEC 9899 COR1 1995 ISO IEC 9899 AMD1 1995 and ISO IEC 9899 COR2 1996 No reliance shall be placed on undefined or unspecified behavior Multiple compilers and or languages shall only be used if there is a common defined interface standard for object code to which the languages compilers assemblers conform The compiler linker shall be checked to ensure that 31 character significance and case sensitivity are supported for external identifiers Floating point implementations should comply with a defined floating point standard Language extensions 2 1 R 22 R 2 3 R 2 4 A Documentation x 3 1 R x 3 2 R x 3 3 A 3 4 R 3 5 R x 3 6 R Character sets 4 1 R 4 2 R Assembly language shall be encapsulated and isolated Source code shall only use style comments The character sequence shall not be used within a comment Sect
119. section by using linker labels Related information Gls Section 6 7 Importing Binary Files 5 203 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker include directory l Menu entry Command line syntax include directory path Ipath Description With this option you can specify the path where your LSL include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the linker searches for LSL include files is 1 The pathname in the LSL file and the directory where the LSL file is located only for include files that are enclosed in 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The default directory PRODDIR include 1sl Example Suppose that your linker script file my1s1 1s1 contains the following line include myinc inc You can call the linker as follows lkmb include directory c proj include lsl file mylsl 1lsl test obj First the linker looks in the directory where myls1 1s1 is located for the file myinc inc If it does not find the file it looks in the directory c proj include for the file myinc inc this option Finally it looks in the directory PRODDIR include 1sl Related information ie 5 204 Tool Options Linker Linker incremental r Menu entry Command line syntax incremental r Description Normally the linker links and locates the specified object files With this option you tell the link
120. sections from low_to_high default or from high_to_low In the second case the linker starts locating sections at the highest addresses in the address space but preserves the order of sections when necessary one processor and core in this example section_layout my_ space direction high_to_low section statements AN If you do not explicitly tell the linker how to locate a section the linker decides on the basis of the section attributes in the object file and the information in the architecture definition and memory parts where to locate the section 8 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections Sections are located per group A group can contain one or more sets of input sections as well as other groups Per group you can assign a mutual order to the sets of sections and locate them into a specific memory part group group_specifications section_statements With the section_statements you generally select sets of sections to form the group This is described in subsection Selecting sections for a group Instead of selecting sections you can also modify special sections like stack and heap or create a reserved section This is described in section 8 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections With the group_specifications you actually locate the sections in the group This is described in subsection Locating a group Selecting sections for a group With the select keyword you can select one or more s
121. select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option check to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application because the code will not actually be compiled The compiler reports any warnings and or errors Related information d gt Assembler option check Check syntax 5 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler compact max size Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option compact max size to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax compact max size value Default 75 Description This option is related to the compiler optimization optimize compact Code compaction or reverse inlining Code compaction is the opposite of inlining functions large sequences of code that occur more than once are transformed into a function This reduces code size possibly at the cost of execution speed However in the process of finding sequences of matching instructions compile time and compiler memory usage increase quadratically with the number of instructions considered for code compaction With this option you tell the compiler to limit the number of matching instructions it considers for code
122. string Section 4 9 Macro Operations 4 30 Assembly Language MESSAGE Syntax MESSAGE type str exp symbo str exp symbo Description With the MESSAGE directive you tell the assembler to print a message to stdout during the assembling process With type you can specify the following types of messages I Information message Error and warning counts are not affected and the assembler continues the assembling process W Warning message Increments the warning count and the assembler continues the assembling process E Error message Increments the error count and the assembler continues the assembling process F Fatal error message The assembler immediately aborts the assembling process and generates no object file or list file The MESSAGE directive is for example useful in combination with conditional assembly to indicate which part is assembled Example MESSAGE I Generating tables ID EQU 4 MESSAGE E The value of ID is ID DEFINE LONG SHORT MESSAGE I This is a LONG string MESSAGE I This is a LONG string Within single quotes the defined symbol LONG is not expanded Within double quotes the symbol LONG is expanded so the actual message is printed as This is a LONG string This is a SHORT string 4 31 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference OFFSET Syntax OFFSET expression Description With the OFFSET directive you tell the assembler to give the location co
123. suffixes h stdh test cc Related information C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 85 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler include directory l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Add a pathname in the Include files path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax include directory path Ipath Description Add path to the list of directories searched for include files whose names do not have an absolute pathname You can specify multiple directories separated by commas Example To add the directory proj include to the include file search path enter cpmb include directory proj include test cc Related information C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation C compiler option sys include Add directory to system include file search path Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 86 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler include file H Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C
124. syntax create pch filename Description If other conditions are satisfied create a precompiled header file with the specified name If pch automatic PCH mode or use pch appears on the command line following this option its effect is erased Example To create a precompiled header file with the name test pch enter cpmb create pch test pch test cc Related information C compiler option pch Automatic PCH mode C compiler option use pch Use precompiled header file Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 67 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Select User macro and click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input 4 Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click an empty cell to confirm 5 Optionally click in the Value field and enter a definition Then click an empty cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name parm_list macro_definition Dmacro_name parm_list macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the preprocessor as in define If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like Function style macro
125. table The data sections are initialized when the application is downloaded The data sections are not re initialized when the application is restarted Related information i 5 219 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Diagnostics 3 Set Error reporting to one of the following values e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Suppress specific warnings If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppresses all warning messages or specific warning messages e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific warnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line lkmb no warnings 135 136 test obj Related information d gt Linker option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 5 220 Tool Options Linker Linker
126. that when you call any of the printf scanf routines indirect the arguments are not known and always the long long version with floating point support is used from the library Example include lt stdio h gt long L void main void printf This is a long ld n L The linker extracts the long version without floating point support from the library Gls See also the description of pragma weak in section 1 5 Pragmas to Control the Compiler in the user s manual 1 20 2 C Language Summary This chapter describes the C language implementation and some specific features 2 1 Introduction The TASKING C compiler offers a new approach to high level language programming for your target processor The C compiler accepts the C language as defined by the ISO IEC 14882 1998 standard and modified by TC1 for that standard It also accepts the language extensions of the C compiler see Chapter 1 C Language Note that the C language itself is not described in this document For more information on the C language see the following publications e The C Programming Language second edition by Bjarne Straustrup 1991 Addison Wesley e ISO IEC 14882 1998 C standard ANSI More information on the standards can be found at http www ansi org 2 2 C Language Extension Keywords The C compiler supports the same language extension keywords as the C compiler When option strict is used the exten
127. the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option List all visited included files Command line syntax trace includes Description Output a list of the names of files included to the error output file The source file is compiled normally i e it is not just preprocessed unless another option that causes preprocessing only is specified Example cpmb trace includes test cc iostream h string h Related information a 5 149 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler type traits helpers Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option type iraits helpers to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax type traits helpers no type traits helpers Default in C mode type traits helpers are enabled by default In GNU C mode type traits helpers are never enabled by default Description Enable or disable type traits helpers like is unionand has _virtual_destructor Type traits helpers are meant to ease the implementation of ISO IEC TR 19768 The macro__ TYPE TRAITS ENABLED is defined when type traits pseudo functions are enabled Related information de 5 150 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler uchar
128. the volatile object is optimized away to somewhere above the volatile object Example extern unsigned int variable extern volatile unsigned int access void TestFunc unsigned int flag access 0 variable flag if variable 3 variable 0 variable 0x8000 access 1 Result with language volatile default Result with language volatile Example cmb AGPx c90 test c cmb language ggc comments strings iso 90 test c d C compiler option iso ISO C standard 5 24 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler make target Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option make target to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax make target name Description With this option you can overrule the default target name in the make dependencies generated by the options preprocess make Em and dep file The default target name is the basename of the input file with extension obj Related information C compiler option preprocess make Generate dependencies for make C compiler option dep file Generate dependencies in a file 5 25 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler max call depth Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appear
129. this case the SIZE directive must occur after the function has been defined Example section text align 4 global _main Function main _Main type func 7 SIZE _Mmain _main endsec Related information d gt TYPE Set Symbol Type 4 39 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference SOURCE Syntax SOURCE siring Description With the SOURCE directive you specify the name of the original C source module This directive is generated by the C compiler You do not need this directive in hand written assembly Example SOURCE test c Related information J 4 40 Assembly Language TITLE Syntax TITLE title Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the TITLE directive to specify the program title which is printed at the top of each page in the assembler list file If you use the TITLE directive without the argument the title becomes empty This is also the default The specified title is valid until the assembler encouters a new TITLE directive Example TITLE The best program In the header of each page in the assembler list file the title of the progam is printed In this case The best program Related information db PAGE Format the assembler list file Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 5 3 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 4 41 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference TYPE S
130. virtual function tables for such classes and the force vtbl option forces the definition of the virtual function table for such classes force vtbl differs from the default behavior in that it does not force the definition to be local Related information db C compiler option force vtbl Force definition of virtual function tables 5 145 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler sys include Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option sys include to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax sys include directory Description Change the algorithm for searching system include files whose names do not have an absolute pathname to look in directory Example To add the directory c proj include to the system include file search path enter cpmb sys include c proj include test cc Related information C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 146 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler template directory Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the op
131. 0 SIGSEGV 3 11 SIGTERM 3 11 sin functions 3 7 sinh functions 3 8 size 4 39 size_t 3 12 smart_switch 1 11 smartinline 1 9 snprintf 3 15 Software break 1 19 source 4 40 source nosource 1 11 sprintf 3 15 sqrt functions 3 9 srand 3 18 sscanf 3 15 Stack 2 14 8 16 Start address 8 18 stat 3 23 Statement 4 1 stderr 3 12 stdin 3 12 stdinc 1 11 stdout 3 12 strcat 3 20 4 7 strchr 3 20 strcmp 3 20 4 7 strcoll 3 20 strcpy 3 19 strcespn 3 20 strerror 3 20 strftime 3 21 String literals const 5 105 Strings C 1 13 substring 4 4 strlen 4 8 strncat 3 20 strncmp 3 20 strncpy 3 19 strpbrk 3 20 strpos 4 8 strrchr 3 20 strspn 3 20 strstr 3 20 strtod 3 18 strtof 3 18 strtoimax 3 6 strtok 3 20 strtol 3 18 strtold 3 18 Index strtoll 3 18 strtoul 3 18 strtoull 3 18 strtoumax 3 6 strxfrm 3 20 Substring 4 4 Switch method 1 11 switch statement 1 13 swprintf 3 15 swscanf 3 15 Symbol names 4 2 Syntax error checking 5 5 5 65 5 162 5 232 Syntax of an expression 4 4 system 3 19 System include directory 5 146 T tan functions 3 7 tanh functions 3 8 Template 2 14 distinct signatures 5 107 guiding declarations 5 81 specialization 5 128 Template directory 5 147 Template instantiation 2 14 pragma directives 2 16 automatic 2 14 5 102 exported templates 2 18 implicit inclusion 2 17 5 84 instantiation modes 2 15 5 90 pend
132. 0 wcstol 3 18 Index 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference wcstold 3 18 wcstoll 3 18 wcstombs 3 19 wcstoul 3 18 wcstoull 3 18 wcstoumax 3 6 wesxfrm 3 20 wctob 3 23 wctomb 3 19 wctrans 3 24 wctype 3 24 Index 14 weak 1 12 4 44 WEOPF 3 12 wmemehr 3 20 wmemcmp 3 20 wmemecpy 3 19 wmemmove 3 19 wmemset 3 20 wprintf 3 15 write 3 23 wscanf 3 15 wsirftime 3 21
133. 0 or C99 Command line syntax iso 90 99 c 90 99 Description With this option you select the ISO C standard The compiler checks the C source against this standard and may generate warnings or errors if you use C language that is not defined in the standard C90 is also referred to as the ANSI C standard C99 refers to the newer ISO IEC 9899 1999 E standard C99 is the default cmb iso 90 test c Related information db C compiler option language Language extensions 5 21 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designer always removes the src file when errors occur during compilation Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during compilation the resulting src file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output file src when an error occurs By default the compiler removes the generated output file src when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to inspect the generated assembly source Even if it is incomplete or incorrect Related information f 5 22 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler language A Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Op
134. 004 0x01000000 0x0 system xram anchor_r13 sbss 5 0x00000001 0x01000004 0x00000004 system xram stack 319 0x00002800 0x010002a0 0x000002a0 Fr Symbols sorted on name Name Space addr Space l _Exit 0x000001lac system sw main START 0x00000448 main 0x00000120 Space addr Name 0x00000120 main 0x000001ac _Exit 0x00000448 _START JIS E E A AE E E ISI E E AE AE E A A kkk Processor and Memory 7 A k k A A k A A A R e A R A R AE E k e AE A R A A K AE E JE II ICI ICI e E e E e E E E E e K A Ae AE E AE E R A RE A R A E K A Locate RUT es F AA A A E e A e e e E A e Ae e A e R A a Ae E E e e e e R AE ICCC RI R Ae E A E E IA RR I IIA Perr Address space Type Properties Sections system sw main absolute 0x00000000 text libc 28 system sw main contiguous sdata 3 sbss 5 sbss libe 172 sbss libe 206 system sw main clustered data 4 data libe 91 data libe 207 system sw main clustered bss libe 92 bss 222 system sw main clustered data 323 data libc 324 data libc 325 system sw main unrestricted rodata libc 51 text 2 text 1 text Exit 263 text _cptable clr 296 system sw main unrestricted stack 319 system sw main unrestricted alignment_protection 326 SS SSS SSS SS ee ees JE IIS ICI ISI ICICI IIIS
135. 18 5 111 Exported templates 2 18 Expressions 4 3 absolute 4 3 relative 4 3 relocatable 4 3 extension isuffix 1 8 Extensions to C 2 1 extern 1 8 4 22 extern C 5 83 extern C 5 83 extern inline 5 112 Extern inline functions 2 20 extern_sdata 1 9 F fabs functions 3 9 fclose 3 13 fdim functions 3 10 FE_ALL_EXCEPT 3 5 FE_DIVBYZERO 3 5 FE_INEXACT 3 5 FE_INVALID 3 5 FE_OVERFLOW 3 5 FE_UNDERFLOW 3 5 feclearexcept 3 5 fegetenv 3 5 fegetexceptflag 3 5 feholdexept 3 5 feof 3 17 feraiseexcept 3 5 ferror 3 17 fesetenv 3 5 fesetexceptflag 3 5 fetestexcept 3 5 feupdateenv 3 5 fflush 3 13 fgetc 3 16 fgetpos 3 17 fgets 3 16 fgetwc 3 16 fgetws 3 16 FILENAME_MAX 3 12 Floating point single precision 5 108 floor functions 3 9 Index fma functions 3 9 fmax functions 3 10 fmin functions 3 10 fmod functions 3 9 fopen 3 13 FOPEN_MAX 3 12 for init statement 5 113 5 126 for endfor 4 23 foclassify 3 10 fprintf 3 15 fputc 3 16 fputs 3 16 fputwc 3 16 fputws 3 16 fread 3 16 free 3 7 3 18 freopen 3 13 frexp functions 3 8 Friend injection 5 78 fscanf 3 15 fseek 3 16 fsetpos 3 17 fstat 3 23 ftell 3 17 Function syntax 4 5 Function inlining 1 15 Function names unqualified 5 100 Function qualifiers __frame 1 19 __interrupt 1 18 fwprintf 3 15 fwrite 3 16 fwscanf 3 15 G Generic instructions 4 1 4 50
136. 19 end 4 20 equ 4 21 extern 4 22 for endfor 4 23 global 4 24 if elif else endif 4 25 include 4 26 label 4 27 list nolist 4 28 macro endm 4 29 message 4 31 offset 4 32 page 4 33 repeat endrep 4 34 resume 4 35 section 4 36 set 4 38 size 4 39 source 4 40 title 4 41 type 4 42 undef 4 43 assembly control overview 4 9 conditional assembly overview 4 9 data definition overview 4 9 detailed description 4 10 HLL overview 4 10 listing control overview 4 10 macros overview 4 9 overview 4 8 storage allocation overview 4 9 symbol definitions overview 4 9 weak 4 44 Assembler options 5 160 5 169 case insensitive 5 161 check 5 162 debug info 5 163 define 5 164 diag 5 165 emit locals 5 166 error file 5 167 error limit 5 168 Index 2 help 5 169 include directory 5 170 include file 5 171 list file 5 173 list format 5 174 nested sections 5 175 no warnings 5 176 optimize 5 177 option file 5 178 output 5 179 page length 5 180 page width 5 181 preprocess 5 182 preprocessor type 5 183 section info 5 184 symbol scope 5 185 use hardware 5 186 verbose 5 188 version 5 187 warnings as errors 5 189 c 5 161 D 5 164 E 5 182 f 5 178 g 5 163 H 5 171 l 5 170 i 5 185 k 5 172 k keep output files 5 172 L 5 174 l 5 173
137. 2 Data Types The TASKING C compiler for the MicroBlaze architecture cmb supports the following data types Size Align fees Type C Type bit bit Limits Boolean _Bool 8 8 Oor1 Character i 8 8 27 27 4 signed char unsigned char 8 8 0 28 1 Integral ls 16 16 215 915_4 signed short unsigned short 16 16 o 216 1 enum 8 8 27 27 4 16 16 215 215 41 32 32 231 231 4 int ee 32 32 231 231 1 long signed long T oe 32 32 0 232 4 unsigned long Tan long 64 32 263 _ 263_41 signed long long unsigned long long 64 32 o 264 1 Pointer pointer to function or data 32 32 0 292 1 Floating Point 3 402E 38 1 175E 38 float 23 bit mantissa 32 32 1 175E 38 3 402E 38 double 64 32 1 798E 308 2 225E 308 long double 52 bit mantissa 2 225E 308 1 798E 308 Table 1 1 Data Types for the MicroBlaze When you use the enum type the compiler will use the smallest sufficient type char short or int unless you use C compiler option integer enumeration always use integers for enumeration 1 2 1 Changing the Alignment _ unaligned _packed__ and __align Normally data pointers and structure members are aligned according to the table in the previous section Suppress alignment With the type qualifier unaligned you can specify to suppress the alignment of objects or structure members This can be useful to create compact data structures In this
138. 29 libraries 5 207 5 218 Map File 5 213 miscellaneous 5 191 5 193 5 197 5 203 5 211 5 212 optimization 5 221 output format 5 192 Linker script file 5 210 5 211 architecture definition 8 1 board specification 8 2 bus definition 8 2 derivative definition 8 1 memory definition 8 2 preprocessing 8 3 processor definition 8 2 section layout definition 8 2 specifying 5 212 5 256 structure 8 1 List file 5 173 5 174 C 5 93 list nolist 4 28 llabs 3 19 IIdiv 3 19 llrint functions 3 9 llround functions 3 9 Local label override operator 4 48 localeconv 3 7 localtime 3 21 log functions 3 8 log10 functions 3 8 logip functions 3 8 log2 functions 3 8 logb functions 3 8 longjmp 3 11 Lookup of names used in templates 5 106 Lookup of unqualified function names 5 100 Irint functions 3 9 lround functions 3 9 Isb 4 7 Iseek 3 23 Ish 4 7 LSL expression evaluation 8 13 LSL functions absolute 8 5 addressof 8 5 exists 8 5 max 8 5 min 8 6 sizeof 8 6 LSL keywords align 8 16 8 27 alloc_allowed 8 31 allow_cross_references 8 28 architecture 8 15 8 20 attributes 8 26 8 27 blocksize 8 32 bus 8 15 8 18 8 23 clustered 8 28 contiguous 8 28 copy 8 17 8 27 copy_unit 8 16 copytable 8 16 8 32 core 8 20 derivative 8 20 8 22 dest 8 16 8 18 dest_dbits 8 18 dest_offset 8 18 direction 8 26 8 28 else 8 33 extends 8 15 8 20 fill 8 17 8 21 8 28 8 31 f
139. 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections db See section 8 9 Semantics of the Section Layout Definition for information on creating and placing stack sections Copy tables e The copytable keyword defines a copy table in the address space The content of the copy table is created by the linker and contains the start address and size of all sections that should be initialized by the startup code You must define exactly one copy table in one of the address spaces for a core Optionally you can specify an alignment for the copy table with the argument align This alignment must be equal or larger than the alignment that you specify for the address space itself If smaller the alignment for the address space is used The copy_unit argument specifies the size in MAUs of information chunks that are copied If you do not specify the copy unit the MAU size of the address space itself is used The dest argument specifies the destination address space that the code uses for the copy table The linker uses this information to generate the correct addresses in the copy table The memory into where the sections must be copied at run time must be accessible from this destination space Sections generated for the copy table may get a page restriction with the address space s page size by adding the page argument Linker Script Language Vector table The vector_table keyword defines a vector table with n vectors of size m This is an internal
140. 5 19 integer enumeration 5 20 iso 5 21 keep output files 5 22 language 5 23 make target 5 25 max call depth 5 26 mil 5 27 mil split 5 27 misrac 5 28 misrac advisory warnings 5 29 misrac required warnings 5 29 no double 5 32 no stdinc 5 34 no warnings 5 36 noclear 5 31 noframe 5 33 novector 5 35 optimize 5 37 option file 5 39 output 5 40 preprocess 5 41 profile 5 42 rename sections 5 44 romstrings 5 45 runtime 5 46 sdata 5 47 signed bitfields 5 48 source 5 49 static 5 50 stdout 5 51 tradeoff 5 52 uchar 5 53 undefine 5 54 use hardware 5 55 vector offset 5 56 version 5 57 warnings as errors 5 58 A 5 23 c 5 21 D 5 8 E 5 41 F 5 32 f 5 39 g 5 7 H 5 17 l 5 16 k 5 22 n 5 51 O 5 37 0 5 40 p 5 42 R 5 44 r 5 46 S 5 45 s 5 49 t 5 52 U 5 54 u 5 53 V 5 57 Index 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference w 5 36 code generation 5 33 5 35 5 45 5 56 debug information 5 7 diagnostics 5 36 5 58 language 5 20 5 21 5 23 5 48 5 53 MISRA C 5 28 optimization 5 37 5 52 preprocessing 5 8 5 17 5 41 5 54 C language extensions 2 1 C compiler options 5 59 5 82 alternative tokens 5 60 anachronisms 5 61 base assign op is default 5 62 building runtime 5 63 C 0x 5 64 check 5 65 context limit 5 66 create
141. AX 2 23 __PTRDIFF_MIN 2 23 __REGION_NUMBER_TYPE 2 23 __ REVISION __ 1 12 2 23 4 3 __RTTI 2 23 __RUNTIME_USES_ NAMESPACES 2 23 __SIGNED_CHARS _ 2 23 __SINGLE_FP_ 1 12 2 23 __SIZE_MAX 2 23 __SIZE_MIN 2 23 _ STDC _ 2 23 __STDC_VERSION __ 2 23 __ TASKING __ 1 12 2 23 4 3 __ TIME __ 2 23 __TYPE_TRAITS_ENABLED 2 23 __unaligned 1 2 __VAR_HANDLE_TYPE 2 23 __VERSION_ 1 12 2 23 4 3 __VIRTUAL_FUNCTION_INDEX_TYPE 2 23 __VIRTUAL_FUNCTION_TYPE 2 23 __WCHAR_MAX 2 23 __WCHAR_MIN 2 23 _BOOL 2 22 _close 3 6 _Exit 3 18 _fss_break 3 5 _fss_init 3 5 _IOFBF 3 13 _IOLBF 3 13 _IONBF 3 13 _lseek 3 6 _open 3 6 _read 3 6 _STLP_NO_IOSTREAMS 2 23 _tolower 3 3 _unlink 3 6 _WCHAR_T 2 23 _write 3 6 A abort 3 18 abs 3 19 Absolute Address 1 4 access 3 22 acos functions 3 8 acosh functions 3 8 Address spaces 8 15 alias 1 8 align 4 10 Alignment 1 2 composite types 5 3 Alignment gaps 8 28 Alternative C tokens 5 60 Anachronism 2 4 Anachronisms 5 61 5 116 Architecture definition 8 1 8 14 arg 4 6 array new and delete 5 101 asctime 3 21 asin functions 3 7 asinh functions 3 8 Assembler directives align 4 10 break 4 11 bs 4 12 Index 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference bsb 4 12 bsd 4 12 bsh 4 12 bsw 4 12 calls 4 13 db 4 14 dd 4 15 define 4 16 dh 4 17 ds 4 18 dsb 4 18 dsd 4 18 dsh 4 18 dsw 4 18 dw 4
142. Assembler option section info list Display section information in list file 5 174 Tool Options Assembler Assembler nested sections N Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option N to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax nested sections N Description With this option it is allowed to have nested sections in your assembly source file When you use this option every SECTION directive must have a corresponding ENDSEC directive Example SECTION text code SECTION data a nested section ENDSEC code ENDSEC Related information Gs 5 175 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler no warnings w Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable one of the options e Report all warnings e Suppress all warnings e Suppress specific warnings If you select Suppress specific warnings 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas of the warnings you want to suppress Command line syntax no warnings number w number Description With this option you can suppresses all warning messages or specific warning messages e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If y
143. C___level of ANSI standard Example To undefine the predefined macro _ TASKING __ cmb undefine _ TASKING test c Related information d C compiler option define Define preprocessor macro 5 54 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler use hardware Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Processor entry and select Processor Definition 3 Enable one or more of the options Barrel shifter present Divide unit present Multiply unit present Floating point unit present MSRSET and MSRCLR instructions present PCMPBF PCMPEQ and PCMPNE instructions present Command line syntax use hardware iag You can set the following flags barrel shift b B Barrel shifter divide d D Divide unit fpu f F Floating point unit multiply m M Multiply unit pcemp p P Pattern compare instructions msr s S msrclir and msrset instructions Default BDFMPS Description With this option you tell the compiler whether the MicroBlaze target has a hardware barrel shifter divider floating point multiplier and or hardware support for pattern compare instructions and or the msrset and msrc1r instructions This way the compiler can use the optional barrel shift divide multiply pattern compare and or msrset msrc1r instructions If you disable the generation of these instructions the compiler generates alternative inst
144. Compiler C Compiler pch dir Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Precompiled Headers 3 Enter a path in the Precompiled header file directory field Command line syntax pch dir directory name Description Specify the directory in which to search for and or create a precompiled header file This option may be used with automatic PCH mode pch or manual PCH mode create pch or use pch Example To use the directory c usr include pch to automatically create precompiled header files enter cpmb pch dir c usr include pch pch test cc Related information C compiler option pch Automatic PCH mode C compiler option use pch Use precompiled header file C compiler option create pch Create precompiled header file Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 133 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler pch verbose Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option pch verbose to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax pch verbose Description In automatic PCH mode for each precompiled header file that cannot be used for the current compilation a message is displayed giving the reason that the file
145. D symbol symbol LSB expr CLSH expr C LSW expr MSB expr MSH expr MSW expr STRCAT Strl1 str2 STRCMP strl1 str2 STRLEN str STRPOS Strl str2 start USE_BARREL SHIFT Test whether macro argument is present Cast result of expr to type Return number of macro arguments Test whether symbol exists Least significant byte of the expression Least significant half word of the absolute expression Least significant word of the expression Most significant byte of the expression Most significant half word of the absolute expression Most significant word of the expression Concatenate sir and str2 Compare str1 with str2 Return length of string Return position of str1 in str2 Test if hardware barrel shift is enabled USE_DIVIDE Test if hardware divide is enabled USE_MULTIPLY Test if hardware multiply is enabled 4 7 2 Detailed Description of Built in Assembly Functions ARG symbol expression Returns integer 1 if the macro argument represented by symbol or expression is present 0 otherwise You can specify the argument with a symbo name the name of a macro argument enclosed in single quotes or with expression the ordinal number of the argument in the macro formal argument list If you use this function when macro expansion is not active the assembler issues a warning Example IF ARG TWIDDLE is argument twiddle present IF ARG 1 is first argum
146. Embedded Tools Reference Interrupt frame 1 19 Interrupt functions 1 18 __frame 1 19 __interrupt 1 18 Interrupt service routine 1 18 defining 1 18 Interrupt vector 5 35 5 56 Intrinsic functions 1 16 isalnum 3 3 isalpha 3 3 isblank 3 3 iscntrl 3 3 isdigit 3 3 isfinite 3 10 isgraph 3 3 isgreater 3 10 isgreaterequal 3 10 isinf 3 10 isless 3 10 islessequal 3 10 islessgreater 3 10 islower 3 3 isnan 3 10 isnormal 3 10 ISO C standard selecting 5 21 5 250 isprint 3 3 ispunct 3 3 isspace 3 3 isunordered 3 10 isupper 3 3 iswalnum 3 3 3 24 iswalpha 3 3 3 24 iswblank 3 3 iswentrl 3 3 3 24 iswctype 3 24 iswdigit 3 3 3 24 iswgraph 3 3 3 24 iswlower 3 3 3 24 iswprint 3 3 3 24 iswpunct 3 3 3 24 iswspace 3 3 3 24 iswupper 3 3 3 24 iswxdigit 3 3 iswxditig 3 24 isxdigit 3 3 J Jump chain 1 13 Jump table 1 13 jump_switch 1 11 K Keyword bool 5 103 explicit 5 110 export 2 18 5 111 typename 5 123 wehar_t 5 158 Index 8 L L_tmpnam 3 12 Label 4 2 label 4 27 Labels 4 1 labs 3 19 Idexp functions 3 8 Idiv 3 19 Igamma functions 3 10 Librarian options 5 304 d 5 305 f 5 306 m 5 307 p 5 308 r 5 309 t 5 311 V 5 312 w 5 313 x 5 314 add module 5 309 create library 5 309 delete module 5 305 extract module 5 314 move module 5 307 print list of objects 5 311 print li
147. Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e tis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines embedded c define DEMO 1 test cc Specify the option file to the C compiler cpmb option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line cpmb embedded c define DEMO 1 test cc 5 129 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Related information J 5 130 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler output o Menu entry Altium Designer names the output file always after the C source file 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option old specializations to the Additional C compiler options field Command
148. If you specify IHEX or SREC with the control option format you can additionally specify the record length to be emitted in the output files With this option you can specify the size of addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 and 4 default For Motorola S records you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4 bytes S3 records default If you do not specify addr_size the default address size is generated Example To create the SREC file test sre with S1 records type ccmb format SREC address size 2 test c Related information d gt Control program option format Set linker output format Linker option output Specify an output object file 5 231 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program check Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors without generating code This saves time in developing your application The compiler assembler reports any warnings and or errors Related information db C compiler option check Check syntax Assembler option check Check syntax 5 232 Tool Options Control Program Control Program create cc cl cm co cs Command line syntax create siage c stage You can specify the following stages if you omit the stage the default is create object intermediate c c Stop after C files are compiled to intermediate C fil
149. L format to file ccerrors html1 enter comb diag html all gt ccerrors html Related information ie 5 237 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program dry run n Command line syntax dry run n Description With this option you put the control program verbose mode The control program prints the invocations of the tools it would use to process the files without actually performing the steps Related information db Control Program option verbose v Verbose output 5 238 Tool Options Control Program Control Program error file Command line syntax error file Description With this option the control program tells the compiler assembler and linker to redirect error messages to a file The error file will be named after the input file with extension err for compiler or exrs for assembler For the linker the error file is Lkmb elk Example To write errors to error files instead of stderr enter ccmb error file t test c Related information d Control Program option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 5 239 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program exceptions Command line syntax exceptions Description With this option you enable support for exception handling in the C compiler Related information db 5 240 Tool Options Control Program Control Program force c Command line syntax force c Descrip
150. MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference TRO129 Dec 01 2009 Software hardware documentation and related materials Copyright 2008 Altium Limited All Rights Reserved The material provided with this notice is subject to various forms of national and international intellectual property protection including but not limited to copyright protection You have been granted a non exclusive license to use such material for the purposes stated in the end user license agreement governing its use In no event shall you reverse engineer decompile duplicate distribute create derivative works from or in any way exploit the material licensed to you except as expressly permitted by the governing agreement Failure to abide by such restrictions may result in severe civil and criminal penalties including but not limited to fines and imprisonment Provided however that you are permitted to make one archival copy of said materials for back up purposes only which archival copy may be accessed and used only in the event that the original copy of the materials is inoperable Altium Altium Designer Board Insight DXP Innovation Station LiveDesign NanoBoard NanoTalk OpenBus P CAD SimCode Situs TASKING and Topological Autorouting and their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Altium Limited or its subsidiaries All other registered or unregistered trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective owners and no trademark r
151. QU directives similar to define in the C language With the MACRO directive you can define more complex macros Example Consider the following assembly program with conditional code to assemble a demo program and a real program IF DEMO ere instructions for demo application ELSE ssi instructions for the real application ENDIF You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag Macro Value DEMO 1 or empty asmb define DEMO test src asmb define DEMO 1 test src Note that both invocations have the same effect Related information Gls Assembler option option file Read options from file 5 164 Tool Options Assembler Assembler diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Messages panel appears 2 In the Messages panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given I
152. You cannot use instantiate local in conjunction with automatic template instantiation Related information Control program option no auto instantiation Disable automatic C instantiation Section 2 6 Template Instantiation in chapter C Language 5 248 Tool Options Control Program Control Program io streams Command line syntax io streams Description As I O streams require substantial resources they are disabled by default Use this option to enable I O streams support in the C library This option also enables exception handling Related information J 5 249 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program iso Command line syntax iso 90 99 Description With this option you specify to the control program against which ISO standard it should check your C source C90 is also referred to as the ANSI C standard C99 refers to the newer ISO IEC 9899 1999 E standard and is the default AN Independant of the chosen ISO standard the control program always links libraries with C99 support Example To compile the file test c conform the ISO C90 standard ccmb iso 90 test c Related information Gb C compiler option iso ISO C standard 5 250 Tool Options Control Program Control Program keep output files k Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during the compilation assembling or linking process the resultin
153. _name lt argument_list gt l1 endianness endianness_ type lt endianness_type gt e An arch_name refers to a defined core architecture e Exactly one architecture statement must be present in a core_def 8 3 10 Processor Definition and Board Specification board_spec proc_def bus_def mem_def proc_def processor proc_name proc_descr proc_descr derivative derivative_name lt argument_list gt l1 e Aproc_def defines a processor with the proc_name as a unique name e If you do not explicitly define a processor for a derivative in an LSL file the linker defines a processor with the same name as that derivative e Aderivative_name refers to a defined derivative e Aproc_def contains exactly one derivative statement 8 3 11 Section Layout Definition and Section Setup section definition section_layout lt space ref gt 1 lt locate direction gt 0 1 lt section_statement gt gt e A section definition inside a space definition does not have a space_ref e All global section definitions have a space_ref space_ref lt proc_name gt 1 lt core_name gt 1 space_name e f more than one processor is present the proc_name must be given for a global section layout e Ifthe section layout refers to a processor that has more than one core the core_name must be given in the space_ref e Aproc_name refers to a defined processor e Acore_name refers to a defined core e Aspac
154. a abs at 0x0 Declare a data abs section at an absolute address d gt RESUME Resume a previously defined section 4 37 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference SET Syntax symbol SET expression SET symbol expression Description With the SET directive you assign the value of expression to symbol temporarily If a symbol was defined with the SET directive you can redefine that symbol in another part of the assembly source using the SET directive again Symbols that you define with the SET directive are always local you cannot define the symbol global with the GLOBAL directive The SET directive is useful in establishing temporary or reusable counters within macros expression must be absolute and cannot include a symbol that is not yet defined no forward references are allowed Normally the defined symbol gets the same type as the result of the expression However when the resulting expression has type none the symbol gets no type Example COUNT SET 0 Initialize count Later on you can assign other values to the symbol Related information d gt EQU Set a permanent value to a symbol 4 38 Assembly Language SIZE Syntax SIZE symbol expression Description With the SIZE directive you set the size of the specified symbol to the value represented by expression The SIZE directive may occur anywhere in the source file unless the specified symbol is a function In
155. a addressable by this core This area is accessible for unrestricted items Total The total memory area addressable by this core Space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script file Is The names are Native used Foreign used constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name The size of sections located in this space The size of all sections destined for located in other spaces but because of overlap in spaces consume memory in this space Stack Name The name s of the stack s as defined in the linker script file 1s1 Used An estimation of the stack usage The linker calculates the required stack size by using information CALLS directives generated by the compiler If for example recursion is detected the calculated stack size is inaccurate therefore this is an estimation only The calculated stack size is supposed to be smaller than the actual allocated stack size If that is not the case then a warning is given Processed Files This part of the map file shows all processed files This also includes object files that are extracted from a library with the symbol that led to the extraction Link Result This part of the map file shows per object file how the link phase has mapped the sections from the various object files obj to output sections in File The name of an input object file in Section A section na
156. acro preprocessor These directives tell the macro preprocessor how to manipulate your assembly code before it is actually being assembled You can use these directives to write macros and to write conditional source code Parts of the code that do not match the condition will not be assembled at all Unlike other directives preprocesssor directives can start in the first column e Some directives act as assembler options and most of them indeed do have an equivalent assembler command line option The advantage of using a directive is that with such a directive you can overrule the assembler option for a particular part of the code A typical example is to tell the assembler with an option to generate a list file while with the directives NOLIST and LIST you overrule this option for a part of the code that you do not want to appear in the list file Directives of this kind sometimes are called controls Each assembler directive has its own syntax Some assembler directives can be preceded with a label If you do not precede an assembler directive with a label you must use white space instead spaces or tabs You can use assembler directives in the assembly code as pseudo instructions 4 8 1 Overview of Assembler Directives The following tables provide an overview of all assembler directives For a detailed description of these directives refer to section 4 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives 4 8 Assembly Language Overv
157. al seek EROFS 19 Read only file system EPIPE 20 Broken pipe ELOOP 21 Too many levels of symbolic links ENAMETOOLONG 22 File name too long Floating point errors EDOM 23 Argument too large ERANGE 24 Result too large Errors returned by prinff scanf ERR_FORMAT 25 Illegal format string for printf scanf ERR_NOFLOAT 26 Floating point not supported ERR_NOLONG 27 Long not supported ERR_NOPOINT 28 Pointers not supported Encoding error stored in errno by functions like fgetwc getwc mbrtowc etc EILSEQ 29 Invalid or incomplete multibyte or wide character Errors set by RTOS EILSEQ 30 Operation canceled ENODEV 31 No such device 3 2 5 fentl h The file ont1 h contains the function open which calls the low level function open and definitions of flags used by the low level function open This header file is not defined in ISO C99 open Opens a file for reading or writing Calls open FSS implementation 3 4 Libraries 3 2 6 fenv h Contains mechanisms to control the floating point environment The functions in this header file are not implemented fegetenv Stores the current floating point environment Not implemented feholdexept Saves the current floating point environment and installs an environment that ignores all floating point exceptions Not implemented fesetenv Restores a previously saved fegetenv or feholdexcept floating point environment Not implemented feupdateenv Saves the currently raise
158. alue MAX A B A gt B A B On the command line use the option D as follows cmb D MAX A B A gt B A B test c 5 8 Tool Options C Compiler Note that the macro name and definition are placed between double quotes because otherwise the spaces would indicate a new option Related information C compiler option undefine Undefine preprocessor macro C compiler option option file Read options from file 5 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler dep file Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option dep file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax dep file file Description With this option you tell the compiler to generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile In contrast to the option preprocess make Em the dependency information will be generated in addition to the normal output file By default the information is written to a file with extension d one for every input file When you specify a filename all dependencies will be combined in the specified file Example cmb dep file test dep test c The compiler compiles the file test c which results in the output file test src and generates dependency lines in the file test dep Related information db C compiler option prep
159. ame of the primary source file with the suffix replaced by an implementation specified suffix pch by default Unless pch dir is specified see below it is created in the directory of the primary source file When a precompiled header file is created or used a message such as test cc creating precompiled header file test pch is issued The user may suppress the message by using the command line option no pch messages When the option pch verbose is used the C compiler will display a message for each precompiled header file that is considered that cannot be used giving the reason that it cannot be used 2 25 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference In automatic mode i e when pch is used the C compiler will deem a precompiled header file obsolete and delete it under the following circumstances e ifthe precompiled header file is based on at least one out of date header file but is otherwise applicable for the current compilation or e ifthe precompiled header file has the same base name as the source file being compiled e g xxx pch and xxx cc but is not applicable for the current compilation e g because of different command line options This handles some common cases other PCH file clean up must be dealt with by other means e g by the user Support for precompiled header processing is not available when multiple source files are specified in a single compilation an error will be issued and the compi
160. an additionally specify the address size of the chosen format option address size Example To generate an Motorola S record output file ccmb format SREC testl c test2 c output test sre Related information db Control program option address size Set address size for linker IHEX SREC files Linker option output Specify an output object file Linker option chip output Generate hex file for each chip 5 244 Tool Options Control Program Control Program global type checking Command line syntax global type checking Description The C compiler already performs type checking within each module Use this option when you want the linker to perform type checking between modules Related information d C compiler option global type checking Global type checking 5 245 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program help Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the argument options you can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options ccmb ccmb help ccmb To see a detailed description of the available options enter ccmb help options 5 246 Tool Options Control Program Control Program include directory l Command line syntax include directory path Ipath Description Wi
161. an think of them as a simultaneous definition and call of an unnamed macro The source statements between the FOR and ENDFOR directives and REPEAT and ENDREP directives follow the same rules as macro definitions d gt For a detailed description of these directives see section 4 8 Assembler Directives 4 9 5 Conditional Assembly With the conditional assembly directives you can instruct the macro preprocessor to use a part of the code that matches a certain condition You can specify assembly conditions with arguments in the case of macros or through definition of symbols via the DEFINE SET and EQU directives The built in functions of the assembler provide a versatile means of testing many conditions of the assembly environment You can use conditional directives also within a macro definition to check at expansion time if arguments fall within a range of allowable values In this way macros become self checking and can generate error messages to any desired level of detail The conditional assembly directive IF ENDIF has the following form IF expression ELIF expression the ELIF directive is optional ELSE the ELSE directive is optional ENDIF 4 48 Assembly Language A section of a program that is to be conditionally assembled must be bounded by an IF ENDIF directive pair If the optional ELSE and or ELIF directives are not present then the source statements following the IF direct
162. and dynamically initialized local static variables are not allowed inside a statement expression Labels can be declared to be local in statement expressions by introducing them witha __label__ declaration _label_ lab int i 4 lab i 2 i 1 if 1 17 goto lab i Not evaluated parts of constant expressions can contain non constant terms int i int af 1 i Accepted in gcc gt mode Casts on an lvalue that don t fall under the usual Ivalue cast interpretation e g because they cast to a type having a different size are ignored and the operand remains an lvalue A warning is issued int i short i 0 Accepted cast is ignored entire int is set Variable length arrays VLAs are supported GNU C also allows VLA types for fields of local structures which can lead to run time dependent sizes and offsets The C compiler does not implement this but instead treats such arrays as having length zero with a warning this enables some popular programming idioms involving fields with VLA types void f int n struct int a n Warning n ignored and replaced by zero hi Complex type extensions are supported these are the same as the C99 complex type features with the elimination of _Imaginary and the addition of _ complex real imag the use of to denote complex conjugation and complex literals such as 1 2i 2 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference If an explicit instantiation d
163. and line syntax no extern inline Default inline functions are allowed to have external linkage Description Disable support for inline functions with external linkage in C When inline functions are allowed to have external linkage as required by the standard then extern and inline are compatible specifiers on a non member function declaration the default linkage when inline appears alone is external that is inline means extern inline on non member functions and an inline member function takes on the linkage of its class which is usually external However when inline functions have only internal linkage using no extern inline then extern and inline are incompatible the default linkage when inline appears alone is internal that is inline means static inline on non member functions and inline member functions have internal linkage no matter what the linkage of their class Related information dE Section 2 8 Extern Inline Functions in chapter C Language 5 112 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no for init diff warning Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no for init diff warning to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no for init diff warning Description Disable a warning that is issued when programs compiled without the o
164. and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option strict warnings to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax strict warnings a Default non ANSI ISO C features are enabled Description This option is similar to the option strict but all violations are issued as warnings instead of errors Example To enable strict ANSI mode with warning diagnostic messages enter cpmb strict warnings test cc Related information d C compiler option strict Strict ANSI ISO mode with errors 5 144 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler suppress vtbl Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 In the Virtual function tables field select Suppress definition of virtual function tables Command line syntax suppress vtbl Description Suppress definition of virtual function tables in cases where the heuristic used by the C compiler to decide on definition of virtual function tables provides no guidance The virtual function table for a class is defined in a compilation if the compilation contains a definition of the first non inline non pure virtual function of the class For classes that contain no such function the default behavior is to define the virtual function table but to define it as a local static entity The suppress vtbl option suppresses the definition of the
165. any combination of integers or ASCII literal strings Expressions follow the conventional rules of algebra and boolean arithmetic Expressions that can be evaluated at assembly time are called absolute expressions Expressions where the result is unknown until all sections have been combined and located are called relocatable or relative expressions When any operand of an expression is relocatable the entire expression is relocatable Relocatable expressions are emitted in the object file and evaluated by the linker 4 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The assembler evaluates expressions with 64 bit precision in two s complement The syntax of an expression can be any of the following numeric contant string symbol expression binary_operator expression unary_operator expression expression function call All types of expressions are explained in separate sections 4 6 1 Numeric Constants Numeric constants can be used in expressions If there is no prefix by default the assembler assumes the number is a decimal number Base Description Example f i a 0b1101 Binary A 0b prefix followed by binary digits 0 1 Or use a b suffix 11001010b 0x12FF Hexadecimal A Ox prefix followed by a hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f Or use a h suffix 0x45 OfalOh Decimal ae 12 integer Decimal digits 0 9 1245 Table 4 2 Numeric constants 4 6 2 Strings ASCII charac
166. ariable after the ifndef pragma once optional ifndef FILE _H define FILE _H body of the header file endif The pragma once is marked as optional in this example because the C compiler recognizes the ifndef idiom and does the optimization even in its absence pragma once is accepted for compatibility with other compilers and to allow the programmer to use other guard code idioms ident This pragma is given in the form pragma ident string or ident string 2 21 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 2 10 Predefined Macros The C compiler defines a number of preprocessing macros Many of them are only defined under certain circumstances This section describes the macros that are provided and the circumstances under which they are defined Macro Description __ABI COMPATIBILITY VERSION Defines the ABI compatibility version being used This macro is set to 9999 which means the latest version This macro is used when building the C library __ABI_CHANGES FOR _RTTI This macro is set to TRUE meaning that the ABI changes for RTTI are implemented This macro is used when building the C library __ABI CHANGES FOR ARRAY NEW _AND DELETE This macro is set to TRUE meaning that the ABI changes for array new and delete are implemented This macro is used when building the C library __ABI_CHANGES FOR PLACEMENT DELETE This macro is set to TRUE meaning that the ABI c
167. arnings 5 271 static 5 272 undefine 5 273 verbose 5 274 version 5 275 warnings as errors 5 276 C 5 233 D 5 235 d 5 256 E 5 268 F 5 261 f 5 265 g 5 234 I 5 247 Index 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference k 5 251 L 5 254 l 5 253 I library 5 255 n 5 238 0 5 266 p 5 269 t 5 252 U 5 273 V 5 275 V 5 274 W 5 267 w 5 264 preprocessing 5 235 Copy assignment operator 5 62 Copy table 8 16 8 32 copysign functions 3 9 cos functions 3 7 cosh functions 3 8 Cross reference file 5 159 ctime 3 21 D Data types 1 2 db 4 14 dd 4 15 Debug info 5 234 Debug information 5 166 define 4 16 defined 4 7 Defining a macro 4 45 Dependent name processing 5 106 Derivative definition 8 1 8 20 dh 4 17 difftime 3 21 Digraph 5 60 Directives 4 1 div 3 19 Dollar signs 5 70 Double as float 5 261 ds 4 18 dsb 4 18 dsd 4 18 dsh 4 18 dsw 4 18 dw 4 19 E ELF DWARF object format 7 1 Embedded C 5 71 end 4 20 endextern_sdata 1 9 endprofile 1 10 endprotect 1 10 Entities remove unneeded 5 138 enum overloading 5 109 EOF 3 12 equ 4 21 Index 6 erf functions 3 10 erfc functions 3 10 errno 3 4 Error limit 5 73 Error output file 5 72 Exception handling 5 74 exit 3 18 EXIT_FAILURE 3 17 EXIT_SUCCES 3 17 exp functions 3 8 exp2 functions 3 8 explicit specifier 5 110 expm1 functions 3 8 export keyword 2
168. at file B contains the definition for the member function push There would be no file containing both the definition of push and the definition of x 2 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference instantiate all Instantiate all template entities declared or referenced in the compilation unit For each fully instantiated template class all of its member functions and static data members will be instantiated whether or not they were used Non member template functions will be instantiated even if the only reference was a declaration instantiate local Similar to instantiate used except that the functions are given internal linkage This is intended to provide a very simple mechanism for those getting started with templates The compiler will instantiate the functions that are used in each compilation unit as local functions and the program will link and run correctly barring problems due to multiple copies of local static variables However one may end up with many copies of the instantiated functions so this is not suitable for production use instantiate local cannot be used in conjunction with automatic template instantiation If automatic instantiation is enabled by default it will be disabled by the instantiate local option In the case where the control program is called with a single file to compile and link e g ccmb test cc the compiler knows that all instantiations will have to be done in the single source file There
169. ate list file 5 181 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler preprocess E Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option preprocess to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax preprocess E Description With this option the assembler will only preprocess the assembly source file The assembler sends the preprocessed file to stdout Related information J 5 182 Tool Options Assembler Assembler preprocessor type m Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option preprocessor type to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax preprocessor type none tasking m n t Default mt Description With this option you select the preprocessor that the assembler will use By default the assembler uses the TASKING preprocessor When the assembly source file does not contain any preprocessor symbols you can specify to the assembler not to use a preprocessor Related information i 5 183 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler section info t Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assem
170. ation into warning and Turn required rule violation into warning Command line syntax misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Description Normally if an advisory rule or required rule is violated the compiler generates an error AS a consequence no output file is generated With this option the compiler generates a warning instead of an error Related information d gt C compiler option misrac Linker option misrac report 5 29 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler misrac version Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select the MISRA C standard 1998 or 2004 Command line syntax misrac version 1998 2004 Description MISRA C rules exist in two versions MISRA C 1998 and MISRA C 2004 By default the C source is checked against the MISRA C 2004 rules With this option you can specify to check against the MISRA C 1998 rules Related information d See Chapter 10 MISRA C Rules for a list of all supported MISRA C rules C compiler option misrac 5 30 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler noclear Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option noclear to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax noclea
171. ax_t strtoumax const char Convert string to maximum sized unsigned integer Compare strtoul restrict nptr char restrict endptr int base intmax_t westoimax const wchar_t Convert wide string to maximum sized integer Compare wctol restrict nptr wchar_t re strict endptr int base uintmax_t westoumax const wchar_t Convert wide string to maximem sized unsigned integer Compare wctoul restrict nptr wchar_t re strict endptr int base 3 2 10 io h The header file io h contains definitions and prototypes for low level I O functions This header file is not defined in ISO IEC9899 _close fd Used by the functions close and fclose FSS implementation _lseek fd offset whence Used by all file positioning functions fgetpos fseek fsetpos ftell rewind FSS imple mentation _open fd flags Used by the functions fopen and freopen FSS implementation _read fd buff cnt Reads a sequence of characters from a file FSS implementation _unlink name Used by the function remove FSS implementation _write fd buffer cnt Writes a sequence of characters to a file FSS implementation 3 2 11 iso646 h The header file iso646 h adds tokens that can be used instead of regular operator tokens define and amp amp define and_eq amp define bitand amp define bitor define compl define not define not_eq define or define or_eq define xor define xor_eq 3 6 L
172. b h gt shall not be used The library functions abort exit getenv and system from library lt stdlib h gt shall not be used The time handling functions of library lt time h gt shall not be used Minimization of run time failures shall be ensured by the use of at least one of a static analysis tools techniques b dynamic analysis tools techniques c explicit coding of checks to handle run time faults Index Index Symbols define 5 68 include system include directory 5 146 undef 5 152 __ABI_CHANGES_FOR_ARRAY_NEW_AND_DELETE 2 22 __ABI_CHANGES_ FOR_PLACEMENT_DELETE 2 22 __ABI_CHANGES_FOR_RTTI 2 22 __ABI_COMPATIBILITY_VERSION 2 22 __align 1 2 __ARRAY_OPERATORS 2 22 __asm syntax 1 5 __at 1 4 _ BASE FILE _ 2 22 __BIG_ENDIAN __ 1 12 2 22 _ BUILD _ 1 12 2 22 4 3 __CHAR_MAX 2 22 __CHAR_MIN 2 22 __CMB_ 1 12 __ cplusplus 2 22 __CPMB __ 2 22 _ DATE _ 2 22 __DELTA_TYPE 2 22 __DOUBLE_FP_ 1 12 2 22 __embedded_cplusplus 2 22 __EXCEPTIONS 2 22 _ FILE _ 2 22 _ func 2 22 __HW_BARRELSHIFT _ 1 12 __HW_DIVIDE __ 1 12 __HW_FPU_ 1 12 __HW_MSR__ 1 12 __HW_MULTIPLY_ 1 12 __HW_PCMP_ 1 12 __IMPLICIT_USING_STD 2 22 __interrupt 1 18 __JMP_BUF_ELEMENT_TYPE 2 22 __JMP_BUF_NUM_ELEMENTS 2 22 __LINE _ 2 22 _ MB_ 4 3 __NAMESPACES 2 22 __NO_LONG_LONG 2 22 __noinline 1 15 __NULL_EH_REGION_NUMBER 2 23 __packed__ 1 2 __PLACEMENT_DELETE 2 23 __PRETTY_FUNCTION _ 2 23 __PTRDIFF_M
173. ber generation rand srand seed Memory management malloc size calloc nobj size free ptr realloc ptr size Returns a pseudo random integer in the range 0 to RAND_MAX Same as rand but uses seed for a new sequence of pseudo random numbers Allocates space for an object with size size The allocated space is not initialized Returns a pointer to the allocated space Allocates space for n objects with size size The allocated space is initialized with zeros Returns a pointer to the allocated space Deallocates the memory space pointed to by pir which should be a pointer earlier returned by the malloc or calloc function Deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a new object with size size while preserving its contents If the new size is smaller than the old size some contents at the end of the old region will be discarded If the new size is larger than the old size all of the old contents are preserved and any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object will have indeterminate values Environment communication abort atexit func exit status _Exit status Causes abnormal program termination If the signal SIGABRTis caught the signal handler may take over control See section 3 2 17 signal h Func points to a function that is called without arguments when the program normally terminates Causes normal program termination Acts as if main returns with
174. bler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Enable the option Display section information Command line syntax section info flags t flags You can set the following flags console c C Display section information on stdout list I L Write section information to the list file Description With this option you tell the assembler to display section information For each section its memory space size total cycle counts and name is listed on stdout and or in the list file The cycle count consists of two parts the total accumulated count for the section and the total accumulated count for all repeated instructions In the case of nested loops it is possible that the total supersedes the section total Without arguments this option is the same as section info cl With section info l the assembler writes the section information to the list file You must specify this option in combination with the option list file generate list file Example asmb list file section info console list test srce The assembler generates a list file and writes the section information to this file The section information is also displayed on stdout Related information d gt Assembler option list file generate list file 5 184 Tool Options Assembler Assembler symbol scope i Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears
175. bug info AHLS the assembler does not generate any debug information Related information J 5 163 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Click on User macro click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input 4 Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click outside the cell to confirm 5 Optionally click in the Value field and enter a definition Then click outside the cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the assembler preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line you can use the option define D multiple times If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the assembler with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the assembly source is for example useful in combination with conditional assembly as shown in the example below aN This option has the same effect as defining symbols via the DEFINE SET and E
176. c Not valid is cmb g According to the syntax description you have to specify a filename Icons The following illustrations are used in this manual aN Note notes give you extra information A Warning read the information carefully It prevents you from making serious mistakes or from loosing information amp This illustration indicates actions you can perform with the mouse Such as Altium Designer menu entries and dialogs E Command line type your input on the command line db Reference follow this reference to find related topics MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Related Publications C Standards ISO IEC 9899 1999 E Programming languages C ISO IEC More information on the standards can be found at http www ansi org DSP C An Extension to ISO IEC 9899 1999 E Programming languages C TASKING TK0071 14 C Standards The C Programming Language second edition by Bjarne Straustrup 1991 Addison Wesley ISO IEC 14882 1998 C standard ANSI More information on the standards can be found at http www ansi org The Annotated C Reference Manual by Margaret A Ellis and Bjarne Straustrup 1990 Addison Wesley CERT C Secure Coding Standard The CERT C Secure Coding Standard by Robert C Seacord October 2008 Addison Wesley The CERT C Secure Coding Standard web site http www securecoding cert org For general information about CERT secure coding see http www cert org secure
177. case the alignment will be one bit for bit fields or one byte for other objects or structure members At the left side of a pointer declaration you can use the type qualifier unaligned to mark the pointer value as potentially unaligned This can be useful to access externally defined data However the compiler can generate less efficient instructions to dereference such a pointer to avoid unaligned memory access C Language Example struct char c _ unaligned int i aligned at offset 1 S _ unaligned int up amp s i Packed structures To prevent alignment gaps in structures you can use the attribute packed__ When you use the attribute packed__ directly after the keyword struct all structure members are marked __ unaligned For example the following two declarations are the same struct _ packed __ char c int i sl struct char _ unaligned c int unaligned i _ unaligned at right side of to pack pointer member s2 The attribute packed___ has the same effect as adding the type qualifier unaligned to the declaration to suppress the standard alignment You can also use _ packed ___ina pointer declaration In that case it affects the alignment of the pointer itself not the value of the pointer The following two declarations are the same int _ unaligned p int p _packed_ Change alignment With the attribute __align n you can overrule the defaul
178. cated by an initializer of and causes zeroing of certain POD typed members where the usual default initialization would leave them uninitialized A partial specialization of a class member template cannot be added outside of the class definition Qualification conversions may be performed as part of the template argument deduction process The export keyword for templates is implemented 2 3 2 C 0x Language Features Accepted The following features added in the working paper for the next C standard expected to be completed in 2009 or later are enabled in C 0x mode with option c 0x Several of these features are also enabled in default nonstrict C mode A right shift token gt gt can be treated as two closing angle brackets For example template lt typename T gt struct S S lt S lt int gt gt s OK No whitespace needed between closing angle brackets The friend class syntax is extended to allow nonclass types as well as class types expressed through a typedef or without an elaborated type name For example typedef struct S ST class C friend S OK requires S to be in scope friend ST OK same as friend S friend int OK no effect friend S const Error cv qualifiers cannot appear directly hi Mixed string literal concatenations are accepted a feature carried over from C99 wchar_t str a L b OK same as L ab Variadic macros and empty macr
179. ce were at a premium you could decide to make comnfile h pull in all the header files used then a single PCH file could be used in building the program Different environments and different projects will have different needs but in general users should be aware that making the best use of the precompiled header support will require some experimentation and probably some minor changes to source code 2 27 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 2 28 3 Libraries Summary This chapter lists all library functions that you can call in your C source 3 1 Introduction This chapter contains an overview of all library functions that you can call in your C source This includes all functions of the standard C library ISO C99 and some functions of the floating point library A number of standard operations within C are too complex to generate inline code for too much code These operations are implemented as run time library functions to save code Section 3 2 Library Functions gives an overview of all library functions you can use grouped per header file A number of functions declared in wchar h are parallel to functions in other header files These are discussed together The following libraries are available Altium Designer automatically selects the appropriate libraries depending on the specified options C Library Libraries Description cmbaa lib C library cmbab lib some functions also need th
180. coding MISRA C Guidelines for the Use of the C Language in Vehicle Based Software MIRA limited 1998 See also http www misra org uk MISRA C 2004 Guidelines for the use of the C Language in critical systems MIRA limited 2004 See also http www misra c com TASKING Tools Using the MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Altium GU0114 Summary 1 C Language 1 1 Introduction The TASKING C compiler fully supports the ISO C standard but adds possibilities to program the special functions of the MicroBlaze In addition to the standard C language the compiler supports the following intrinsic built in functions that result in target specific assembly instructions pragmas to control the compiler from within the C source predefined macros the possibility to use assembly instructions in the C source keywords to specify memory types for data and functions attribute to specify absolute addresses keywords for inlining functions and programming interrupt routines libraries All non standard keywords have two leading underscores _ This chapter describes the target specific features of the C language including language extensions that are not standard in ISO C For example pragmas are a way to control the compiler from within the C source In this chapter the target specific characteristics of the C language are described including the above mentioned extensions 1 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1
181. corresponding address bus The bus name is used to identify a bus and does not conflict with other identifiers Bus descriptions in an architecture definition or derivative definition define internal buses Some internal buses are used to communicate with the components outside the core or processor Such buses on a processor have physical pins reserved for the number of bits specified with the width statements e The mau field specifies the MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the data bus This field is required e The width field specifies the width number of address lines of the data bus The default value is the MAU size e The map keyword specifies how this bus maps onto another bus if so Mappings are described in section 8 5 4 Mappings bus bus_name mau 8 width 8 map map_description 8 5 3 Defining Address Spaces With the space keyword you define a logical address space The space name is used to identify the address space and does not conflict with other identifiers 8 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e The id field defines how the addressing space is identified in object files In general each address space has a unique ID The linker locates sections with a certain ID in the address space with the same ID This field is required In IEEE this ID is specified explicitly for sections and symbols ELF sections map by default to the address space with ID 1 Sections with one of the special names d
182. cs of the Section Layout Definition for more information on how to locate a section at a specific place in memory Skeleton of a Linker Script File The skeleton of a linker script file now looks as follows architecture architecture_name architecture definition derivative derivative_name derivative definition 8 2 Linker Script Language processor processor name processor definition memory definitions and or bus definitions section_layout space_name section placement statements 8 3 Syntax of the Linker Script Language 8 3 1 Preprocessing When the linker loads an LSL file the linker processes it with a C style prepocessor As such it strips C and C comments You can use the standard ISO C preprocessor directives such as include define if else endif For example include arch 1s1 Preprocess and include the file arch 1s1 at this point in the LSL file 8 3 2 Lexical Syntax The following lexicon is used to describe the syntax of the Linker Script Language A B A is defined as B A BC A is defined as B and C B is followed by C A B C A is defined as B or C lt B gt 0 1 zero or one occurrence of B lt B gt gt 0 zero of more occurrences of B lt B gt gt 1 one of more occurrences of B IDENTIFIER a character sequence starting with a z A Z or _ Following characters may also be digits and dots STRING seque
183. cter long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent cmb Oac test c cmb optimize coalesce cse test c When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 5 2 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler align composites Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Select the Alignment of composite types Natural alignment or Optimal alignment Command line syntax align composites alignment You can specify the following alignments n Natural alignment default o Optimal alignment Description With this option you can set the alignment for composite types structs unions and arrays Natural alignment n uses the natural alignment of the most aligned member of the composite type Optimal alignment 0 sets the alignment to 8 16 or 32 bits depending on the size of the composite type Related information J 5 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler cert Menu entry 1 From th
184. ction Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no class name injection to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no class name injection Default the name of a class is injected into the scope of the class as required by the standard Description Do not inject the name of a class into the scope of the class as was true in earlier versions of the C language Related information do 5 104 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no const string literals Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no const string literals to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no const string literals Default C string literals and wide string literals are const as required by the standard Description With this option C string literals and wide string literals are non const as was true in earlier versions of the C language Related information f 5 105 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no dep name Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneo
185. ction 1 9 3 Inlining Functions inline __noinline By default small fuctions that are not too often called from different locations are inlined This reduces execution speed at the cost of code size C compiler option Oi With the pragma noinline pragma smartinline you can temporarily disable this optimization With the C compiler options inline max incr and inline max size you have more control over the automatic function inlining process of the compiler See for more information the C compiler options inline max iner and inline max size in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options macro nomacro Turns macro expansion on or off By default macro expansion is enabled maxcalldepth value Control the maximum call depth By default the maximum is infinite 1 Gb See C compiler option max call1 depth in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options message message Print the message string s on standard output MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference optimize flags endoptimize You can overrule the compiler option O for the code between the pragmas optimize and endoptimize The pragma works the same as compiler option O See section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in Chapter Using the Compiler in the user s manual See C compiler option optimize O in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options profile flag endprofile Control the
186. ctions math h tgmath h Description sin sinf sinl sin Returns the sine of x cos cosf cosl cos Returns the cosine of x tan tanf tanl tan Returns the tangent of x asin asinf asinl asin Returns the arc sine sin x of x 3 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference math h tgmath h Description acos acosf acosl acos Returns the arc cosine cos x of x atan atanf atanl atan Returns the arc tangent tan x of x atan2 atan2f atan2l atan2 Returns the result of tan y x sinh sinhf sinhl sinh Returns the hyperbolic sine of x cosh coshf coshl cosh Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x tanh tanhf tanhl tanh Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x asinh asinhf asinhl asinh Returns the arc hyperbolic sinus of x acosh acoshf acoshl acosh Returns the non negative arc hyperbolic cosinus of x atanh atanhf atanhl atanh Returns the arc hyperbolic tangent of x Exponential and logarithmic functions All of these functions are new in ISO C99 except for exp log and 1o0g10 math h tgmath h Description exp expf expl exp Returns the result of the exponential function ex exp2 exp2f exp2l1 exp2 Returns the result of the exponential function 2 Not implemented expml expmlf expmll expml Returns the result of the exponential function ex 1 Not implemented log logf logl log Returns the natural logarithm 1n x x gt 0 log10 1logl0f 1log101 10gl10 Returns the base 10 logarithm of x x gt 0 loglp loglpf loglpl loglp Ret
187. ctions therefore take arguments of type char However many functions have also parallel wide character functions which take arguments of type wchar_t These functions are declared in wchar h Copying and concatenation functions stdio h wchar h Description memcpy s1 s2 n memmove sl1 s2 n strcpy sl1 s2 strncpy sl s2 n wmemcpy s1 s2 n Copies n characters from s2 into s1 and returns s1 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined wmemmove sl1 s2 n Same as memcpy but overlapping strings are handled correctly Returns s1 wescpy s1 s2 Copies s2 into s7 and returns s7 If s and s2 overlap the result is undefined wesncpy s1 s2 n Copies not more than n characters from s2 into s1 and returns s7 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined 3 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference stdio h wchar h Description strcat sl1 s2 strncat sl1 s2 n Comparison functions stdio h wescat sl1 s2 wesncat sl1 s2 n wchar h Appends a copy of s2 to s7 and returns s7 If s7 and s2 overlap the result is undefined Appends not more than n characters from s2 to s7 and returns s7 If s1 and s2 overlap the result is undefined Description memcmp sl1 s2 n stremp sl1 s2 strncmp sl s2 n strcoll sl1 s2 strxfrm sl1 s2 n Search functions stdio h wmemcmp sl1 s2 n wescmp sl1 s2 wesncemp sl1 s2
188. d evo E E ot Haan eae baie ree om RN 3 3 3 2 2 COMPIOKN niteanatund Fie whee Rae ident ce RA ten Raw halen dane gui ehh Be 3 3 3 2 3 ctype Nand wetypell ca2ccsee Ca ete Wea ed OE ene eo Sek bed Ni aed 3 3 3 2 4 GMO iire cede hewe ees eon manne aa ace ag lend oy RORE E ea Sa aun Mae Deals 3 4 3 2 5 TON esc tiowisin oneeto deed obhiet 4 toe deed ddes where edaadled bea petal 3 4 3 2 6 TONVA sider eek goes nba eiy nag eiba doubly ai ia deawda Pane gtaeme pied Goede eee onde 3 5 3 2 7 float h esscr einoka rere eee hee ew Hee a edb iene eek once d h a E a a Seas Gee 3 5 3 2 8 ISS naiie eee aabess Sata aincin wae peas ape menu ed maya dents E TN RA D A eed ees s 3 5 3 2 9 Inttypes Mand stdint M wii sk ee eels eee eka Dek ee eae Pe eee eae ae 3 6 3 2 10 IO bade cid did betiwks Cada were dos donde bin day gated ated kd ede ewe deem es 3 6 3 2 11 ISOGAG Matiis rags Bd atte a ete eesti A eh a a iene A 3 6 3 2 12 IMIS saves aeo ie ee vine POU adn A ate Cais Hele aoe ee 3 7 3 2 13 logale UAE ss Ped acces ee he eens A E Mai eater pone ah Pah nw ame kOe af Cle eden ee ae mb 3 7 3 2 14 maloe Sicccilctt ita pa Ge dela Reads Gall ewok ehh E E ae Ganda AAS 3 7 3 2 15 Math Wane tgmath A sence eek owe ae ete we eto at we aan a a ence acts gene de nat 3 7 3 2 16 SCUMP rerea ger eaten aie Veli E e a a E E Ga ea dh Ona hd Wa eed 3 11 3 2 17 SIQNAUA areri eke perence ere ieee dd ne Relea ge ae peas aa dee eens 3 11 3 2 18 stdargihi g cc4 cid waweeetneloe ech iaaea g
189. d floating point exceptions restores a previousely saved floating point environ ment and finally raises the saved exceptions Not implemented feclearexcept Clears the current exception status flags corresponding to the flags specified in the argument Not im plemented fegetexceptflag Stores the current setting of the floating point status flags Not implemented feraiseexcept Raises the exceptions represented in the argument As a result other exceptions may be raised as well Not implemented fesetexceptflag Sets the current floating point status flags Not implemented fetestexcept Returns the bitwise OR of the exception macros corresponding to the exception flags which are current ly set and are specified in the argument Not implemented For each supported exception a macro is defined The following exceptions are defined FE_DIVBYZERO FE_INEXACT FE_ INVALID FE_OVERFLOW FE_UNDERFLOW FE_ALL EXCEPT fegetround Returns the current rounding direction represented as one of the values of the rounding direction mac ros Not implemented fesetround Sets the current rounding directions Not implemented Currently no rounding mode macros are implemented 3 2 7 float h The header file float h defines the characteristics of the real floating point types float double and long double AN Float h used to contain prototypes for the functions copysign f isinf f isfinite f isnan f and scalb f These functions have acco
190. d for the relocatable code part in the listing For lines that allocate space the code field contains the text RESERVED For lines that initialize a buffer the code field lists one value followed by the word REPEATS CYCLES The first number in this column is the number of instruction cycles needed to execute the instruction s as generated in the CODE field The second number is the accumulated cycle count of this section LINE This column contains the line number This is a decimal number indicating each input line starting from 1 and incrementing with each source line SOURCE LINE This column contains the source text This is a copy of the source line from the assembly source file For the SET and EQU directives the ADDR and CODE columns do not apply The symbol value is listed instead Related information See section 5 6 Generating a List File in Chapter Using the Assembler of the user s manual for more information on how to generate a list file and specify the amount of list file information 6 2 List File Formats 6 2 Linker Map File Format The linker map file is an additional output file of the linker that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files obj to output sections The locate part shows the absolute position of each section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address With the linker optio
191. d in an if while do while or for as the first operand of a operator or as an operand of the amp amp or operators may have a pointer to member type or a class type that can be converted to a pointer to member type in addition to the scalar cases permitted by the ARM 2 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e Qualified names are allowed in elaborated type specifiers e Aglobal scope qualifier is allowed in member references of the form x A B and p gt A B e The precedence of the third operand of the operator is changed e If control reaches the end of the main routine and main has an integral return type it is treated as if a return 0 statement were executed e Pointers to arrays with unknown bounds as parameter types are diagnosed as errors e A functional notation cast of the form A can be used even if A is a class without a nontrivial constructor The temporary created gets the same default initialization to zero as a static object of the class type e A cast can be used to select one out of a set of overloaded functions when taking the address of a function e Template friend declarations and definitions are permitted in class definitions and class template definitions e Type template parameters are permitted to have default arguments e Function templates may have nontype template parameters e Areference to const volatile cannot be bound to an rvalue e Qualification co
192. d non_interruptable int a int b Gls Refer also to the MicroBlaze Processor Reference Guide 1 10 Libraries The TASKING compilers come with standard C libraries ISO IEC 9899 1999 and header files with the appropriate prototypes for the library functions All standard C libraries are available in object format and in C or assembly source code A number of standard operations within C are too complex to generate inline code for too much code These operations are implemented as run time library functions to save code db See section 3 2 Library Functions in Chapter Libraries for an extensive description of all standard C library functions 1 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1 10 1 Printf and Scanf Routines The C library functions printf fprintf vfprintf vsprintf call one single function doprint that deals with the format string and arguments The same applies to all scanf type functions which call the function doscan and also for the wprint and wscanf type functions which call _dowprint and _dowscan respectively The C library contains three versions of these routines int long and long long versions If you use floating point the formatter function for floating point _dof1t or dow f1t is called Depending on the formatting arguments you use the correct routine is used from the library Of course the larger the version of the routine the larger your produced code will be Note
193. d the option remove unneeded entities to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax remove unneeded entities Description Enable an optimization to remove types variables routines and related constructs that are not really needed Something may be referenced but unneeded if it is referenced only by something that is itself unneeded certain entities such as global variables and routines defined in the translation unit are always considered to be needed Related information i 5 138 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler rtti Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Support for RTTI run time type information Command line syntax rtti Default RTTI run time type information features are disabled Description Enable support for RTTI run time type information features dynamic_cast typeid The macro __RTTI is defined when RTTI support is enabled Related information J 5 139 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler schar s Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option schar to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax schar S Description With t
194. d_spec vector value reserved_range vector_table section_name vecttab_spec lt vecttab_spec gt lt vector_def gt gt vector_size expr size expr id_symbol_prefix symbol_name run_addr addr_absolute template section_name template_symbol symbol_name vector_prefix section_name fill vector _ value no_inline copy vector vector_spec lt vector _spec gt id vector_id_spec fill vector_value number range lt range gt 9 symbol_name number lt number gt gt loop lt expr gt l1 reserved expr expr e The end address is not part of the range endianness_ def 235 endianness_type 235 endianness lt endianness_type gt big little 8 3 9 Derivative Definition derivative _definition derivative derivative_name lt parameter _ list gt 9 1 lt extends derivative_name lt argument_list gt 2 1 gt 0 1 lt derivative_spec gt e Aderivative_definition defines a derivative with the given derivative_name as a unique name 8 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference derivative_spec core def bus_def mem_def section_definition no processor name section_setup core_def core core name lt core_descr gt gt 0 e Acore_def defines a core with the given core_name as a unique name e Atleast one core_def must be present in a derivative_definition core_descr architecture arch
195. dependency information will be generated in addition to the normal output file By default the information is written to a file with extension d one for every input file When you specify a filename all dependencies will be combined in the specified file Example comb dep file test dep t test c The compiler compiles the file test c which results in the output file test src and generates dependency lines in the file test dep Related information dE Control program option preprocess make Generate dependencies for make 5 236 Tool Options Control Program Control Program diag Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the control program does not process any files Example To display an explanation of message number 103 enter ccmb diag 103 This results in message 103 with explanation To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTM
196. do not specify a filename the error file will be named after the input file with extension ers Example To write errors to errors err instead of stderr enter asmb error file errors err test src Related information ie 5 167 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler error limit Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option error limit to the Additional assembler options field Command line syntax error limit number Description With this option you tell the assembler to only emit the specified maximum number of errors Without this option Same as 0 the assembler emits all errors Related information Gs 5 168 Tool Options Assembler Assembler help Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the argument options you can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options asmb asmb help asmb To see a detailed description of the available options enter asmb help options 5 169 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler include directory l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Option
197. double Treat double as float otherwise unrecognized as macro __HW_BARRELSHIFT _ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardware b otherwise unrecognized as macro HW DIVIDE __ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardware d otherwise unrecognized as macro __HW_FPU__ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardware f otherwise unrecognized as macro __HW_MSR__ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardwaress otherwise unrecognized as macro __HW_ MULTIPLY _ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardware m otherwise unrecognized as macro __HW_PCMP__ Expands to 1 if you used option use hardware p otherwise unrecognized as macro __ REVISION __ Identifies the revision number of the compiler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the compiler _ REVISION _ expands to 2 __ SINGLE _FP__ Expands to 1 if you used option no double Treat double as float otherwise unrecognized as macro _ TASKING _ Identifies the compiler as a TASKING compiler Expands to 1 if a TASKING compiler is used __VERSION__ Identifies the version number of the compiler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the compiler _VERSION__ expands to 1000 dot and revision number are omitted minor version number in 3 digits Table 1 4 Predefined preprocessor macros Example ifdef CMB __ this part is only compiled for the MicroBlaze endif 1 12 C Language 1 7 Strings
198. dress as large as the largest element in the overlay group The page keyword tells the linker to place the group in one page Instead of specifying a run time address you can specify a page and optional a page number Page numbers start from zero If you omit the page number the linker chooses a page The page keyword refers to pages in the address space as defined in the architecture definition With the page_size keyword you can override the page alignment and size set on the address space When you set the page size to zero the linker removes simple auto generated page restrictions from the selected sections See also the page_size keyword in section 8 5 3 Defining Address Spaces 8 29 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference group page group page 3 e With the priority keyword you can change the order in which sections are located This is useful when some sections are considered important for good performance of the application and a small amount of fast memory is available The value is a number for which the default is 1 so higher priorities start at 2 Sections with a higher priority are located before sections with a lower priority unless their relative locate priority is already determined by other restrictions like run_addr and page group priority 2 select importantcodel select importantcode2 8 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections Instead of selecting sections you can also crea
199. e template lt class T gt void f T void f int When regarded as a guiding declaration f int is an instance of the template otherwise it is an independent function for which a definition must be supplied Related information d gt C compiler option old specializations Old style template specializations 5 81 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler help Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax help item You can specify the following arguments options Show extended option descriptions Description Displays an overview of all command line options With an argument you can specify which extended information is shown Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options cpmb cpmb help cpmb The following invocation displays an extended list of the available options cpmb help options Related information J 5 82 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler implicit extern c type conversion Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option implicit extern c type conversion to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax implicit extern c type conversion Description Enable the implicit type conversion between pointers to extern C and exter
200. e spaces or tabs has to be followed by a colon The size of an identifier is only limited by the amount of available memory Examples LAB1 This label is followed by a colon and can be prefixed by whitespace LAB1 This label has to start at the beginning of a line instruction An instruction consists of a mnemonic and zero one or more operands It must not start in the first column Operands are described in section 4 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction The instructions are described in the target s Core Reference Manual The instruction can also be a so called generic instruction Generic instructions are pseudo instructions no instructions from the instruction set Depending on the situation in which a generic instruction is used the assembler replaces the generic instruction with appropriate real assembly instruction s For a complete list see section 4 10 Generic Instructions directive With directives you can control the assembler from within the assembly source Except for preprocessing directives these must not start in the first column Directives are described in section 4 8 Assembler Directives macro_call A call to a previously defined macro It must not start in the first column See section 4 9 Macro Operations comment Comment preceded by a semicolon You can use empty lines or lines with only comments 4 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 4 2 Assembler Significant Characters
201. e statement Example 1 no input or output A simple example without input or output parameters You can use any instruction or label Note that you can use standard C escape sequences __asm nop n t uw nop uw H Generated code nop nop Example 2 using output parameters Assign the result of inline assembly to a variable A register is chosen for the parameter because of the constraint r the compiler decides which register is best to use The 0 in the instruction template is replaced with the name of this register Finally the compiler generates code to assign the result to the output variable char out void main void _asm sbi 0 0xff r out Generated assembly code sbi r3 0xff sbi r3 r13 out _base_r13 C Language Example 3 using input and output parameters Add two C variables and assign the result to a third C variable Registers are used for the input parameters constraint r 1 for a and 2 for b in the instruction template and for the output parameter constraint r 0 for result in the instruction template The compiler generates code to move the input expressions into the input registers and to assign the result to the output variable char a b int result void main void a 3 b 4 __asm ADD 0 1 2 r result r a Generated assembly code main label code addik sbi addik sbi ADD swi rtsd or r3 r0 3 r3 r13 a _base_r13
202. e Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select CERT C Secure Code Checking 3 Make a selection from the CERT C secure code checking list 4 If you select Custom configuration expand the Custom Configuration entry and enable one or more individual recommendations rules Command line syntax cert all name name Description With this option you can enable one or more checks for CERT C Secure Coding Standard recommendations rules When you omit the argument all checks are enabled name is the name of a CERT recommendation rule consisting of three letters and two digits Specify only the three letter mnemonic to select a whole category For the list of names you can use see Chapter 9 CERT C Secure Coding Standard On the command line you can use diag cert to see a list of the available checks or you can use a three letter mnemonic to list only the checks in a particular category For example diag pre lists all supported preprocessor checks Example To enable the check for CERT rule STR30 C enter cmb cert str30 test c Related information Chapter 9 CERT C Secure Coding Standard C compiler option diag Explanation of diagnostic messages 5 4 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler check Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and
203. e also the stack keyword in section 8 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections The stack is described in terms of a minimum size min_size and the direction in which the stack grows grows This can be either from low_to_high addresses stack grows upwards this is the default or from high_to_low addresses stack grows downwards The min_size is required By default the linker tries to maximize the size of the stacks and heaps After locating all sections the largest remaining gap in the space is used completely for the stacks and heaps If you specify the keyword fixed you can disable this so called balloon behavior The size is also fixed if you used a stack or heap in the software layout definition in a restricted way For example when you override a stack with another size or select a stack in an ordered group with other sections The id keyword matches stack information generated by the compiler with a stack name specified in LSL This value assigned to this keyword is strongly related to the compiler s output so users are not supposed to change this configuration Optionally you can specify an alignment for the stack with the argument align This alignment must be equal or larger than the alignment that you specify for the address space itself e The heap keyword defines a heap in the address space and assigns a name to it The definition of a heap is similar to the definition of a stack See also the heap keyword in section 8 9
204. e and non static template functions and template static data members The instantiation mode determines the template entities for which code should be generated based on the template definition Normally when a file is compiled template entities are instantiated wherever they are used the linker will discard duplicate definitions The overall instantiation mode can however be changed with this option You can specify the following modes used Instantiate those template entities that were used in the compilation This will include all static data members for which there are template definitions This is the default all Instantiate all template entities declared or referenced in the compilation unit For each fully instantiated template class all of its member functions and static data members will be instantiated whether or not they were used Non member template functions will be instantiated even if the only reference was a declaration local Similar to instantiate used except that the functions are given internal linkage This is intended to provide a very simple mechanism for those getting started with templates The compiler will instantiate the functions that are used in each compilation unit as local functions and the program will link and run correctly barring problems due to multiple copies of local static variables However one may end up with many copies of the instantiated functions so this is not suitable for production use
205. e application code which must be located here The run_addr argument specifies the start address reset vector If the core starts executing using an entry from a vector table and directly jumps to the start label you should omit this argument The symbol argument specifies the name of the label in the application code that should be located at the specified start address The symbol argument is required The linker will resolve the start symbol and use its value after locating for the start address field in IEEE 695 files and Intel Hex files If you also specified the run_addr argument the start symbol label must point to a section The linker locates this section such that the start symbol ends up on the start address space space_name id 1 mau 8 align 8 page_size 1 stack name min_size 1k grows low_to_high reserved start _address end_address start_address run_addr 0x0000 symbol start_label map map_description 8 5 4 Mappings You can use a mapping when you define a space bus or memory With the map field you specify how addresses from the source Space bus or memory are translated to addresses of a destination Space bus The following mappings are possible e space gt space e space gt bus e bus gt bus e memory gt bus With a mapping you specify a range of source addresses you want to map specified by a source offset and a size the destination to which you wan
206. e first line in the raw listing file is always an L line identifying the primary input file L lines are also output for line directives key is omitted L lines indicate the source position of the following source line in the raw listing file R W E or C an indication of a diagnostic R for remark W for warning E for error and C for catastrophic error The line has the form S file name line_number column number message text where S is R W E or C as explained above Errors at the end of file indicate the last line of the primary source file and a column number of zero Command line errors are catastrophes with an empty file name and a line and column number of zero Internal errors are catastrophes with position information as usual and message text beginning with internal error When a diagnostic displays a list e g all the contending routines when there is ambiguity on an overloaded call the initial diagnostic line is followed by one or more lines with the same overall format code letter file name line number column number and message text but in which the code letter is the lower case version of the code letter in the initial line The source position in such lines is the same as that in the corresponding initial line 5 93 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Example To write raw listing information to the file test 1st enter cpmb list file test 1lst test cc Related information d gt
207. e floating point library cmbabf lib cmbad lib b use barrel shift instructions cmbadb lib d use divide instructions cmbadbf lib f use floating point instructions cmbadf lib m use multiply instructions cmbaf lib cmbam lib cmbamb lib cmbambf lib cmbamd lib cmbamadb lib cmbamadbf lib cmbamdf lib cmbamf lib cmbas lib Single precision C library cmbais lib some functions also need the floating point library fpmba lib Floating point library fpmba lib rtmba lib Run time library rtmba b lib pbmba lib Profiling libraries pb block function counter pcmba lib pc call graph pctmba lib pct call graph and timing pdmba lib pd dummy ptmba lib pt function timing Table 3 1 Overview of libraries 3 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Library The TASKING C compiler supports the STLport C libraries STLport is a multiplatform ISO C Standard Library implementation It is a free open source product which is delivered with the TASKING C compiler The library supports standard templates and I O streams The include files for the STLport C libraries are present in directory include st1 relative to the product installation directory You can find more information on the STLport library on the following site http stlport sourgeforge net Also read the license agreement on http stlport sourgeforge net License shtml This license agreement is applicable to the STLport C
208. e i dda wn ana ai sud T ees 3 11 3 2 19 StdDOOID c22 25 cot ecnenedad cog Aiea deaw Cie eae caged de Raa men ae Saag ad Bee Deus 3 11 3 2 20 Stddeh Nu wsie cide vid weed cade ek a wha gad ee AGES Ved dors Nee 3 12 3 2 21 Stdint N ccs etek aid Shey ee ae is Pe ea end bade ee eae ae dnd Been ede 3 12 3 2 22 Sidio mand WChan wk ttas el dee edie d oui a A a ee he eee ee Oa 3 12 3 2 23 Stdlib hand Weal 23 002 poate dhe Taa naw eal a ad dotdw ve a Dead eevee heats 3 17 3 2 24 String Mand WehAGN vcaxAsed towed celta a dnagd oman aiaiai as A i a Rane ome alow dete wee 3 19 3 2 25 tIME h and Whar Niassa cotavewteavebhchay ah een ewan bens Gawain e anda ONS 3 21 3 2 26 MUSEO Ne se eter ce eter acc e e real ee arte i Soh esata stead ee at E ide gett 3 22 3 2 27 WChanM 2285 iaad P36 ied Oh a r a e dadainnad baka elena edad Gone aes 3 23 3 2 28 WCPT sc diss adtaun bene dae aer ne a cau R E pa E eked Combine dawad ENRE EEREN dns 3 24 Assembly Language 4 1 4 1 Assembly Syntax nc icci2 cnt swhietonbae ti ieaie adie eed edad need bata oes 4 1 4 2 Assembler Significant Characters 0000s cece eee eee eens 4 2 4 3 Operands of an Assembly Instruction 0 0 cc cece teeta 4 2 4 4 Symbol NAMeCS cs25chcnac gece kei EEE EE E EE EEEE Gaatee dead deen meen A EE 4 2 4 4 1 Predefined Preprocessor Symbols 0 00 cece eee eee teens 4 3 4 5 Registers s20ci0iteebnpietin peg are ead dae Raden ede Gala AER Aaa Pag Re od BOS PERS 4 3 4 6 Assembly E
209. e instead aposname Add the specified object module s after the existing module posname b posname Add the specified object module s before the existing module posname C Create a new library without checking whether it already exists If the library already exists it is overwritten u Insert the specified object module only if it is newer than the module in the library V Verbose the librarian shows which files are removed AN The suboptions a or b have no effect when an object is added to the library Examples Suppose the library mylib 1ib contains the following objects see option t obj1 obj To add obj2 obj to the end of mylib 1lib tlb r mylib lib obj2 obj To insert obj3 obj just before obj2 obj tlb r b obj2 obj mylib lib obj3 o0bj The library mylib 1ib after these two invocations now looks like obj1 obj obj3 0bj obj2 obj Creating a new library To create a new library file add an object file and specify a library that does not yet exist tlb r objl obj newlib lib The librarian creates the library newlib 1ib and adds the object obj1 obj to it To create a new library file and overwrite an existing library add an object file and specify an existing library with the supoption C tlb r c objl obj mylib lib 5 309 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The librarian overwrites the library mylib 1ib and adds the object obj1 obj to it The new library mylib 1ib only contains obj1 obj Related information
210. e linker option ofilename SREC 3 the actual program code and data is supplied with S2 records with the following layout S 2 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt This record is used for 3 byte addresses Example S 213FF002000232222754E00754F04AF4FAE4E22BF _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S2 records The default buffer length is 32 code bytes 7 2 Object File Formats The checksum calculation of S2 records is identical to SO S3 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 4 which is the default the actual program code and data is supplied with S3 records with the following layout S 3 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt The linker generates 4 byte addresses by default Example S3070000FFFE6E6825 _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S3 records The checksum calculation of S3 records is identical to SO S7 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 4 which is the default at the end of an S record file the linker generates an S7 record which contains the program start address S7 is the corresponding termination record for S3 records Layout S 7 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt
211. e make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to use the generated object For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt object file Related information J 5 172 Tool Options Assembler Assembler list file l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select List File 3 Enable Generate list file 4 Inthe List file format section enable or disable the types of information to be included Command line syntax list file file I file Description With this option you tell the assembler to generate a list file A list file snows the generated object code and the relative addresses Note that the assembler generates a relocatable object file with relative addresses With the optional file you can specify an alternative name for the list file By default the name of the list file is the basename of the source file with the extension 1st Related information On the command line you can use the option list format L to specify which types of information should be included in the list file 5 173 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler list format L Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog
212. e preprocessor duplicates the DB and DW directives four times in the assembly source FOR VAR1 IN 1 2 3 4 12 DB VARI DW VAR1 VAR1 ENDFOR In the following example the loop is repeated 16 times With the DW directive you allocate and initialize four bytes of memory for each repetition of the loop Effectively the preprocessor duplicates the DW directive16 times in the assembled file and substitutes VAR2 with the subsequent numbers FOR VAR2 IN 1 to 0x10 DW VAR1 VAR1 ENDFOR Related information d REPEAT ENDREP Repeat sequence of source lines 4 23 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference GLOBAL Syntax GLOBAL symbol symbol Description All symbols or labels defined in the current section or module are local to the module by default You can change this default behavior with assembler option ig With the GLOBAL directive you declare one of more symbols as global It means that the specified symbols are defined within the current section or module and that those definitions should be accessible by all modules The type of the global defined symbol is determined by its definition To access a symbol defined with GLOBAL from another module use the EXTERN directive Only program labels and symbols defined with EQU can be made global Example LOOPA EQU 1 definition of symbol LOOPA GLOBAL LOOPA LOOPA will be globally accessible by other modules Related information Gb EXTERN
213. e syntax m file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the make utility Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option m multiple times Format of an option file Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line It is possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines k err errors txt test abs Specify the option file to the make utility tmk m myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line tmk k err errors txt test abs Related information de 5 291 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility
214. e table above we call this foreign used space as opposed to native used space Estimated stack usage stack 0 0x00000128 recursive no FEISS AE E E e ICIS e E A A A R A A A IOI kkk Proces sed Fi es atts dagdnikaainidaiiainiddia k A k A k e k A k Ae A R R A k IIIA IR R K File From archive Symbol causing the extraction cstart obj cmba lib _START hello obj printf obj cmba lib printf MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference HRI KIKI KK IK IKK IK IK IK IK IIA IK KIBAKI IKI IIA IIIA IRA Tink Res uT gt BARR ddd ri dnidd nina a ann S II ISIC I CICICI II ICICICR RIC IIR RI I IIR RI printf obj text libc 83 0x00000048 0x00000000 out Section out Size MAU text libc 83 0x00000048 Brrr a JE II ICICI II E R IO ICICI I ICICI ICICI IOI IC IIE Mody Scope hello c entree Name Space addr Space hello c 0x0 data 0x01000010 system sw main sbss 0x01000004 sdata 0x01000000 text 0x00000120 text 0x00000154 Ht e Local Symbol see HSE GSE A e A R SESS ESSER A R E A A R AE IOI CII I TI IKI FEI SIC III ICIS IIIS A k kkk kkk Cross References AA kkk k k k d k k k k k k k k A k k A A k e k A k Ae E R E R R A k A R A E A E R RI k K Fr nnn Defini
215. e this option multiple times The linker processes the LSL files in the order in which they appear on the command line Related information db Linker option Isl check Check LSL file s and exit Section 6 9 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 212 Tool Options Linker Linker map file M Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Map File 3 Enable the option Generate a memory map file map 4 Inthe Map file format section enable or disable the information you want to be included in the map file Command line syntax map file file Mifile Description With this option you tell the linker to generate a linker map file If you do not specify a filename and you specfied the o option the linker uses the same basename as the output file with the extension map If you did not specify the o option the linker uses the file task1 map Altium Designer names the map file after the project A linker map file is a text file that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files obj to the linked object file A locate part shows the absolute position of each section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address Related information Gls With the option map f
216. e used in the exit function Highest number that can be returned by the rand srand function Maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character for the extended character set specified by the current locale category LC_CTYPE see section 3 2 13 ocale h 3 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Numeric conversions The following functions convert the intial portion of a string s to a double int long int andlong long int value respectively double atof s int atoi s long atol s long long atoll s The following functions convert the initial portion of the string s to a float double and long double value respectively endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion stdlib h wehar h float strtof s endp float westof s endp double strtod s endp double westod s endp long double strtold s endp long double wcstold s endp The following functions convert the initial portion of the string s to a long long long unsigned long and unsigned long long respectively Base specifies the radix endp will point to the first character not used by the conversion stdlib h wchar h long strtol s endp base long westol s endp base long long strtoll s endp base long long westoll s endp base unsigned long strtoul s endp base unsigned long wcstoul s endp base unsigned long long strtoull s endp base unsigned long long westoull s endp base Random num
217. e_name refers to a defined address space locate_direction direction direction direction low_to_high high_to_low e A section layout contains at most one direction statement e If you do not specify the direction statement the locate direction of the section layout is Llow to high section_statement simple _section_statement aggregate_section_ statement Linker Script Language simple_section_statement assignment select_section_statement special_section_statement assignment symbol name assign_op expr assign _op select_section_statement select lt ref_tree gt 9 1 lt section_name gt 0 1 lt section_selections gt 0 1 e Eithera section_name or at least one section_selection must be defined section_selections section_selection lt section_selection gt gt section_selection attributes lt lt gt attribute gt e attribute means select all sections that have this attribute e attribute means select all sections that do not have this attribute special _section_statement heap stack name lt size_ spec gt 1 stack stack name lt size_spec gt 1 copytable reserved section_name lt reserved_specs gt e Special sections cannot be selected in load time groups size_spec 2 size expr reserved_specs reserved_spec lt reserved_spec gt reserved_spec attributes fi11_ spec size expr alloc_allowed ab
218. each reference to an identifier in the source program a line of the form symbol_id name X file name line number column number is written where X is D for definition d for declaration that is a declaration that is not a definition M for modification A for address taken U for used C for changed but actually meaning used and modified in a single operation such as an increment R for any other kind of reference or E foran error in which the kind of reference is indeterminate symbol id is a unique decimal number for the symbol The fields of the above line are separated by tab characters Related information de 5 159 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 5 3 Assembler Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that in Altium Designer you cannot run the assembler separately If you want assembly results you must compile a single C source file from within Altium Designer the file is then also assembled However you can set options specific for the assembler Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Opt
219. ections for the group You can select a section by name or by attributes If you select a section by name you can use a wildcard pattern ane matches with all section names 2 matches with a single character in the section name N takes the next character literally abc matches with a single a b or c character a z matches with any single character in the range a to 2 group select mysection select The first select statement selects the section with the name mysection The second select statement selects all sections that were not selected yet A section is selected by the first select statement that matches in the union of all section layouts for the address space Global section layouts are processed in the order in which they appear in the LSL file Internal core architecture section layouts always take precedence over global section layouts e The attributes field selects all sections that carry or do not carry the given attribute With attribute you select sections that have the specified attribute set With attribute you select sections that do not have the specified attribute set You can specify one or more of the following attributes r readable sections w writable sections 8 26 Linker Script Language executable sections initialized sections sections that should be cleared at program startup no rf mw scratch sections not clea
220. ective The arguments are symbolic names that the macro processor replaces with the literal arguments when the macro is expanded called Each formal argument must follow the same rules as symbol names the name can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit Argument names cannot start with a percent sign Macro definitions can be nested but the nested macro will not be defined until the primary macro is expanded You can use the following operators in macro definition statements Operator Name Description Macro argument Concatenates a macro argument with adjacent alphanumeric characters concatenation Return decimal Substitutes the symbol sequence with a character string that represents the decimal value value of symbol of the symbol Return hex Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the hexadecimal value of symbol value of the symbol Macro string Allows the use of macro arguments as literal strings delimiter i Macro local label Prevents name mangling on labels in macros override Example The macro definition macro_a MACRO argl arg2 header db argl body dw argl arg2 ENDM terminator The macro call section data macro_a 2 3 The macro expands as follows db 2 dw 2 3 4 29 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Related information d DEFINE Define a substitution
221. eding amp or with a parenthesized parameter list which may be empty If a function returns error information then that error information shall be tested A violation is reported when the return value of a function is ignored Pointers and arrays x 17 1 x 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 BBs SB Pointer arithmetic shall only be applied to pointers that address an array or array element Pointer subtraction shall only be applied to pointers that address elements of the same array gt gt lt lt shall not be applied to pointer types except where they point to the same array In general checking whether two pointers point to the same object is impossible The compiler will only report a violation for a relational operation with incompatible pointer types Array indexing shall be the only allowed form of pointer arithmetic The declaration of objects should contain no more than 2 levels of pointer indirection A violation is reported when a pointer with three or more levels of indirection is declared The address of an object with automatic storage shall not be assigned to another object that may persist after the first object has ceased to exist Structures and unions 18 1 18 2 x 18 3 18 4 R R R R All structure or union types shall be complete at the end of a translation unit An object shall not be assigned to an overlapping object An area of memory shall not be reused for unrelated purposes Uni
222. efined in the ABI Application Binary Interface may map to different address spaces e The mau field specifies the MAU size Minimum Addressable Unit of the space This field is required e The align value must be a power of two The linker uses this value to compute the start addresses when sections are concatenated An align value of n means that objects in the address space have to be aligned on n MAUs e The page_size field sets the page alignment and page size in MAUs for the address space It must be a power of 2 The default value is 1 If one or more page ranges are supplied the supplied value only sets the page alignment The ranges specify the available space in each page as offsets to the page start which is aligned at the page alignment See also the page keyword in subsection Locating a group in section 8 9 2 Creating and Locating Groups of Sections e With the optional direction field you can specify how all sections in this space should be located This can be either from low_to_high addresses this is the default or from high_to_low addresses e The map keyword specifies how this address space maps onto an internal bus or onto another address space Mappings are described in section 8 5 4 Mappings Stacks and heaps e The stack keyword defines a stack in the address space and assigns a name to it The architecture definition must contain at least one stack definition Each stack of a core architecture must have a unique name Se
223. efining External Memory and Buses It is common to define external memory off chip and external buses at the global scope outside any enclosing definition Internal memory on chip memory is usually defined in the scope of a derivative definition With the keyword memory you define physical memory that is present on the target board The memory name is used to identify the memory and does not conflict with other identifiers If you define memory parts in the LSL file only the memory defined in these parts is used for placing sections If no external memory is defined in the LSL file and if the linker option to allocate memory on demand is set then the linker will assume that all virtual addresses are mapped on physical memory You can override this behavior by specifying one or more memory definitions memory mem_name type rom mau 8 fill Oxaa size 64k speed 2 map map_description db For a description of the keywords see section 8 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses With the keyword bus you define a bus the combination of data and corresponding address bus The bus name is used to identify a bus and does not conflict with other identifiers Bus descriptions at the global scope outside any definition define external buses These are buses that are present on the target board bus bus_name mau 8 width 8 map map _ description db For a description of the keywords see sect
224. eighting of the conversion to the integral operand of the operator in overload resolution This is a compatibility feature that may be useful with some existing code With this feature enabled the following code compiles without error struct A A operator int int operator unsigned hi void main A a a 0 Ambiguous but allowed with this option operator is chosen Related information i 5 142 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler strict A Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Disable the option Allow non ANSI ISO C features Command line syntax strict A Default non ANSI ISO C features are enabled Description Enable strict ANSI ISO mode which provides diagnostic messages when non standard features are used and disables features that conflict with ANSI ISO C or C All ANSI ISO violations are issued as errors Example To enable strict ANSI mode with error diagnostic messages enter cpmb strict test cc Related information db C compiler option strict warnings Strict ANSI ISO mode with warnings 5 143 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler strict warnings a Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry
225. emplates This option is supplied for use by the control program that invokes the C compiler and is not intended to be used by end users Related information de 5 75 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler extended variadic macros Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option extended variadic macros to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax extended variadic macros Default macros with a variable number of arguments are not allowed Description Allow macros with a variable number of arguments implies variadic macros and allow the naming of the variable argument list Related information d gt C compiler option variadic macros Allow variadic macros 5 76 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler force vtbl Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Inthe Virtual function tables field select Force definition of virtual function tables Command line syntax force vibl Description Force definition of virtual function tables in cases where the heuristic used by the C compiler to decide on definition of virtual function tables provides no guidance Related information d C compiler option
226. en 0 null is specified the linker emits all errors Without this option the maximum number of errors is 42 Related information J 5 196 Tool Options Linker Linker extern e Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option extern to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax extern symbol e symbol Description With this option you force the linker to consider the given symbol as an undefined reference The linker tries to resolve this symbol either the symbol is defined in an object file or the linker extracts the corresponding symbol definition from a library This option is for example useful if the startup code is part of a library Because your own application does not refer to the startup code you can force the startup code to be extracted by specifying the symbol START as an unresolved external Example Consider the following invocation lkmb mylib 1lib Nothing is linked and no output file will be produced because there are no unresolved symbols when the linker searches through mylib lib lkmb extern _START mylib lib In this case the linker searches for the symbol _START in the library and if found extracts the object that contains _START the startup code If this module contains new unresolved symbols the linker looks again in mylib 1lib This
227. enabled a remark is issued A function is disqualified for inlining immediately if any of the following are true e The function has local static variables e The function has local constants e The function has local types e The function has block scopes e The function includes pragmas e The function has a variable argument list 2 8 Extern Inline Functions Depending on the way in which the C compiler is configured out of line copies of extern inline functions are either implemented using static functions or are instantiated using a mechanism like the template instantiation mechanism Note that out of line copies of inline functions are only required in cases where the function cannot be inlined or when the address of the function is taken whether explicitly by the user by implicitly generated functions or by compiler generated data structures such as virtual function tables or exception handling tables When static functions are used local static variables of the functions are promoted to global variables with specially encoded names so that even though there may be multiple copies of the code there is only one copy of such global variables This mechanism does not strictly conform to the standard because the address of an extern inline function is not constant across translation units 2 20 C Language When the instantiation mechanism is used the address of an extern inline function is constant across translatio
228. ence C Compiler gnu version Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option gnu version to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax gnu version version Default 30300 version 3 3 0 Description It depends on the GNU C compiler version if a particular GNU extension is supported or not With this option you set the GNU C compiler version that should be emulated in GNU C mode Version x y z of the GNU C compiler is represented by the value x 10000 y 100 z Example To specify version 3 4 1 of the GNU C compiler enter cpmb gt gnu version 30401 test cc Related information d gt Section 2 4 GNU Extensions in chapter C Language 5 80 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler guiding decls Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option guiding decls to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax guiding decls Description Enable recognition of guiding declarations of template functions A guiding declaration is a function declaration that matches an instance of a function template but has no explicit definition since its definition derives from the function template For exampl
229. ent present CAST type expression Returns the result of expression but with the specified type This function can be useful when you assemble with expression type checking enabled option type checking and the assembler reports a type conflict You can then cast the expression to the correct type The following types are allowed data code debug CNT Returns the number of macro arguments of the current macro expansion as an integer If you use this function when macro expansion is not active the assembler issues a warning 4 6 Assembly Language Example ARGCOUNT SET CNT reserve argument count DEFINED symbol symbol Returns 1 if symbol has been defined 0 otherwise If symbol is quoted it is looked up as a DEFINE symbol if it is not quoted it is looked up as an ordinary symbol macro or label Example IF DEFINED ANGLE is symbol ANGLE defined IF DEFINED ANGLE does label ANGLE exist LSB expression Returns the east significant byte of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as 16 bits LSH expression Returns the east significant half word bits 0 15 of the result of the absolute expression The result of the expression is calculated as a word 32 bits LSW expression Returns the east significant word bits 0 31 of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as a double word 64 bits MSB exp
230. entry and select Debug Information 3 Select which debug information to include Automatic HLL or assembly level debug information Custom debug information or No debug information If you select Custom debug information 4 Select which Custom debug information to include Assembler source line information Pass HLL debug information or None 5 Enable or disable the option Assembler local symbols information Command line syntax debug info flag g flag you can set the following flags asm a A Assembly source line information hll h H Pass high level language debug information HLL local VL Assembler local symbols debug information smart s S Smart debug information Description With this option you tell the assembler which kind of debug information to emit in the object file If you do not use this option the default is debug info hll If you specify debug info without any flags the default is debug info smart You cannot specify debug info asm hll Either the assembler generates assembly source line information or it passes HLL debug information When you specify debug info smart the assembler selects which flags to use If high level language information is available in the source file the assembler passes this information same as debug info asm thll local If not the assembler generates assembly source line information Same as debug info asm hll local With de
231. er list parameter lt parameter gt 9 parameter IDENTIFIER lt expr gt l 1 8 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference argument_list expr lt expr gt 0 arch_spec bus_def space def endianness_ def space _def space space name lt space_descr gt e Aspace_def defines an address space with the given space_name as a unique name within an architecture space_descr space property section_definition no space ref vector table statement reserved_range space_property id number as used in object mau expr align expr page_size expr lt range lt range gt gt 0 gt 0 1 page direction direction stack_def heap _ def copy_table_def start_address mapping e A space_def contains exactly one id and one mau statement e Aspace_def contains at most one align statement e Aspace_def contains at most one page_size statement e Aspace_def contains at least one mapping stack_def stack stack_name stack_heap_descr lt stack_heap _descr gt gt e Astack_def defines a stack with the stack_name as a unique name heap_def heap heap_name stack_heap descr lt stack_heap descr gt gt e A heap def defines a heap with the heap_name as a unique name stack_heap_descr min_size expr grows direction align expr fixed id expr e The min_size statement must be present e You can specify at most one align statement and one
232. er only to link the specified files The linker creates a linker output file out You then can link this file again with other object files until you have reached the final linker output file that is ready for locating In the last pass you call the linker without this option with the final linker output file out The linker will now locate the file Example In this example the files test1 obj test2 obj and test3 obj are incrementally linked 1 lkmb incremental testl obj test2 obj otest out test1 obj and test2 obj are linked 2 lkmb incremental test3 obj test out test3 obj and test out are linked task1 out is created 3 1lkmb taskl out task1 out is located Related information dE Section 6 5 Incremental Linking in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 205 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker keep output files k Menu entry Altium Designer always removes the output files when errors occurred Command line syntax keep output files k Description If an error occurs during linking the resulting output file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output files when an error occurs By default the linker removes the generated output file when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want
233. erator 4 46 argument string 4 47 calling 4 45 conditional assembly 4 48 defining 4 45 local label override 4 48 make utility 5 278 predefined 2 22 return decimal value operator 4 47 return hex value operator 4 47 variable arguments list 5 76 5 155 Macros preprocessor 1 12 4 3 Make utility options 5 279 a 5 280 c 5 281 D 5 282 d 5 283 DD 5 282 dd 5 283 e 5 284 err 5 285 f 5 286 G 5 287 i 5 288 K 5 289 k 5 290 m 5 291 5 296 n 5 292 p 5 293 q 5 294 r 5 295 S 5 297 t 5 298 time 5 299 V 5 300 W 5 301 x 5 302 defining a macro 5 278 malloc 3 7 3 18 Map file generation 5 213 Mappings 8 18 maxcalldepth 1 9 MB_CUR_MAX 3 17 3 23 MB_LEN_MAX 3 23 Index mblen 3 19 mbrlen 3 23 mbrtowc 3 23 mbsinit 3 23 mbsrtowcs 3 23 mbstate_t 3 23 mbstowcs 3 19 mbtowc 3 19 memchr 3 20 memcmp 3 20 memcpy 3 19 memmove 3 19 Memory definition 8 2 Memory qualifiers 1 3 memset 3 20 Merging source code 5 49 message 1 9 4 31 MISRA C 5 28 5 29 MISRA C report 5 215 supported rules 1998 10 1 supported rules 2004 10 5 version 5 30 mktime 3 21 modf functions 3 8 Motorola S record format 7 2 msb 4 7 msh 4 7 msw 4 7 Multibyte characters 5 98 N Namespace 2 13 5 99 std 5 154 nan functions 3 9 nearbyint functions 3 9 nextafter functions 3 9 nexttoward functions 3
234. ers will be pushed and popped from the stack If you do not specify the function qualifier ___frame the C compiler determines which registers must be pushed and popped The syntax is void _ interrupt vector_address __frame reg reg isr void where reg can be any register defined as an SFR The compiler generates a warning if some registers are missing which are normally required to be pushed and popped in an interrupt function prolog and epilog to avoid run time problems Example __interrupt 0x00000008 _ frame rl r2 r3 void my_handler void When you do not want the interrupt frame saving restoring registers to be generated you can use the compiler option noframe In that case you will have to specify your own interrupt frame For this you can use the inline capabilities of the compiler C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual 1 9 6 Software Break _ system With the __ system function qualifier you define a function which cannot be interrupted A function defined with the system qualifier is called with a BRK or BRKI instruction instead of a branch instruction and returns with a RTBD instruction instead of the RTS or RTSD instruction You cannot use the function qualifier system on interrupt functions Functions defined with _ system cannot be inlined Example _ system voi
235. erything referenced in a compilation then uses a special linker to remove duplicate definitions of instantiated functions If you are using Borland s compiler you must make sure that every compilation sees all the source code it needs to instantiate all the template entities referenced in that compilation That is one cannot refer to a template entity in a source file if a definition for that entity is not included by that source file In practice this means that either all the definition code is put directly in the h files or that each h file includes an associated cc actually cpp file Our approach is a little different It requires that for each instantiation of a non exported template there is some normal top level explicitly compiled source file that contains the definition of the template entity a reference that causes the instantiation and the declarations of any types required for the instantiation 2 This requirement can be met in various ways e The Borland convention each h file that declares a template entity also contains either the definition of the entity or includes another file containing the definition e Implicit inclusion when the compiler sees a template declaration in a h file and discovers a need to instantiate that entity it is given permission to go off looking for an associated definition file having the same base name and a different suffix and it implicitly includes that file at the end of the compilati
236. es ic relocatable I Stop after the files are linked to a linker object file out mil m Stop after C files are compiled to MIL mil object 0 Stop after the files are assembled to objects obj assembly s Stop after C files are compiled to assembly src Description Normally the control program generates an absolute object file of the specified output format from the file you supplied as input With this option you tell the control program to stop after a certain number of phases Related information d gt Linker option link only Link only no locating 5 233 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program debug info g Command line syntax debug info g Description With this option you tell the control program to include debug information in the generated object file Related information J 5 234 Tool Options Control Program Control Program define D Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line use the option define multiple times If the command line exceeds the length limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to
237. es a call graph reference between caller and callee The linker needs this information to build a call graph If applicable the call graph is used to create a static stack overlay caller and callee are names of functions The second syntax specifies stack information When callee is an empty name this means we define the stack usage of the function itself The values specified are the stack usage in bytes at the time of the call including the return address This information is used by the linker to compute the used stack within the application The information is found in the generated linker map file within the Memory Usage Normally CALLS directives are automatically generated by the compiler Use the CALLS directive in hand coded assembly when the assembly code calls a C function If you manually add CALLS directives make sure they connect to the compiler generated CALLS directives the name of the caller must also be named as a callee in another directive Example CALLS main nfunc Indicates that the function main calls the function _nfunc CALLS main 8 The function main uses 8 bytes on the stack 4 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference DB Syntax label DB argument argument Description With the DB directive Define Byte the assembler allocates and initializes one byte of memory for each argument An argument can be e asingle or multiple character string constant e an integer
238. es can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When atext line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e tis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines gaL test src Specify the option file to the assembler asmb option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line asmb gaL test src Related information 5 178 Tool Options Assembler Assembler output 0 Menu entry Altium Designer names the output file always after the source file Command line syntax output file 0 file Description With this option you can specify another filename for the output file of the assembler Without this option the basename of the assembly source file is used with extension obj
239. es the name of the file from old name to new name Returns a non zero value if not succesful Creates a temporary file of the mode wb that will be automatically removed when closed or when the program terminates normally Returns a file pointer Creates new file names that do not conflict with other file names currently in use The new file name is stored in a buffer which must have room for L_tmpnam characters Returns a pointer to the temporary name The file names are created in the current directory and all start with tmp At most TMP_MAX unique file names can be generated Description clearerr stream ferror stream feof stream perror s Clears the end of file and error indicators for stream Returns a non zero value if the error indicator for stream is set Returns a non zero value if the end of file indicator for stream is set Prints s and the error message belonging to the integer errno See section 3 2 4 errno h 3 2 23 stdlib h and wchar h The header file std1ib h contains general utility functions which fall into the following categories Some have parallel wide character declared in wchar h e Numeric conversions e Random number generation e Memory management e Envirnoment communication e Searching and sorting e Integer arithmetic e Multibyte wide character and string conversions Macros EXIT_SUCCES 0 EXIT_FAILURE 1 RAND_MAX 32767 MB_CUR_MAX 1 Predefined exit codes that can b
240. ese data you can analyze which functions are called how often they are called and what their execution time is Several methods of profiling exist One method is code instrumentation which adds code to your application that takes care of the profiling process when the application is executed d For an extensive description of profiling refer to Chapter 4 Profiling in the user s manual With this option the compiler adds the extra code to your application that takes care of the profiling process You can obtain the following profiling data see flags above Block counters not in combination with Call graph or Function timers This will instrument the code to perform basic block counting As the program runs it counts the number of executions of each branch in an if statement each iteration of a for loop and so on Note that though you can combine Block counters with Function counters this has no effect because Function counters is only a subset of Block counters Call graph not in combination with Block counters This will instrument the code to reconstruct the run time call graph As the program runs it associates the caller with the gathered profiling data 5 42 Tool Options C Compiler Function counters This will instrument the code to perform function call counting This is a subset of the basic Block counters Function timers not in combination with Block counters Function counters This will instrument the code t
241. eserved sections with alloc_allowed ranged set Sections restricted to a fixed address range can also overlap a reserved section With the attributes field you can set the access type of the reserved section The linker locates the reserved section in its space with the restrictions that follow from the used attributes r w or x or a valid combination of them The allowed attributes are shown in the following table A value between lt and gt in the table means this value is set automatically by the linker Properties set in LSL Resulting section properties attributes filled access memory content x yes lt rom gt executable r yes r lt rom gt data r no r lt rom gt scratch rx yes r lt rom gt executable rw yes rw lt ram gt data rw no rw lt ram gt scratch rwx yes rw lt ram gt executable group reserved myreserved size 2k attributes rw fill Oxaa If you do not specify any attributes the linker will reserve the given number of maus no matter what type of memory lies beneath If you do not specify a fill pattern no section is generated The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section _1c_ub_name for the start and_1c_ue_name for the end of the reserved section Output sections The keyword section tells the linker to accumulate sections obtained from object files input sections into an output section of a fixed size in
242. espace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines x mylib lib objl obj w5 Specify the option file to the librarian tlb f myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line tlb x mylib lib objl obj w5 5 306 Tool Options Librarian Librarian m Command line syntax m a posname b posname Description Move the specified object modules to another position in the library The ordering of members in a library can make a difference in how programs are linked if a symbol is defined in more than one member Default the specified members are moved to the end of the archive Use the suboptions a or b to move them to a specified place instead a posname Move the specified object module s after the existing module posname b posname Move the specified object module s before the existing module posname Example Suppose the library mylib lib contains the following objects see option t obj1 obj obj2 obj obj3 0bj To move obj1 obj to the end of mylib lib tlb m mylib 1lib objl obj To move obj3 obj just before obj2 obj tlb m b obj3 o0bj mylib lib obj2 obj The library mylib lib after these two invocations now looks like obj3 0bj obj2 obj obj1 obj Related information db Librarian option t Pri
243. eturns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has NaN value isnormal Returns a nonzero value if an only if its argument has a normal value signbit Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument value is negative Libraries 3 2 16 setjmp h The set jmp and longjmp in this header file implement a primitive form of nonlocal jumps which may be used to handle exceptional situations This facility is traditionally considered more portable than signal h int setjmp jmp buf env Records its caller s environment in env and returns 0 void longjmp jmp_buf env Restores the environment previously saved with a call to set jmp int status 3 2 17 signal h Signals are possible asynchronous events that may require special processing Each signal is named by a number The following signals are defined SIGINT 1 Receipt of an interactive attention signal SIGILL 2 Detection of an invalid function message SIGFPE 3 Anerrouneous arithmetic operation for example zero devide overflow SIGSEGV 4 An invalid access to storage SIGTERM 5 A termination request sent to the program SIGABRT 6 Abnormal terminiation such as is initiated by the abort function The next function sends the signal sig to the program int raise int sig The next function determines how subsequent signals will be handled signalfunction signal int signalfunction The first argument specifies the signal the second argument points to the signal handler
244. evel is a number between 0 9 The level of a message is printed between parentheses after the warning number If you do not use the w option the default warning level is 8 Example To suppresses warnings above level 5 tlb x w5 mylib lib objl obj Related information i 5 313 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Librarian x Command line syntax x 0 v Description Extract an existing module from the library 0 Give the extracted object module the same date as the last modified date that was recorded in the library Without this suboption it receives the last modified date of the moment it is extracted V Verbose the librarian shows which files are extracted Examples To extract the file obj1 obj from the library mylib lib tlb x mylib lib objl obj If you do not specify an object module all object modules are extracted tlb x mylib lib Related information J 5 314 6 List File Formats Summary This chapter describes the format of the assembler list file and the linker map file 6 1 Assembler List File Format The assembler list file is an additional output file of the assembler that contains information about the generated code The list file consists of a page header and a source listing Page header The page header is repeated on every page TASKING target Assembler vx yrz Build nnn SN 00000000 Title Page 1 ADDR CODE CYCLES LINE SOURCE LINE The first line contains version in
245. f you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the assembler does not assemble any files Example To display an explanation of message number 241 enter asmb diag 241 This results in the following message and explanation W241 additional input files will be ignored The assembler supports only a single input file All other input files are ignored To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file aserrors html use redirection and enter asmb diag html all gt aserrors html Related information i 5 165 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Assembler emit locals Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax emit locals flag you can set the following flags when you specify no flags the default is Es equs e E emit local EQU symbols symbols s S emit local non EQU symbols Description With the option emit locals equs the assembler also emits local EQU symbols to the object file Normally only global symbols and non EQU local symbols are emitted Having local symbols in the object file can be useful for debugging Related information i 5 166 Tool Options Assembler Assembler error file Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the assembler redirects error messages to a file If you
246. far is written into the argument This should be a pointer to an inte ger in default memory No value is printed p pointer hexadecimal 24 bit value No argument is converted a is printed Table 3 2 Printf conversion characters All arguments to the scanf related functions should be pointers to variables in default memory of the type which is specified in the format string The format string can contain Blanks or tabs which are skipped Normal characters not which should be matched exactly in the input stream Conversion specifications starting with a character Conversion specifications should be built as follows in order A meaning that no assignment is done for this field Anumber specifying the maximum field width The conversion characters d i n o u and x may be preceded by h if the argument is a pointer to short rather than int or by hh if the argument is a pointer to char or by l letter ell if the argument is a pointer to Long or by I for a pointer to long long J fora pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t Z for a pointer to size_t or t for a pointer to ptrdiff_t The conversion characters e f and g may be preceded by I if the argument is a pointer to double rather than float and by L for a pointer toa long double A conversion specifier maximum field width and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversi
247. ferences to address labels labels that have not yet been defined With expression2 you can specify a value to initialize the block with Only the least significant MAU of expression2 is used If you omit expression2 the default is zero If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing LN Initialization of a block of memory only happens in sections with section attribute init or romdata In other sections the assembler issues a warning and only reserves space just as with DS The BSB BSH BSW and BSD directives are variants of the BS directive BSB The expression argument specifies the number of bytes to reserve BSH The expression argument specifies the number of half words to reserve one half word is16 bits BSW The expression argument specifies the number of words to reserve one word is 32 bits BSD The expression argument specifies the number of double words to reserve one double word is 64 bits Example The BSB directive is for example useful to define and initialize an array that is only partially filled section data DB 84 101 115 116 initialize 4 bytes BSB 96 0xFF reserve another 96 bytes initialized with OxFF Related information Gb DS Define Storage 4 12 Assembly Language CALLS Syntax CALLS caller callee or CALLS caller stackO_usage stack1_usage Description The first syntax creat
248. files 8 9 4 Creating Symbols You can tell the linker to create symbols before locating by putting assignments in the section layout definition Symbol names are represented by double quoted strings Any string is allowed but object files may not support all characters for symbol names You can use two different assignment operators With the simple assignment operator the symbol is created unconditionally With the operator the symbol is only created if it already exists as an undefined reference in an object file The expression that represents the value to assign to the symbol may contain references to other symbols If such a referred symbol is a special section symbol creation of the symbol in the left hand side of the assignment will cause creation of the special section 8 32 Linker Script Language section_layout le_bs _le_ub_ stack when the symbol _lc_bs occurs as an undefined reference in an object file the linker allocates space for the stack 8 9 5 Conditional Group Statements Within a group you can conditionally select sections or create special sections e With the if keyword you can specify a condition The succeeding section statement is executed if the condition evaluates to TRUE 1 e The optional else keyword is followed by a section statement which is executed in case the if condition evaluates to FALSE 0 group if exists mysection se
249. fore it uses the instantiate used mode and suppresses automatic instantiation 2 6 3 Instantiation pragma Directives Instantiation pragmas can be used to control the instantiation of specific template entities or sets of template entities There are three instantiation pragmas e The instantiate pragma causes a specified entity to be instantiated e The do_not_instantiate pragma suppresses the instantiation of a specified entity It is typically used to suppress the instantiation of an entity for which a specific definition will be supplied e The can_instantiate pragma indicates that a specified entity can be instantiated in the current compilation but need not be it is used in conjunction with automatic instantiation to indicate potential sites for instantiation if the template entity turns out to be required The argument to the instantiation pragma may be e atemplate class name A lt int gt e atemplate class declaration class A lt int gt e amember function name A lt int gt f e astatic data member name A lt int gt i e astatic data declaration int A lt int gt i e amember function declaration void A lt int gt f int char e atemplate function declaration char f int float A pragma in which the argument is a template class name e g A lt int gt or class A lt int gt is equivalent to repeating the pragma for each member function and static data member declared in the class When instantiating an entire class a given
250. formation The second line can contain a title which you can specify with the assembler directive TITLE and always contains a page number With the assembler directives LIST NOLIST and PAGE and with the assembler option Lflag list format you can format the list file See Section 4 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language and Section 5 3 Assembler Options in Chapter Tools Options The fourth line contains the headings of the columns for the source listing Source listing The following is a sample part of a listing An explanation of the different columns follows below ADDR CODE CYCLES LINE SOURCE LINE 1 Module start 0010 F8610000 2 9 12 swi r3 ri 0 0014 BOOOrrrr 3 12 13 addik r3 r0 _2 str 3060rrrr 001C BOOOrrrr 2 14 14 bralid r15 printf B9FCrrrr 0000 38 ds 2 RESERVED 0001 The meaning of the different columns is ADDR This column contains the memory address The address is a hexadecimal number that represents the offset from the beginning of a relocatable section or the absolute address for an absolute section The address only appears on lines that generate object code 6 1 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference CODE This is the object code generated by the assembler for this source line displayed in hexadecimal format The displayed code need not be the same as the generated code that is entered in the object module The code can also be relocatable code In this case the letter r is printe
251. formation Gs Linker option chip output Generate an output file for each chip 5 223 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker print mangled symbols P Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option print mangled symbols to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax print mangled symbols P Description C compilers generate unreadable symbol names These symbols cannot easily be related to your C source file anymore Therefore the linker will by default decode these symbols conform the A64 ABI when printed to stdout With this option you can override this default setting and print the mangled names instead Related information d 5 224 Tool Options Linker Linker strip debug S Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Include symbolic debug information Command line syntax strip debug S Description With this option you specify not to include symbolic debug information in the resulting output file Related information d 5 225 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker user provided initialization code i Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The
252. g and truncates the value In case of single and multiple character strings each ASCII value of the character is stored in successive locations starting at the least significant byte of a half word The standard C escape sequences are allowed DH AB D gt 0x4142 0x0000 second argument is empty 0x0044 Example TABLE DH 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DH A B C D Related information db BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DB_ Define Byte DW Define Word DD_ Define Double Word 4 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference DS DSB DSH DSW DSD Syntax label DS expression label DSB expression label DSH expression label DSW expression label DSD expression Description With the Ds directive Define Storage the assembler reserves a block of memory The reserved block of memory is not initialized to any value With the expression you specify the number of minimum addressable units MAUs that you want to reserve The expression must evaluate to an integer larger than zero and cannot contain references to symbols that are not yet defined in the assembly source If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing amp You cannot use the DS directive in sections with attribute init If you need to reserve initialized space in an init section use the BS directive instead The DSB DSH DSW and DSD di
253. g output file may be incomplete or incorrect With this option you keep the generated output files when an error occurs By default the control program removes generated output files when an error occurs This is useful when you use the make utility If the erroneous files are not removed the make utility may process corrupt files on a subsequent invocation Use this option when you still want to use the generated files For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt file or when you want to inspect the output file or send it to Altium support Related information J 5 251 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program keep temporary files t Menu Entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Enable the option Keep temporary files that are generated during a compile Command line syntax keep temporary files t Description By default the control program removes intermediate files like the src file result of the compiler phase and the obj file result of the assembler phase With this option you tell the control program to keep temporary files it generates during the creation of the absolute object file Related information J 5 252 Tool Options Control Program Control Program library l Command line syntax library name Iname Description With this option yo
254. g the make process the make utility exits with a certain exit code With the option i the make utility exits without an error code even when errors occurred Example tmk i The make utility exits without an error code even when an error occurs Related information J 5 288 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility K Command line syntax K Description With this option the make utility keeps temporary files it creates during the make process The make utility stores temporary files in the directory that you have specified with the environment variable TMPDIR or in the default temp directory of your system when the TMPDIR environment variable is not specified Example tmk K The make utility preserves all temporary files Related information J 5 289 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility k Command line syntax k Description When during the make process the make utility encounters an error it stops rebuilding your files With the option k the make utility only stops building the target that produced the error All other targets defined in the makefile are built Example tmk k If the make utility encounters an error it stops building the current target but proceeds with the other targets that are defined in the makefile Related information db Make utility option S Undo the effect of k 5 290 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility m Command lin
255. getc 3 16 getchar 3 16 getcwd 3 22 getenv 3 19 gets 3 16 getwc 3 16 getwchar 3 16 global 4 24 Global type checking 5 14 5 199 gmtime 3 21 GNU extensions 2 5 5 79 compiler version 5 80 Guiding declarations 5 81 H Header files 3 3 alert h 3 3 complex h 3 3 ctype h 3 3 errno h 3 4 fentl h 3 4 fenv h 3 5 float h 3 5 fss h 3 5 inttypes h 3 6 io h 3 6 iso646 h 3 6 limits h 3 7 locale h 3 7 malloc h 3 7 math h 3 7 setimp h 3 11 signal h 3 11 stdarg h 3 11 stdbool h 3 11 stddef h 3 12 stdint h 3 6 stdio h 3 12 stdlib h 3 17 string h 3 19 tgmath h 3 7 time h 3 21 unistd h 3 22 wehar h 3 12 3 19 3 21 3 23 wetype h 3 3 3 24 Header stop 2 24 2 26 Heap 8 16 hypot functions 3 9 l I O streams 5 91 if elif else endif 4 25 ilogb functions 3 8 imaxabs 3 6 imaxdiv 3 6 Implicit inclusion 2 17 include 4 26 Include directory 5 16 5 34 5 86 5 170 5 204 5 247 Include file 5 17 5 87 5 171 macros 5 88 Include files suffix 5 85 Inline assembly __asm 1 5 Inline function 5 112 Inline functions 1 15 inline noinline smartinline 1 9 Inlining 5 18 5 115 Inlining functions in C 2 20 Input specification 4 1 Instantiation 2 14 pending 5 135 template 5 90 Instantiation mode 2 15 Instantiation pragmas 2 16 Instructions 4 1 generic 4 1 4 50 Intel hex record type 7 5 Intel Hex record format 7 5 Interrupt 5 33 Index 7 MicroBlaze
256. gh a non volatile reference If an attempt is made to refer to an object defined with a volatile qualified type through use of an lvalue with non volatile qualified type the behavior is undefined Do not reference uninitialized memory Uninitialized automatic variables default to whichever value is currently stored on the stack or in the register allocated for the variable Consequently uninitialized memory can cause a program to behave in an unpredictable or unplanned manner and may provide an avenue for attack CERT C Secure Coding Standard EXP34 C EXP37 C EXP38 C Ensure a null pointer is not dereferenced Attempting to dereference a null pointer results in undefined behavior typically abnormal program termination Call functions with the arguments intended by the API When a function is properly declared with function prototype information an incorrect call will be flagged by the compiler When there is no prototype information available at the call the compiler cannot check the number of arguments and the types of the arguments This message is issued to warn about this situation Do not call offsetof on bit field members or invalid types The behavior of the offsetof macro is undefined when the member designator parameter designates a bit field 9 4 Integers INT INT30 C INT34 C INT35 C Ensure that unsigned integer operations do not wrap A constant with an unsigned integer type is truncated resulting i
257. gmas typedefs t Show the list of predefined typedefs Description Displays an overview of all command line options With an argument you can specify which extended information is shown Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options cmb cmb help cmb The following invocation displays a list of the available pragmas cmb help pragmas 5 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler include directory l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Add a pathname in the Include files path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax include directory path lpath Description With this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the compiler searches for include files is 1 The pathname in the C source file and the directory of the C source only for include files that are enclosed in 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable CMBINC when the product was installed 4 The default include directory relative to the installation directory unless you specified option no stdinc Example Suppose that the C source file test c contains t
258. gns in identifiers Names like ASVAR are allowed Related information J 5 70 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler embedded c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Comply to embedded C subset Command line syntax embedded c Description The Embedded C subset does not support templates exceptions namespaces new style casts RTTI multiple inheritance virtual base classes and the mutable keyword Select this option when you want the C compiler to give an error when you use any of them in your C source Related information i 5 71 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler error file Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option error file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the C compiler redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file will be named after the input file with extension ecp Example To write errors to errors ecp instead of stderr enter cpmb error file errors ecp test cc Related information ie 5 72 Tool Options C Compiler C Compile
259. group s position in the LSL file defines its load time address group load_addr select mydata select ROM copy of mydata mydata The load time and run time addresses of a group cannot be set at the same time If the load time property is set for a group the group only restricts the positioning at load time of the group s sections It is not possible to set the address of a group that has a not unrestricted parent group The properties of the load time and run time start address are At run time before using an element in an overlay group the application copies the sections from their load location to their run time location but only if these two addresses are different For non overlay sections this happens at program start up The start addresses cannot be set to absolute values for unrestricted groups For non overlay groups that do not have an overlay parent the load time start address equals the run time start address For any group if the run time start address is not set the linker selects an appropriate address If an ordered group or sequential group has an absolute address and contains sections that have separate page restrictions not defined in LSL all those sections are located in a single page In other cases for example when an unrestricted group has an address range assigned to it the paged sections may be located in different pages For overlays the linker reserves memory at the run time start ad
260. grows statement e Each stack definition has its own unique id the number specified corresponds to the index in the CALLS directive as generated by the compiler If the id is omitted the id is O zero direction low_to_high high_to_low e If you do not specify the grows statement the stack and grow low to high copy_table def copytable lt copy table descr lt copy_table_descr gt gt 0 gt 0 1 e Aspace_def contains at most one copytable statement e If the architecture definition contains more than one address space exactly one copy table must be defined in one of the spaces If the architecture definition contains only one address space a copy table definition is optional it will be generated in the space 8 8 Linker Script Language copy_table_ descr align expr copy_unit expr dest lt space_name gt space name page e The copy_unit is defined by the size in MAUs in which the startup code moves data e The dest statement is only required when the startup code initializes memory used by another processor that has no access to ROM e A space_name refers to a defined address space start_addr z start_addr_descr start_address start_addr_descr lt start_addr_descr gt gt run_addr expr symbol symbol _ name e A symbol_name refers to the section that contains the startup code vector table statement vecttab_spec i vector def 2 5 vector_spec i vector _i
261. gs as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors Description If the C compiler encounters an error it stops compiling With this option you tell the C compiler to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the C compiler will be non zero after one or more compiler warnings As a consequence the C compiler now also stops after encountering a warning Related information Gls C compiler option no warnings Suppress all warnings 5 157 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler wchar_t keyword Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Allow the wchar_t keyword Command line syntax wchar_t keyword Default wchar_t is not recognized as a keyword Description Enable recognition of wchar_t as a keyword The macro _WCHAR_T is defined when wchar_tt is recognized as a keyword Related information J 5 158 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler xref file X Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option xref file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax xref file file Xfile Description Generate cross reference information in a file For
262. hanges for placement delete are implemented This macro is used when building the C library __ARRAY OPERATORS Defined when array new and delete are enabled This is the default __BASE FILE _ Similar to _FILE__ but indicates the primary source file rather than the current one i e when the current file is an included file __ BIG ENDIAN__ Expands to 1 indicating big endian mode _BOOL Defined when bool is a keyword This is the default _ BUILD __ Identifies the build number of the C compiler composed of decimal digits for the build number three digits for the major branch number and three digits for the minor branch number For example if you use build 1 22 1 of the compiler _ BUILD _ expands to 1022001 If there is no branch number the branch digits expand to zero For example build 127 results in 127000000 CHAR _MIN CHAR_MAX Used in limits h to define the minimum maximum value of a plain char respectively __CPMB__ Identifies the C compiler You can use this symbol to flag parts of the source which must be recognized by the C compiler only It expands to 1 __eplusplus Always defined _ DATE _ Defined to the date of the compilation in the form Mmm dd yyyy __DELTA_ TYPE Defines the type of the offset field in the virtual function table This macro is used when building the C library _ DOUBLE _FP__ Expands to 1 if you did not use option no double Treat double
263. hat executes one task A complex target board may contain multiple standard processors and DSPs combined with configurable IP cores loaded in an FPGA Each core may execute a different program and external memory may be shared by multiple cores LSL serves two purposes First it enables you to specify the characteristics that are of interest to the linker of your specific target board and of the cores installed on the board Second it enables you to specify how sections should be located in memory 8 2 Structure of a Linker Script File A script file consists of several definitions The definitions can appear in any order The architecture definition required In essence an architecture definition describes how the linker should convert logical addresses into physical addresses for a given type of core If the core supports multiple address spaces then for each space the linker must know how to perform this conversion In this context a physical address is an offset on a given internal or external bus Additionally the architecture definition contains information about items such as the hardware stack and the vector table This specification is normally written by Altium The architecture definition of the LSL file should not be changed by you unless you also modify the core s hardware architecture If the LSL file describes a multi core system an architecture definition must be available for each different type of core d gt See section
264. he compiler pushes parameters on the stack See the table below Parameter Type Parameter Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 _Bool r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 char r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 short r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 int long r3 r4 r5 r6 7 r8 r9 1o fri rt2 float r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 32 bit pointer r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 qo fri r12 32 bit struct r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 rio r11 r12 long long r3r4 r5r6 r7r8 r9r10 r11r12 double r3r4 r5r6 r7r8 r9r10 r11r12 64 bit struct r3r4 r5r6 r7r8 r9r10 r1ir12 Table 1 5 Register usage for parameter passing AN If a register corresponding to a parameter number is already in use the next register is used Example with three arguments funcl int a int b int c e a first parameter is passed in register r3 e b second parameter is passed in register r4 e c third parameter is passed in register r5 Example with one long long double arguments and one other argument func2 long long d chare e q first parameter is passed in register r3 and r4 e e second parameter is passed in register r5 1 9 2 Function Return Types The C compiler uses registers to store C function return values depending on the function return types Return Type Register _Bool rn char rn short rn int long rn float rn 32 bit pointer rn 32 bit struct rn long long rnrm
265. he call depth is valid for each individual module The call depth after linking may differ depending on the nature of the modules Related information C compiler option optimize compact Optimization code compaction C compiler option compact max size Maximum size of a match for code compaction 5 26 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler mil mil split Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax mil mil split file Description With option mil the C compiler skips the code generator phase and writes the optimized intermediate representation MIL to a file with the suffix mil The C compiler accepts mil files as input files on the command line Option mil split does the same as option mil but in addition the C compiler splits the MIL representation and writes it to separate files with suffix ms One file is written for each input file or MIL library specified on the command line The ms files are only updated on a change The C compiler accepts ms files as input files on the command line With option mil split you can perform application wide optimizations during the frontend phase by specifying all modules at once and still invoke the backend phase one module at a time to reduce the total compilation time Optionally you can specify another filename for the ms file the C compiler generates Without an argument the basename of the C source file is used to create the ms filename N
266. he complete member function declaration as in pragma instantiate char A lt int gt f int char The argument to an instantiation pragma may not be a compiler generated function an inline function or a pure virtual function 2 6 4 Implicit Inclusion When implicit inclusion is enabled the C compiler is given permission to assume that if it needs a definition to instantiate a template entity declared in a h file it can implicitly include the corresponding cc file to get the source code for the definition For example if a template entity ABC f is declared in file xyz h and an instantiation of ABC f is required in a compilation but no definition of ABC appears in the source code processed by the compilation the compiler will look to see if a file xyz cc exists and if so it will process it as if it were included at the end of the main source file To find the template definition file for a given template entity the C compiler needs to know the path name specified in the original include of the file in which the template was declared and whether the file was included using the system include syntax e g include lt file h gt This information is not available for preprocessed source containing line directives Consequently the C compiler will not attempt implicit inclusion for source code containing 1ine directives The file to be implicitly included is found by replacing the file suffix with each of the suffixes spec
267. he following lines include lt stdio h gt include myinc h You can specify the include directory myinclude to the C compiler cmb include directory myinclude test c First the compiler looks for the file stdio h in the directory myinc lude relative to the current directory If it was not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory The compiler now looks for the file myinc h in the directory where test c is located If the file is not there the compiler searches in the directory myinclude If it was still not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation C compiler option no stdine Skip standard include files directory Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler include file H Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Enter the name of the file in the Include this file before source field or click and select a file Command line syntax include file file Hfile Description With this option set at project level you include one extra file at the beginning of each C source file in your project On a document level Project Document Options you can overrule this option
268. he format of the first input file You can use the output option multiple times This is useful to generate multiple output formats With the first occurrence of the output option you specify the basename the filename without extension which is used for subsequent output options with no filename specified If you do not specify a filename or you do not specify the output option at all the linker uses the default basename taskn IHEX and SREC formats If you specify the Intel Hex format or the Motorola S records format you can use the argument addr_size to specify the size of addresses in bytes record length For Intel Hex you can use the values 1 2 and 4 default For Motorola S records you can specify 2 S1 records 3 S2 records or 4 bytes S3 records default The name of the output file will be filename with the extension hex or sre and contains the code and data allocated in the default address space If they exist any other address spaces are also emitted whereas their output files are named filename_spacename hex sre Use option chip output c to create Intel Hex or Motorola S record output files for each chip defined in the LSL file suitable for loading into a PROM programmer Example To create the output file my file hex of the default address space lkmb test obj output myfile hex IHEX If they exist any other address spaces are emitted as well and are named myfile_spacename hex Related in
269. he linker also prints the filenames and it shows which objects are extracted from libraries With this option you can monitor the current status of the linker Related information J 5 227 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker version V Menu entry Command line syntax version V Description Display version information The linker ignores all other options or input files Related information J 5 228 Tool Options Linker Linker warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Treat warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors number Description When the linker detects an error or warning it tries to continue the link process and reports other errors and warnings When you use this option without arguments you tell the linker to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the linker will be non zero after the detection of one or more linker warnings As a consequence the linker will not produce any output files You can also limit this option to specific warnings by specifying a comma separated list of warning numbers Related information db Linker option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 5 229 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 5 5 Control Program Options The contro
270. hich are capable of holding the integer representation of times clock_t unsigned long long time _t unsigned long The type struct tm below is defined according to ISO IEC9899 with one exception this implementation does not support leap seconds The struct tm type is defines as follows struct tm int tm_sec seconds after the minute 0 59 int tm min minutes after the hour 0 59 int tm_hour hours since midnight 0 23 int tm_mday day of the month 1 31 int tm_mon months since January 0 11 int tm_year year since 1900 int tm wday days since Sunday 0 6 int tm_yday days since January 1 0 365 int tm_isdst Daylight Saving Time flag Time manipulation clock Returns the application s best approximation to the processor time used by the program since it was started This low level routine is not implemented because it strongly depends on the hardware To determine the time in seconds the result of clock should be divided by the value defined as CLOCKS_PER_SEC 12000000 difftime t1 t0 Returns the difference t1 t0 in seconds mktime tm tp Converts the broken down time in the structure pointed to by tp to a value of type time_t The return value has the same encoding as the return value of the time function time timer Returns the current calendar time This value is also assigned to timer Time conversion asctime tm tp Converts the
271. his option char is the same as signed char When plain char is signed the macro__ SIGNED _CHARS _ is defined Related information d gt C compiler option uchar Plain char is unsigned 5 140 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler signed bitfields Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option signed bitfields to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax signed bitfields Description For bit fields it depends on the implementation whether a plain int is treated as signed int or unsigned int By default an int bit field is treated as unsigned int This offers the best performance With this option you tell the C compiler to treat int bit fields as signed int In this case you can still add the keyword unsigned to treat a particular int bit field as unsigned Related information d gt C compiler option signed bitfields 5 141 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler special subscript cost Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option special subscript cost to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax special subscript cost Description Enable a special nonstandard w
272. iable storage shall not be used A violation is reported for every union declaration Unions shall not be used to access the sub parts of larger types A violation is reported for a union containing a struct member bit fields shall have type unsigned int or signed int bit fields of type signed int shall be at least 2 bits long All struct union members shall be named Reserved and standard library names shall not be redefined Standard library function names shall not be reused Production libraries shall comply with the MISRA C restrictions The validity of library function parameters shall be checked Dynamic heap memory allocation shall not be used The error indicator errno shall not be used The macro offsetof shall not be used lt locale h gt and the setlocale function shall not be used The setjmp and longjmp functions shall not be used The signal handling facilities of lt signal h gt shall not be used The lt stdio h gt library shall not be used in production code The functions atof atoi atol shall not be used The functions abort exit getenv system shall not be used The time handling functions of library lt time h gt shall not be used Gls See also section 2 7 2 C Code Checking MISRA C in Chapter Using the Compiler of the User s manual 10 4 MISRA C Rules 10 2 MISRA C 2004 This section lists all supported and unsupported MISRA C 2004 rules d gt See also
273. ibraries 3 2 12 limits h Contains the sizes of integral types defined as macros 3 2 13 locale h To keep C code reasonable portable accross different languages and cultures a number of facilities are provided in the header file local h char setlocale int category const char locale The function above changes locale specific features of the run time library as specified by the category to change and the name of the locale The following categories are defined and can be used as input for this function LC_ALL 0 LC_NUMERIC 3 LC_COLLATE 1 LC_TIME 4 LC_CTYPE 2 LC_MONETARY 5 struct lconv localeconv void Returns a pointer to type stuct lconv with values appropriate for the formatting of numeric quantities according to the rules of the current locale The struct lconv in this header file is conforming the ISO standard 3 2 14 malloc h The header file malloc h contains prototypes for memory allocation functions This include file is not defined in ISO C99 it is included for backwards compatibility with ISO C90 For ISO C99 the memory allocation functions are part of stdlib h See section 3 2 23 stdlib h and wehar h malloc size Allocates space for an object with size size The allocated space is not initialized Returns a point er to the allocated space calloc nobj size Allocates space for n objects with size size The allocated space is initialized with zeros Returns a pointer to the allocated space free
274. iction between parenthesis ballooned After locating all sections the largest remaining gap in the space is used completely for the stack and or heap Properties The contents depends on the Type column Sections The sections to which the rule applies restrictions between sections are shown in this column lt ordered contiguous clustered For contiguous sections the linker uses the section order as shown here Clustered sections can be located in any relative order Removed Sections This part of the map file contains information about the sections that are removed from the absolute object file For example unreferenced sections Related information Section 6 11 Generating a Map File in Chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual Linker option map file Generate map file 6 8 Altium 7 Object File Formats Summ ary This chapter describes the formats of several object files 7 1 ELF DWARF Object Format The TASKING MicroBlaze toolset by default produces objects in the ELF DWARF 2 format For a complete description of the ELF and DWARF formats please refer to the Tool Interface Standard TIS MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 7 2 Motorola S Record Format With the linker option ofilename SREC option the linker produces output in Motorola S record format with three types of S records SO S3 and S7 With the options ofilename SREC 2 or ofilename SREC 3 option you can force other types of S record
275. iding better documentation in the source program A symbol can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ and the first character cannot be a digit The assembler issues a warning if you redefine an existing symbol Example Suppose you defined the symbol LEN with the substitution string 32 DEFINE LEN 32 Then you can use the symbol LEN for example as follows DS LEN MESSAGE I The length is LEN The assembler preprocessor replaces LEN with 32 and assembles the following lines DS 32 MESSAGE I The length is 32 Related information UNDEF Undefine a DEFINE symbol or macro MACRO ENDM Define a macro Assembly Language DH Syntax label DH argument argument Description With the DH directive Define Half Word you allocate and initialize a half word of memory for each argument A half word is 16 bits An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in successive half word address locations If an argument is NULL its corresponding address location is filled with zeros Half word arguments are stored as is Floating point values are not allowed If the evaluated argument is too large to be represented in a half word the assembler issues a warnin
276. ied channel otherwise false __getpc unsigned int volatile _ getpc void Get the value of the program counter PC Returns the value of the program counter __getmsr unsigned int volatile _ getmsr void Get the value of the machine state register MSR Returns the value of the machine state register MSR __putmsr void volatile _ putmsr unsigned int value Set the value of the machine state register MSR to value Returns nothing __msrelr unsigned int _msrclr unsigned int value Clear a number of bits in the machine state register MSR Value should be a 14 bit mask If you specify a value larger than 214 the instruction is ignored and the compiler will use the getmsr and putmsr instructions instead Returns the value of the MSR register before bits were cleared __msrset unsigned int _ msrset unsigned int value Set a number of bits in the machine state register MSR Value should be a 14 bit mask If you specify a value larger than 214 the instruction is ignored and the compiler will use the getmsr and putmsr instructions instead Returns the value of the MSR register before bits were set 1 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1 9 5 Interrupt Functions The TASKING C compiler supports a number of function qualifiers and keywords to program interrupt service routines ISR An interrupt service routine or interrupt function interrupt handler exception handler is called when an interrup
277. iew of assembly control directives Directive Description END Indicates the end of an assembly module INCLUDE Include file MESSAGE Programmer generated message Overview of symbol definition directives Directive Description EQU Set permanent value to a symbol EXTERN Import global section symbol GLOBAL Declare global section symbol LABEL Define a label of specified type RESUME Resume a previously defined section SECTION Start a new section SET Set temporary value to a symbol SIZE Set size of symbol in the ELF symbol table SOURCE Specify name of original C source file TYPE Set symbol type in the ELF symbol table WEAK Mark a symbol as weak Overview of data definition storage allocation directives Directive Description ALIGN Align location counter BS BSB BSH Define block storage initialized BSW BSD DB Define byte DH Define half word DW Define word DD Define double word DS DSB DSH Define storage DSW DSD OFFSET Move location counter forwards Overview of macro and conditional assembly directives REPEAT ENDREP FOR ENDFOR IF ELIF ELSE ENDIF MACRO ENDM UNDEF Directive Description DEFINE Define substitution string BREAK Break out of current macro expansion Repeat sequence of source lines Repeat sequence of source lines n times Conditional assembly directive End of conditional
278. ified in the instantiation file suffix list The normal include search path mechanism is then used to look for the file to be implicitly included By default the list of definition file suffixes tried is c cc cpp and cxx Implicit inclusion works well alongside automatic instantiation but the two are independent They can be enabled or disabled independently and implicit inclusion is still useful when automatic instantiation is not done The implicit inclusion mode can be turned on by the command line option implicit include If this option is turned on you cannot use exported templates Implicit inclusions are only performed during the normal compilation of a file i e not when doing only preprocessing A common means of investigating certain kinds of problems is to produce a preprocessed source file that can be inspected When using implicit inclusion it is sometimes desirable for the preprocessed source file to include any implicitly included files This may be done using the command line option no preprocessing only This causes the preprocessed output to be generated as part of a normal compilation When implicit inclusion is being used the implicitly included files will appear as part of the preprocessed output in the precise location at which they were included in the compilation 2 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 2 6 5 Exported Templates Exported templates are templates declared with the keyword export Exp
279. ights to the same are claimed v8 0 31 3 08 Table of Contents Table of Contents C Language 1 1 1 1 IMMOOUCHON siirre ai Siero nash haere le naan ane kee Bam a E Aapa 1 1 1 2 Data TYPES sci ctpedn ee hed aeinie wat divide Diui a ened tact dato eh wer E meee een oad 1 2 1 2 1 Changing the Alignment unaligned _ packed__ and ___align 1 2 1 3 Memory Qualifiers seie saad eet cid hee eee LE ee EE 1 3 1 3 1 Placing an Object at an Absolute Address at 0 0 eee eee eee 1 4 1 4 Using Assembly in the C Source _ASM 6 1 5 1 5 Pragmas to Control the Compiler 0 00 cece eee eens 1 8 1 6 Predefined Preprocessor Macros 0 cee tenet teens 1 12 1 7 SUINGS erne cca heoreidat Bett cine dowd tent ee ee adel Mane Gaon whew ded ae eee 1 13 1 8 Switch Statement 000 eee teeta 1 13 1 9 FUNCIONS sc bidet r graded itd ahaa ddadidree nal idohakd eM enram hana hkd 1 14 1 9 1 Parameter Passing o wiiesccis nent wlohe teeta eye arian i tebe of wae hanasu le wove aaia ween ee dee E 1 14 1 9 2 Function Returm Types scccevahieri garth wwe pao aaa Weare ba reed bes 1 14 1 9 3 Inlining Functions inline __noinline 0 0 00 1 15 1 9 4 IntrinSic FUNCIONS 4 cc cndiecis op dda erie dp adedwebhidhaditaneliandeethd ied be laded 1 16 1 9 5 Interrupt FUNCOMS is epee caged es dae oae ean dane de vanns Ge bee eae Cee Ae ee Eee CaS 1 18 1 9 5 1 Defining an Interrupt Service Routine __interrupt
280. ile format map file formatting you can specify which parts you want to place in the map file Section 6 2 Linker Map File Format in Chapter List File Formats 5 213 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker map file format m Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Map File 3 Enable the option Generate a map file map 4 Inthe Map file format section enable or disable the information you want to be included in the map file Command line syntax map file format flags mflags You can specify the following formats 0 Same as meDfikLMNoQrSU link information 1 Same as mCDfiKIMNoQRSU locate information 2 Same as medfikimNoQrSu most information callgraph c C Call graph information removed d D Removed sections information files f F Processed files information invocation i I Invocation and tool information link k K Link result information locate VL Locate result information memory m M Memory usage information nonalloc n N Non alloc information overlay 0 0 Overlay information statics q Q Module local symbols crossref r R Cross references information Isl s S Processor and memory information rules u U Locate rules Description With this option you specify which information you want to include in the map file Use this option in combination w
281. iles with extensions other than obj o out lib or a are not recognized as input files Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent lkmb mfk test obj lkmb map file format files link test obj When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 5 190 Tool Options Linker Linker case insensitive Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Link case sensitive Command line syntax case insensitive Description With this option you tell the linker not to distinguish between upper and lower case characters in symbols By default the linker considers upper and lower case characters as different characters Disabling the option Link case sensitive in Altium Designer is the same as specifying the option case insensitive on the command
282. imizations in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 221 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional linker options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the linker options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Altium Designer automatically saves the options with your project Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the linker Use an option file when the length of the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote
283. in which they appear on the command line Related information db Section 6 9 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 256 Tool Options Control Program Control Program make target Command line syntax make target name Description With this option you can overrule the default target name in the make dependencies generated by the options preprocess make Em and dep file The default target name is the basename of the input file with extension obj Example ccmb preprocess make make target mytarget obj test c The compiler generates dependency lines with the default target name mytarget obj instead of test obj Related information Control program option preprocess make Generate dependencies for make Control program option dep file Generate dependencies in a file 5 257 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program mil link mil split Command line syntax mil link mil split Description With option mil link the C compiler links the optimized intermediate representation MIL of all input files and MIL libraries specified on the command line in the compiler The result is one single module that is optimized another time Option mil split does the same as option mil link but in addition the resulting MIL representation is written to a file with the suffix mil and the C compiler also splits the MIL representa
284. inated and the alias checking algorithm assumes that objects with static storage cannot be referenced from functions outside the current module On the command line this option only makes sense when you specify all modules of an application on the command line Example cmb static modulel c module2 c module3 c Related information J 5 50 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler stdout n Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax stdout n Description With this option you tell the compiler to send the output to stdout usually your screen No files are created This option is for example useful to quickly inspect the output or to redirect the output to other tools Related information i 5 51 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler tradeoff t Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Inthe Size speed trade off field select a level between fully optimize for size or fully optimize for speed Command line syntax tradeoff 0 1 2 3 4 t 0 1 2 3 4 Description If the compiler uses certain optimizations option optimize you can use this option to specify whether the used optimizations should optimize for more speed regardless of code size or for smaller code size regardless of speed By default the compiler optimizes for more speed
285. ined when type traits pseudo functions to ease the implementation of ISO IEC TR 19768 e g __ is union are enabled This is the default in C mode __VAR_HANDLE_TYPE Defines the type of the variable handle field in the exception handling tables This macro is used when building the C library __VERSION __ Identifies the version number of the C compiler For example if you use version 2 1r1 of the compiler _ VERSION __ expands to 2001 dot and revision number are omitted minor version number in 3 digits __VIRTUAL_FUNCTION_INDEX_TYPE Defines the type of the virtual function index field of the virtual function table This macro is used when building the C library __VIRTUAL_FUNCTION_ TYPE Defines the type of the virtual function field of the virtual function table This macro is used when building the C library __WCHAR_MIN __WCHAR_MAX Used in stdint h to define the minimum maximum value of a wchar_t type respectively _WCHAR_T Defined when wchar_t is a keyword Table 2 1 Predefined macros 2 23 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 2 11 Precompiled Headers It is often desirable to avoid recompiling a set of header files especially when they introduce many lines of code and the primary source files that include them are relatively small The C compiler provides a mechanism for in effect taking a snapshot of the state of the compilation at a particular point and
286. ines out the output is easier to read Example ccmb preprocess comments make noline no preprocessing only test c The compiler preprocesses the file test c and sends the output to the file test pre Comments are included but no dependencies are generated and the line source position information is not stripped from the output file Next the control program calls the compiler assembler and linker to create the final object file test abs Related information Control program option no preprocessing only Control program option make target Specify target name for Em output Control program option dep file Generate dependencies in a file 5 268 Tool Options Control Program Control Program profile p Command line syntax profile flags plflags Use the following option for a predefined set of flags profile g pg profiling with call graph and function timers Alias for pBcFt You can set the following flags when you specify p without flags the default is pBCfST block b B block counters callgraph c C call graph function f F function counters static s S static profile generation time t T function timers Description Profiling is the process of collecting statistical data about a running application With these data you can analyze which functions are called how often they are called and what their execution time is Several methods of profiling exist One
287. ing 5 135 Templates 5 119 tgamma functions 3 10 Tie breakers 5 92 time 3 21 time_t 3 21 Timing information 5 148 title 4 41 tm struct 3 21 TMP_MAX 3 12 tmpfile 3 17 tmpnam 3 17 tolower 3 3 toupper 3 3 towctrans 3 24 towlower 3 3 3 24 towupper 3 3 3 24 tradeoff 1 11 Transferring parameters between functions 1 14 trunc functions 3 9 type 4 42 Type checking 5 14 5 199 Type qualifier __unaligned 1 2 Type traits helpers 5 150 typename keyword 5 123 U undef 4 43 ungetc 3 16 ungetwc 3 16 unlink 3 23 use_barrel_shift 4 8 Using assembly in C source 1 5 using declaration allow unqualified name 5 118 V va_arg 3 11 va_copy 3 11 va_end 3 11 va_start 3 11 Vector table 8 17 vector_offset 1 11 Version information 5 300 5 312 vfprintf 3 15 vfscanf 3 15 vfwprintf 3 15 vfwscanf 3 15 Virtual function table force 5 77 suppress 5 145 vprintf 3 15 vscanf 3 15 vsprintf 3 15 vsscanf 3 15 vswprintf 3 15 vswscanf 3 15 vwprintf 3 15 vwscanf 3 15 W warning 1 12 Warnings suppressing 5 36 5 176 5 220 5 264 treat as errors 5 189 wchar_t 3 12 wchar_t keyword 5 158 wcrtomb 3 23 wcscat 3 20 wceschr 3 20 wcescmp 3 20 wcscoll 3 20 wescpy 3 19 wescspn 3 20 wesncat 3 20 wesncmp 3 20 wesncpy 3 19 wespbrk 3 20 wesrchr 3 20 wcsrtombs 3 23 wesspn 3 20 wesstr 3 20 wcstod 3 18 wcstof 3 18 wcstoimax 3 6 wcstok 3 2
288. ing all of the et information in one file will make use of the library more efficient 3 Create an export_info file in the export directory The export_info file specifies the include search paths to be used when recompiling files in the export directory If no export_info file is provided the include search path used when compiling the client program that uses the library will also be used to recompile the library exported template files 4 As a consequence using exported templates may require considerably more memory that similar uses of regular included templates 2 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The export_info file consists of a series of lines of the form include x or sys_include x where x is a path name to be placed on the include search path The directories are searched in the order in which they are encountered in the export_info file The file can also contain comments which begin with a and blank lines Spaces are ignored but tabs are not currently permitted For example The include directories to be used for the xyz library include diskl xyz include sys_include disk2 abc include include disk3 jk1 include The include search path specified for a client program is ignored by the C compiler when it processes the source in the export library except when no export_info file is provided command line macro definitions specified for a client program are also ignored by the C compiler when
289. ing the publication of template definitions in source form C Language 2 6 5 2 Secondary Translation Units An instantiation of an exported template can be triggered by an explicit instantiation directive or by the command line option instantiate used In each case the translation unit that contains the initial point of instantiation will be processed as the primary translation unit Based on information it finds in the et files the C compiler will then load and parse the translation unit containing the definition of the template to instantiate This is a secondary translation unit The simultaneous processing of the primary and secondary translation units enables the C compiler to create instantiations of the exported templates which can include entities from both translation units This process may reveal the need for additional instantiations of exported templates which in turn can cause additional secondary translation units to be loaded When secondary translation units are processed the declarations they contain are checked for consistency This process may report errors that would otherwise not be caught Many these errors are so called ODR violations ODR stands for one definition rule For example File 1 struct X int x int main return min 2 3 File 2 struct X unsigned x Error X x declared differently in File 1 export template lt class T gt T const amp
290. inker automatically defines two symbols The symbol _le_cb_section_name is defined as the load time start address of the section The symbol _1le_ce_section_name is defined as the load time end address of the section C or assembly code may be used to copy the overlaid sections If sections in the overlay group contain references between groups the linker reports an error The keyword allow_cross_references tells the linker to accept cross references Normally it does not make sense to have references between sections that are overlaid group ovl overlay group a select my_ovl_p1 select my_ovl_p2 group b select my_ovl_ql1 AN It may be possible that one of the sections in the overlay group already has been defined in another group where it received a load time address In this case the linker does not overrule this load time address and excludes the section from the overlay group 8 28 Linker Script Language 3 Restrict the possible addresses for the sections in a group The load time address specifies where the group s elements are loaded in memory at download time The run time address specifies where sections are located at run time that is when the program is executing If you do not explicitly restrict the address in the LSL file the linker assigns addresses to the sections based on the restrictions relative to other sections in the LSL file and section alignments The program is responsible f
291. int character you specify the register type for a parameter In the example above the r is used to force the use of registers Rn for the parameters a and b You can reserve the registers that are already used in the assembly instructions either in the parameter lists or in the reserved register list register_save_list also called clobber list The compiler takes account of these lists so no unnecessary register saving and restoring instructions are placed around the inline assembly instructions Constraint Type Operand Remark character r general purpose rO r31 register i immediate value immval number other operand same as number Input constraint only The number must refer to an output parameter Indicates that number and number are the same register Use number 0 and number 1 to indicate the first and second half of a register pair when used in combination with R Table 1 3 Available input output operand constraints for the MicroBlaze Loops and conditional jumps The compiler does not detect loops that are coded with multiple __asm statements or conditional jumps across __asm statements and will generate incorrect code for the registers involved If you want to create a loop with __asm the whole loop must be contained in a single __asm statement The same counts for conditional jumps As a rule of thumb all references to a label in an ___asm statement must be contained in the sam
292. ion Gb Assembler option define Define preprocessor macro in Section 5 3 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 4 25 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference INCLUDE Syntax INCLUDE filename lt filename gt Description With the INCLUDE directive you include another file at the exact location where the INCLUDE occurs This happens before the resulting file is assembled The INCLUDE directive works similarly to the include statement in C The source from the include file is assembled as if it followed the point of the INCLUDE directive When the end of the included file is reached assembly of the original file continues The string specifies the filename of the file to be included The filename must be compatible with the operating system forward backward slashes and can contain a directory specification If you omit a filename extension the assembler assumes the extension asm If an absolute pathname is specified the assembler searches for that file If a relative path is specified or just a filename the order in which the assembler searches for include files is 1 The current directory if you use the filename construction The current directory is not searched if you use the lt filename gt syntax 2 The path that is specified with the assembler option include directory l 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable AStargetINC when the product was installed 4 The default d
293. ion 8 5 2 Defining Internal Buses You can connect off chip memory to any derivative you need to map the off chip memory to a bus and map that bus on the internal bus of the derivative you want to connect it to 8 23 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 8 Semantics of the Section Setup Definition Keywords in the section setup definition section_setup stack min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id heap min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id vector _table vector size size id_symbol_ prefix run_addr template template_symbol vector prefix fill no_inline copy vector id 1IL loop reserved 8 8 1 Setting up a Section With the keyword section_setup you can define stacks heaps vector tables and or reserved address ranges outside their address space definition section_setup my_space vector table statements reserved address range stack definition heap definition See the subsections Stacks and heaps Vector table and Reserved address ranges in section 8 5 3 Defining Address Spaces for details on the keywords stack heap vector_table and reserved 8 24 Linker Script Language 8 9 Keywords in the section layout definition Semantics of the Section Layout Definition section_layout direction low_to_high high _to_low group align attributes rwxbis copy nocopy gali ordered contiguous clustered overlay allow cross_references load_addr mem
294. ion information lines starting with line These lines are normally processed by the assembler and not needed in the preprocessed output When you leave these lines out the output is easier to read Example cpmb preprocess comments make noline test cc output test pre The C compiler preprocesses the file test cc and sends the output to the file test pre Comments are included but no dependencies are generated and the line source position information is not stripped from the output file Related information C compiler option no preprocessing only Force full compilation C compiler option make target Specify target name for Em output 5 136 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler remarks r Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Issue remarks on C code Command line syntax remarks r Description Issue remarks which are diagnostic messages even milder than warnings Related information d Section 3 4 C Compiler Error Messages in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 137 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler remove unneeded entities Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Ad
295. ion name in the linker script file for locating Because sections have reserved names the compiler will not actually change the section name but will add a suffix to the name With the section name you select which sections are renamed With suffix you specify the suffix part which will be attached to the existing name The following name values have special meaning With the suboption f the compiler uses the function name only for code With the suboption m the compiler uses the name of the current module With the suboption fm or mf the compiler uses the name of the current module for data sections and the function name for code sections If you do not specify a section name all sections will receive the specified suffix Example To change all sections named data into data NEW cmb rename sections data NEW test c To add the name of the current module name as suffix to all data sections resulting in data test cmb rename sections data m test c Related information db Assembler directive SECTION 5 44 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler romstrings S Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Enable the option Put strings in ROM only Command line syntax romstrings S Description By default constant strings are copied from ROM to RAM at program startup With this
296. ions 3 9 CERT C 9 1 CERT C secure coding 5 4 chdir 3 22 Check source code 5 5 5 65 5 162 5 232 Class name injection 5 104 clear noclear 1 8 clearerr 3 17 clock 3 21 clock_t 3 21 CLOCKS _PER_SEC 3 21 close 3 22 cnt 4 6 Code checking CERT C 9 1 Code compaction 5 18 5 26 Command file 5 291 Comment 4 1 Comments 8 3 compactmaxmatch 1 8 compiler options misrac version 5 30 Conditional assembly 4 48 Conditional make rules 5 278 const string literals 5 105 Context limit 5 66 Control program passing options 5 267 Control program options 5 230 5 246 adress size 5 231 check 5 232 create 5 233 debug info 5 234 define 5 235 dep file 5 236 diag 5 237 dry run 5 238 error file 5 239 exceptions 5 240 force c 5 241 force ct 5 242 force munch 5 243 format 5 244 global type checking 5 245 help 5 246 ignore default library path 5 254 include directory 5 247 instantiate 5 248 io streams 5 249 iso 5 250 keep output files 5 251 keep temporary files 5 252 library 5 253 library directory 5 254 lsl file 5 256 make target 5 257 mil link 5 258 mil split 5 258 no auto instantiation 5 259 no default libraries 5 260 no double 5 261 no map file 5 262 no preprocessing only 5 263 no warnings 5 264 option file 5 265 output 5 266 pass 5 267 preprocess 5 268 profile 5 269 show c w
297. ions dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional assembler options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt To call the assembler from the command line use the following syntax asmb option file The input file must be an assembly source file asm or src Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent asmb Ogs test src asmb optimize tgenerics instr size test src When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 5 160 Tool Options Assembler Assembler case insensitive c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Assemble case sensitive Command line syntax case insensitive C Description
298. ions dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Set the option Maximum code size increase caused by inlining to a value 4 Set the option Maximum size for functions to always inline to a value Command line syntax Description With these options you can control the automatic function inlining optimization process of the compiler These options have only effect when you have enabled the inlining optimization option Oi Regardless of the optimization process the compiler always inlines all functions that have the function qualifier inline With the option inline max size you can specify the maximum size of functions that the compiler inlines as part of the optimization process The compiler always inlines all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold The threshold is measured in compiler internal units and the compiler uses this measure to decide which functions are small enough to inline The default threshold is 1 which means that the threshold depends on the option tradeoff After the compiler has inlined all functions that have the function qualifier inline and all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold the compiler looks whether it can inline more functions without increasing the code size too much With the option inline max iner you can specify how much the code size is allowed to increase The default value is 1 which means that the value depends on the option t
299. ions of code should not be commented out In general it is not possible to decide whether a piece of comment is C code that is commented out or just some pseudo code Instead the following heuristics are used to detect possible C code inside a comment a line ends with or a line starts with possibly preceded by white space All usage of implementation defined behavior shall be documented The character set and the corresponding encoding shall be documented The implementation of integer division in the chosen compiler should be determined documented and taken into account All uses of the pragma directive shall be documented and explained This rule is really a documentation issue The compiler will flag all pragma directives as violations The implementation defined behavior and packing of bit fields shall be documented if being relied upon All libraries used in production code shall be written to comply with the provisions of this document and shall have been subject to appropriate validation Only those escape sequences that are defined in the ISO C standard shall be used Trigraphs shall not be used 10 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Identifiers 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 x 5 5 5 6 x 5 7 Types 6 1 x 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 Constants 7 1 R R ZS R Identifiers internal and external shall not rely on the significance of more than 31 characters Identifiers in an
300. irective is preceded by the keyword extern no explicit or implicit instantiation is for the indicated specialization An explicit instantiation directive that names a class may omit the class keyword and may refer to a typedef An explicit instantiation or extern template directive that names a class is accepted in an invalid namespace std type_info does not need to be introduced with a special pragma A special keyword __nu11 expands to the same constant as the literal 0 but is expected to be used as a null pointer constant When gnu_version lt 30400 names from dependent base classes are ignored only if another name would be found by the lookup const int n 0 template lt class T gt struct B static const int m 1 static const int n 2 he template lt class T gt struct D B lt T gt int f return m n Br m n in g mode he A non static data member from a dependent base class which would usually be ignored as described above is found if the lookup would have otherwise found a nonstatic data member of an enclosing class when gnu_version is lt 30400 template lt class T gt struct C struct A int i struct B public A void f i 0 g uses A i not Cr i hi int i hi A new operation in a template is always treated as dependent when gnu_version gt 30400 template lt class T gt struct A void f void p 0 new amp p int 0 calls operator new decla
301. irectory ctarget include Example Suppose that your assembly source file test src contains the following line INCLUDE c myincludes myinc inc The assembler issues an error if it cannot find the file at the specified location INCLUDE myinc inc The assembler searches the file myinc inc according to the rules described above Related information d Assembler option include directory Add directory to include file search path in Section 5 3 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 4 26 Assembly Language LABEL Syntax label LABEL type Description With the LABEL directive you define a label of a specified type Use this directive if the label that you define must have another type than it receives by default By default a label inherits its type from the type of the section in which you define the label Example In the next example the first label receives the type of the section The second label is defined with the LABEL directive and receives the type data SECTION text mylabell EQU 2 mylabel2 LABEL data 4 27 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference LIST NOLIST Syntax NOLIST assembly source lines LIST Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the LIST and NOLIST directives to specify which source lines the assembler must write to the list file The assembler prints all source lines to the list file untill it
302. is possible to inline assembly code by hand intrinsic functions use registers even more efficiently At the same time your C source remains very readable You can use intrinsic functions in C as if they were ordinary C library functions All intrinsics begin with a double underscore character The TASKING MicroBlace C compiler recognizes the following intrinsic functions __alloc void volatile _alloc _ size_t size Allocate memory Returns a pointer to space in external memory of size bytes length NULL if there is not enough space left __dotdotdot__ char _ dotdotdot_ void Variable argument operator Used in library function va_start Returns the stack offset to the variable argument list __free void volatile _ free void p Deallocates the memory pointed to by p p must point to memory earlier allocated by a callto _ alloc Returns nothing __get_return_address __codeptr volatile _ get_return_address void Used by the compiler for profiling wnen you compile with the profile p option Returns return address of a function __getfs _Bool volatile _ _getfsl unsigned char channel unsigned int data _Bool wait Read data words from a specified fast simplex link fs channel Channel must be a constant value in the range 0 7 The read data is stored in data With the boolean wait you can choose whether or not to wait for information True means wait for information false means d
303. ith the option map file M If you do not specify this option the linker uses the default map file format 2 Related information db Linker option map file Generate map file 5 214 Tool Options Linker Linker misra c report Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Select a MISRA C configuration 4 Enable the option Produce a MISRA C report Command line syntax misra c report i e Description With this option you tell the linker to create a MISRA C Quality Assurance report This report lists the various modules in the project with the respective MISRA C settings at the time of compilation If you do not specify a filename the file name mcr is used Related information d gt Compiler option misrac 5 215 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker munch Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option munch to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax munch Description With this option you tell the linker to activate the muncher in the pre locate phase Related information i 5 216 Tool Options Linker Linker non romable Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project
304. itialized at 1 void f void _at Oxf0Off 1 The function f is placed at address Oxf100 Restrictions Take note of the following restrictions if you place a variable at an absolute address e The argument ofthe at attribute must be a constant address expression e You can place only global variables at absolute addresses Parameters of functions or automatic variables within functions cannot be placed at absolute addresses e A variable that is declared extern is not allocated by the compiler in the current module Hence it is not possible to use the keyword __at on an external variable Use _at at the definition of the variable e You cannot place structure members at an absolute address 1 4 C Language e Absolute variables cannot overlap each other If you declare two absolute variables at the same address the assembler and or linker issues an error The compiler does not check this 1 4 Using Assembly in the C Source _asm With the __asm keyword you can use assembly instructions in the C source Be aware that C modules that contain assembly are not portable and harder to compile in other environments Furthermore assembly blocks are not interpreted by the compiler they are regarded as a black box So it is your responsibility to make sure that the assembly block is syntactically correct General syntax of the _ asm keyword __asm instruction_template output_param_list input_param_
305. ium Designer 5 277 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Defining Macros Command line syntax macro definition Description With this argument you can define a macro and specify it to the make utility A macro definition remains in existence during the execution of the makefile even when the makefile recursively calls the make utility again In the recursive call the macro acts as an environment variable This means that it is overruled by definitions in the recursive call Use the option e to prevent this You can specify as many macros as you like If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the make utility with the option m file Defining macros on the command line is for example useful in combination with conditional processing as shown in the example below Example Consider the following makefile with conditional rules to build a demo program and a real program ifdef DEMO the value of DEMO is of no importance real abs real obj main obj lkmb demo obj main obj dmb 1sl lcmba lfpmba lrtmba else real abs real obj main obj lkmb real obj main obj dmb 1sl lcmba lfpmba lrtmba endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag tmk real abs DEMO 1 In both cases the absolute object file real abs is created but depending on the DEMO flag it is linked with demo obj or with real obj Related information
306. ivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Chip The names of the memory chips as defined in the linker script file 1s1 in the memory definitions Group Sections can be ordered in groups These are the names of the groups as defined in the linker script file 1s1 with the keyword group in the section_layout definition The name that is displayed is the name of the deepest nested group Section The name and id of the section The number between Y uniquely identifies the section Names within square brackets will be copied during initialization from ROM to the corresponding section name in RAM Size MAU The size of the section in minimum addressable units Space addr The absolute address of the section in the address space Chip addr The absolute offset of the section from the start of a memory chip Locate Result Symbols This part of the map file lists all external symbols per address space name both sorted on address and sorted on symbol name Name The name of the symbol Space addr The absolute address of the section in the address space Space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script file 1s1 The names are constructed of the derivative name followed by a colon the core name another colon and the space name Processor and Memory This part of the map file shows the processor and memory information of the linker script file
307. ive With the keyword derivative you define a derivative and assign a unique name to it The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file derivative name definitions If you are defining multiple derivatives that show great resemblance you can define the common features in a parent derivative and extend this with a child derivative that contains specific features The child inherits all features of the parent cores and memories With the keyword extends you create a child derivative derivative name_child_deriv extends name_parent_deriv definitions As with a core architecture a derivative can have any number of parameters These are identifiers which get values assigned on instantiation or extension of the derivative You can use them in any expression within the derivative definition derivative name_child_deriv parml1 parm2 1 extends name_parent_derivh arguments definitions 8 6 2 Instantiating Core Architectures With the keyword core you instantiate a core architecture in a derivative 8 20 Linker Script Language With the keyword architecture you tell the linker that the given core has a certain architecture The architecture name refers to an existing architecture definition in the same LSL file For example if you have two cores called mycore_1 and mycore_2 that have the same architecture called mycorearch you must instantiate both cores as follows core mycore_1
308. ive and up to the next ENDIF directive will be included as part of the source file being assembled only if the expression had a non zero result If the expression has a value of zero the source file will be assembled as if those statements between the IF and the ENDIF directives were never encountered If the ELSE directive is present and expression has a nonzero result then the statements between the IF and ELSE directives will be assembled and the statement between the ELSE and ENDIF directives will be skipped Alternatively if expression has a value of zero then the statements between the IF and ELSE directives will be skipped and the statements between the ELSE and ENDIF directives will be assembled 4 49 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 4 10 Generic Instructions The assembler supports so called generic instructions Generic instructions are pseudo instructions no instructions from the instruction set Depending on the situation in which a generic instruction is used the assembler replaces the generic instruction with appropriate real assembly instruction s The MicroBlaze assembler recognizes the following generic instructions Instruction Replacement NOP OR RO RO RO CLR Rd XOR Ra Rd Rd CP Rd Ra ADDIK Rd Ra 0 LI Rd Imm ADDIK Rd R0 mm NEG Rd Ra RSUBI Rd Ra 0 NOT Rd Ra XORI Rd Ra 1 SUB Rd Rb Ra RSUB Rd Ra Rb 4 50 5 Tool Options Summary This
309. ixed 8 16 8 30 group 8 26 8 27 grows 8 16 heap 8 16 8 30 Index 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference high_to_low 8 16 8 26 id 8 15 8 16 id_symbol_prefix 8 17 if 8 33 load_adadr 8 29 low_to_high 8 16 8 26 map 8 15 8 16 8 18 8 21 mau 8 15 8 16 8 21 8 23 mem 8 29 memory 8 21 8 23 min_size 8 16 8 30 no_inline 8 17 nocopy 8 28 nvram 8 21 ordered 8 28 overflow 8 32 overlay 8 28 page 8 16 8 29 page_size 8 16 8 29 priority 8 30 processor 8 22 ram 8 21 ref_tree 8 27 reserved 8 18 8 21 8 30 rom 8 21 run_adadr 8 17 8 18 8 29 section 8 31 section_layout 8 25 section_setup 8 24 select 8 26 size 8 17 8 18 8 21 8 23 8 30 8 32 space 8 15 8 18 speed 8 21 8 23 src_dbits 8 18 src_offset 8 18 stack 8 16 8 30 start_address 8 18 symbol 8 18 template 8 17 template_symbol 8 17 type 8 21 8 23 vector 8 17 vector_prefix 8 17 vector_size 8 17 vector_table 8 17 width 8 15 LSL syntax 8 3 architecture definition 8 7 board specification 8 10 bus definition 8 6 derivative definition 8 9 memory definition 8 6 processor definition 8 10 section layout definition 8 10 Istat 3 23 Isw 4 7 Index 10 macro nomacro 1 9 Macro argument string 4 47 Macro call 4 1 Macro definition 5 8 5 68 5 164 5 235 Macro operations 4 45 macro endm 4 29 Macros 4 45 for directive 4 48 repeat directive 4 48 argument concatenation 4 46 argument op
310. l Bitwise amp AND Integer only yields bitwise AND OR Integer only yields bitwise OR a exclusive OR Integer only yields bitwise exlusive OR Logical amp amp logical AND Returns an integer 1 if both operands are non zero otherwise it returns an integer 0 logical OR Returns an integer 1 if either of the operands is non zero otherwise it returns an integer 1 Table 4 3 Assembly expression operators 4 7 Built in Assembly Functions The TASKING assemblers have several built in functions to support data conversion string comparison and math computations You can use functions as terms in any expression Syntax of an assembly function function_name argument argumeni Functions start with character and have zero or more arguments and are always followed by opening and closing parentheses White space a blank or tab is not allowed between the function name and the opening parenthesis and between the comma separated arguments 4 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 4 7 1 Overview of Built in Assembly Functions The following table provides an overview of all built in assembly functions Next all functions are described into more detail expr can be any assembly expression resulting in an integer value Expressions are explained in section 4 6 Assembly Expressions Overview of assembly functions Function Description ARG symbol expr CAST type expr CNT DEFINE
311. l processor in a processor definition This information tells the linker which processor has which derivative and enables the linker to distinguish between the present processors AN If you use processors that all have a unique derivative you may omit the processor definitions In this case the linker assumes that for each derivative definition in the LSL file there is one processor The linker uses the derivative name also for the processor With the keyword processor you define a processor You can freely choose the processor name The name is used to refer to it at other places in the LSL file processor proc_name processor definition 8 7 2 Instantiating Derivatives With the keyword derivative you tell the linker that the given processor has a certain derivative The derivative name refers to an existing derivative definition in the same LSL file For examples if you have two processors on your target board called myproc_1 and myproc_2 that have the same derivative called myderiv you must instantiate both processors as follows processor myproc_1 derivative myderiv processor myproc_2 derivative myderiv 8 22 Linker Script Language If the derivative definition has parameters you must specify the arguments that correspond with the parameters For example myderiv1 expects two parameters which are used in the derivative definition processor myproc derivative myderivl 2 4 8 7 3 D
312. l objects and libraries are processed the linker checks if there are unresolved symbols left If so the default behavior of the linker is to rescan all libraries in the order given at the command line The linker stops rescanning the libraries when all symbols are resolved or when the linker could not resolve any symbol s during the rescan of all libraries Notice that resolving one symbol may introduce new unresolved symbols With this option you tell the linker to scan the object files and libraries only once When the linker has not resolved all symbols after the first scan it reports which symbols are still unresolved This option is useful if you are building your own libraries The libraries are most efficiently organized if the linker needs only one pass to resolve all symbols Related information d gt Linker option first library first Scan libraries in given order 5 218 Tool Options Linker Linker no rom copy N Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no rom copy to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax no rom copy N Description With this option the linker will not generate a ROM copy for data sections A copy table is generated and contains entries to clear BSS section However no entries to copy data sections from ROM to RAM are placed in the copy
313. l parameter type shall be compatible with the prototype The number of actual parameters shall match the prototype The values returned by void functions shall not be used Void expressions shall not be passed as function parameters const should be used for reference parameters not modified A function should have a single point of exit Every exit point shall have a return of the declared return type For void functions return shall not have an expression Function calls with no parameters should have empty parentheses If a function returns error information it should be tested A violation is reported when the return value of a function is ignored include shall only be preceded by other directives or comments Non standard characters shall not occur in include directives include shall be followed by either lt filename gt or filename Plain macros shall only be used for constants qualifiers specifiers Macros shall not be define d and undef d within a block undef should not be used A function should be used in preference to a function like macro A function like macro shall not be used without all arguments Macro arguments shall not contain pre preprocessing directives A violation is reported when the first token of an actual macro argument is Macro definitions parameters should be enclosed in parentheses Don t use undefined identifiers in pre processing directives A macro definition shall contain at
314. l program generates an ELF DWARF object file default with the name test abs To generate the file result abs ccmb output result abs test c prog c Related information i 5 266 Tool Options Control Program Control Program pass W Command line syntax pass assembler option Waoption Pass option directly to the assembler pass c option Wcoption Pass option directly to the C compiler pass c option Wcpoption Pass option directly to the C compiler pass linker option Wloption Pass option directly to the linker Description With this option you tell the control program to call a tool with the specified option The control program does not use or interpret the option itself but specifies it directly to the tool which it calls Related information de 5 267 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program preprocess E Command line syntax preprocess flags Effiags You can set the following flags when you specify E without flags the default is ECILMP comments c C Keep comments from the C source in the preprocessed output includes i l Generate a list of included source files list I L Generate a list of macro definitions make m M Generate dependency lines that can be used for the makefile noline p P Strip line source position info lines starting with line Description With this option you tell the control program to preprocess the C
315. l program is a tool to facilitate use of the toolset from the command line Therefore you can only call the control program from the command line The invocation syntax is ccmb option file Options The control program processes command line options either by itself or when the option is unknown to the control program it looks whether it can pass the option to one of the other tools However for directly passing an option to the C compiler C compiler assembler or linker it is recommended to use the control program options pass c pass c pass assembler pass linker Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent ccmb Wc Oac test c ccmb pass c optimize coalescer cse test c When you do not specify an option a default value may become active 5 230 Tool Options Control Program Control Program address size Command line syntax address size adar_size Description
316. lain text mixed with conversion specifiers Each conversion specifier should be preceded by a character The conversion specifier should be build in order Flags in any order specifies left adjustment of the converted argument a number is always preceded with a sign character has higher precedence than space space a negative number is preceded with a sign positive numbers with a space 0 specifies padding to the field width with zeros only for numbers specifies an alternate output form For o the first digit will be zero For x or X 0x and 0X will be prefixed to the number For e E f g G the output always contains a decimal point trailing zeros are not removed A number specifying a minimum field width The converted argument is printed in a field with at least the length specified here If the converted argument has fewer characters than specified it will be padded at the left side or at the right when the flag was specified with spaces Padding to numeric fields will be done with zeros when the flag 0 is also specified only when padding left Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A period This separates the minimum field width from the precision A number specifying the maximum length of a string to be printed Or the number of digits printed after the decimal point only for f
317. lation aborted if the command line includes a request for precompiled header processing and specifies more than one primary source file 2 11 2 Manual Precompiled Header Processing Command line option create pch filename specifies that a precompiled header file of the specified name should be created Command line option use pch filename specifies that the indicated precompiled header file should be used for this compilation if it is invalid i e if its prefix does not match the prefix for the current primary source file a warning will be issued and the PCH file will not be used When either of these options is used in conjunction with pch dir the indicated file name which may be a path name is tacked on to the directory name unless the file name is an absolute path name The options create pch use pch and pch may not be used together If more than one of these options is specified only the last one will apply Nevertheless most of the description of automatic PCH processing applies to one or the other of these modes header stop points are determined the same way PCH file applicability is determined the same way and so forth 2 11 3 Other Ways to Control Precompiled Headers There are several ways in which the user can control and or tune how precompiled headers are created and used e pragma hdrstop may be inserted in the primary source file at a point prior to the first token that does not belong to a preprocessing
318. ld for init option would have had different behavior under the old rules Related information d C compiler option old for init Use old for scoping rules 5 113 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no implicit typename Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no implicit typename to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no implicit typename Default implicit typename determination is enabled Description Disable implicit determination from context whether a template parameter dependent name is a type or nontype Related information dE C compiler option no typename Disable the typename keyword 5 114 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no inlining Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Disable the option Minimal inlining of function calls Command line syntax no inlining Description Disable minimal inlining of function calls Related information J 5 115 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler nonconst ref anachronism Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler en
319. ld number of the assembler composed of decimal digits for the build number three digits for the major branch number and three digits for the minor branch number For example if you use build 1 22 1 of the compiler _BUILD__ expands to 1022001 If there is no branch number the branch digits expand to zero For example build 127 results in 127000000 _ MB Expands to 1 for the MicroBlaze toolset otherwise unrecognized as macro __ REVISION __ Identifies the revision number of the assembler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the compiler _ REVISION _ expands to 2 __ TASKING _ Identifies the assembler as a TASKING assembler Expands to 1 if a TASKING compiler is used __VERSION__ Identifies the version number of the assembler For example if you use version 1 0r2 of the assembler _VERSION__ expands to 1000 dot and revision number are omitted minor version number in 3 digits Table 4 1 Assembler predefined preprocessor symbols 4 5 Registers The following register names either upper or lower case should not be used for user defined symbol names in an assembly language source file MicroBlaze registers RO R31 4 6 Assembly Expressions An expression is a combination of symbols constants operators and parentheses which represent a value that is used as an operand of an assembler instruction or directive Expressions may contain user defined labels and their associated integer values and
320. lect mysection else reserved myreserved size 2k 8 33 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 34 9 CERT C Secure Coding Standard Summ ary This chapter contains an overview of the CERT C Secure Coding Standard recommendations and rules that are supported by the TASKING VX toolset The CERT C Secure Coding Standard provides rules and recommendations for secure coding in the C programming language The goal of these rules and recommendations is to eliminate insecure coding practices and undefined behaviors that can lead to exploitable vulnerabilities The application of the secure coding standard will lead to higher quality systems that are robust and more resistant to attack a For details see the CERT C Secure Coding Standard web site For general information about CERT secure coding see www cert org secure coding Identifiers Each rule and recommendation is given a unique identifier These identifiers consist of three parts e athree letter mnemonic representing the section of the standard e atwo digit numeric value in the range of 00 99 e the letter C indicates that this is a C language guideline The three letter mnemonic is used to group similar coding practices and to indicate to which category a coding practice belongs The numeric value is used to give each coding practice a unique identifier Numeric values in the range of 00 29 are reserved for recommendations while values in the range of
321. line syntax output file 0 file Default module name with ic suffix Description With this option you can specify another filename for the output file of the C compiler Without this option the basename of the C source file is used with extension ic You can also use this option in combination with the option preprocess E to redirect the preprocessing output to a file Example To create the file output ic instead of test ic enter cpmb output output ic test cc To use the file my pre as the preprocessing output file enter cpmb preprocess output my pre test cc Related information Gb C compiler option preprocess Preprocessing only 5 131 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler pch Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Precompiled Headers 3 Enable the option Automatically use and or create a precompiled header file Command line syntax pch Description Automatically use and or create a precompiled header file If use pch or create pch manual PCH mode appears on the command line following this option its effect is erased Related information C compiler option use pch Use precompiled header file C compiler option create pch Create precompiled header file Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 132 Tool Options C
322. list register_save_list instruction_template Assembly instructions that may contain parameters from the input list or output list in the form parm_nr Y parm_nr regnum Parameter number in the range 0 9 With the optional regnum you can access an individual register from a register pair output_param_list amp constraint_char C_expression input_param_list constraint_char C_expression amp Says that an output operand is written to before the inputs are read so this output must not be the same register as any input constraint _char Constraint character the type of register to be used for the C_expression C_expression Any C expression For output parameters it must be an value that is something that is legal to have on the left side of an assignment register_save_list register_name register_name q Name of the register you want to reserve Typical example adding two C variables using assembly char a b int result void main void a 3 b 4 __asm ADD 0 1 2 r result r a r b 0 corresponds with the first C variable 1 with the second and so on Generated assembly code main label code addik r3 r0 3 sbi r3 r13 a _base_r13 addik r4 r0 4 sbi r4 r13 b _base_r13 ADD r3 r3 r4 swi r3 r13 result _base_r13 rtsd r15 8 or ro r0 ro MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Specifying registers for C variables With a constra
323. llowing information e the current position within the stream e pointers to any associated buffers e indications of for read write errors e end of file indication The header file also defines type fpos_t as an unsigned long Macros stdio h wchar h Description NULL BUFSIZ EOF WEOF FOPEN MAX FILENAME MAX _IOFBF _IOLBF _IONBF L_tmpnam TMP_MAX SEEK _CUR SEEK_END SEEK_SET stderr stdin stdout 3 12 expands to the null pointer constant Size of the buffer used by the setbuf setvbuf function 512 End of file indicator Expands to 1 End of file indicator Expands to UINT_Max defined in limits h NOTE WEOF need not to be a negative number as long as its value does not correspond to a member of the wide character set Defined in wchar h Number of files that can be opened simultaneously 10 Maximum length of a filename 100 Expand to an integer expression suitable for use as argument to the set vbuf function Size of the string used to hold temporary file names 8 tmpxxxxx Maximum number of unique temporary filenames that can be generated 0x8000 Expand to an integer expression suitable for use as the third argument to the fseek function Expressions of type pointer to FILE that point to the FILE objects associated with standard error input and output streams Libraries File access stdio h Description fopen name mode Opens a file for a given mode Available modes a
324. loating point conversions Or the minimum number of digits to be printed for an integer conversion Instead of a numeric value also may be specified the value is then taken from the next argument which is assumed to be of type int A length modifier h hh P P L F z or t h indicates that the argument is to be treated as a short or unsigned short hh indicates that the argument is to be treated as a char or unsigned char l should be used if the argument is a long integer Il fora long long L indicates that the argument is a long double indicates a pointer to intmax_t or uintmax_t 2 indicates a pointer to size_t and t indicates a pointer to ptrdiff_t 3 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Flags length specifier period precision and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Printed as d i int signed decimal o int unsigned octal x X int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase respectively u int unsigned decimal c int single character converted to unsigned char S char the characters from the string are printed until a NULL character is found When the given precision is met before printing will also stop f double e E double g G double a A double n int the number of characters written so
325. log box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option old specializations to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax old specializations Description Enable acceptance of old style template specializations that is specializations that do not use the template lt gt syntax Related information i 5 128 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional C compiler options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the C compiler options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Altium Designer automatically saves the options with your project Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the C compiler Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times
326. lt lt left shift equal to not equal to gt greater than lt less than gt greater than or equal to lt less than or equal to amp bitwise AND bitwise OR amp amp logical AND logical OR 8 4 Linker Script Language 8 3 5 Built in Functions function_call absolute expr addressof addr_id exists section_name max expr expr min expr expr sizeof size_id addr_id sect section_name group group_name size_id 3 sect section_name group group_name mem mem_name e Every space bus memory section or group your refer to must be defined in the LSL file e The addressof and sizeof functions with the group or sect argument can only be used in the right hand side of an assignment The sizeof function with the mem argument can be used anywhere in section layouts You can use the following built in functions in expressions All functions return a numerical value This value is a 64 bit signed integer absolute int absolute expr Converts the value of expr to a positive integer absolute labelA labelB addressof int addressof addr_id Returns the address of addr_id which is a named section or group To get the offset of the section with the name asect addressof sect asect AN This function only works in assignments exists int exists section_name The func
327. lude xxx h ifndef YYY_H define YYY_H 1 include yyy h endif if TEST int i endif Here the first token that does not belong to a preprocessing directive is again int but the header stop point is the start of the if block containing it The PCH file will reflect the inclusion of xxx h and conditionally the definition of yYYY_H and inclusion of yyy h it will not contain the state produced by if TEST A PCH file will be produced only if the header stop point and the code preceding it mainly the header files themselves meet certain requirements e The header stop point must appear at file scope it may not be within an unclosed scope established by a header file For example a PCH file will not be created in this case xxx h class A xXxx C include xxx h int i e The header stop point may not be inside a declaration started within a header file nor in C may it be part of a declaration list of a linkage specification For example in the following case the header stop point is int but since it is not the start of a new declaration no PCH file will be created yyy h static yyy C include yyy h int i e Similarly the header stop point may not be inside a if block or a define started within a header file 2 24 C Language e The processing preceding the header stop must not have produced any errors Note warnings and other diagnostics will not be reproduced when
328. lude macros file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax include macros file file Description Include the macros of the indicated file at the beginning of the compilation Only the preprocessing directives from the file are evaluated All of the actual code is discarded The effect of this option is that any macro definitions from the specified file will be in effect when the primary source file is compiled All of the macro only files are processed before any of the normal includes include file Within each group the files are processed in the order in which they were specified Related information C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation Section 3 3 How the C Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the C Compiler of the user s manual 5 88 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler init priority Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option init priority to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax init priority number Default 0 Description Normally the C compiler assigns no priority to the global initialization functions and the exact order is determined by the linker This option sets the default priority for global initialization functions Default value is 0 You ca
329. m Returns the read character or EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Same as fgetc fgetwe except that is implemented as a macro FSS implementation NOTE Currently defined as getchar getwchar because FILE I O is not supported Returns the read character or EOF WEOF on error Reads one character from the stdin stream Returns the character read or EOF WEOF on error Implemented as macro FSS implementation Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the stream into array s until a newline is found Returns s or NULL or EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Reads at most the next n 1 characters from the stdin stream into array s A newline is ignored Returns s or NULL or EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Pushes character c back onto the input stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Put character c onto the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Same as fpuc fputwe except that is implemented as a macro FSS implementation Put character c onto the stdout stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Implemented as macro FSS implementation Writes string s to the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error Writes string s to the stdout stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation fread ptr size nobj stream fwrite ptr size nobj stream Random access stdio h Reads nobj members of size bytes from the given stream into the array pointed to by ptr Returns the numbe
330. me no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like just use the option define multiple times If the command line exceeds the limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the linker with the option option file file f The definition can be tested by the preprocessor with if ifdef and ifndef for conditional locating Example To define the stack size which is used in the linker script file mb 1s1 enter lkmb test obj otest abs dmb 1sl D_STACK 10k or using the long option names lkmb otest abs lsl file mb 1sl define _ STACK 10k Related information d Linker option option file Read options from file 5 193 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Messages panel appears 2 In the Messages panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all nr Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptio
331. me and id from the input object file The number between uniquely identifies the section in Size The size of the input section out Offset The offset relative to the start of the output section out Section The resulting output section name and id out Size The size of the output section Module Local Symbols This part of the map file shows a table for each local scope within an object file Each table has three columns 1 the symbol name 2 the address of the symbol and 3 the space where the symbol resides in The table is sorted on symbol name within each space 6 6 List File Formats By default this part is not shown in the map file You have to turn this part on manually with linker option map file format statics module local symbols Cross References This part of the map file lists all symbols defined in the object modules and for each symbol the object modules that contain a reference to the symbol are shown Also symbols that remain undefined are shown Call Graph This part of the map file contains a schematic overview that shows how library functions call each other Locate Result Sections This part of the map file shows the absolute position of each section in the absolute object file It is organized per address space memory chip and group and sorted on space address Space The names of the address spaces as defined in the linker script file 1s1 The names are constructed of the der
332. method is code instrumentation which adds code to your application that takes care of the profiling process when the application is executed db For an extensive description of profiling refer to Chapter 4 Profiling in the user s manual With this option the compiler adds the extra code to your application that takes care of the profiling process You can obtain the following profiling data see flags above Block counters not in combination with Call graph or Time This will instrument the code to perform basic block counting As the program runs it counts the number of executions of each branch in an if statement each iteration of a for loop and so on Note that though you can combine Block counters with Function counters this has no effect because Function counters is only a subset of Block counters Call graph not in combination with Block counters This will instrument the code to reconstruct the run time call graph As the program runs it associates the caller with the gathered profiling data Function counters This will instrument the code to perform function call counting This is a subset of the basic Block counters Time not in combination with Block counters This will instrument the code to measure the time spent in a function This includes the time spent in all sub functions callees Note that the more detailled information you request the larger the overhead in terms of execution time code size and heap space
333. mngce neces Minune arate eet aed aoe 8 4 8 3 5 Built in FUNCIONS es cicera tates area rand Bane Weal teehee ade Bes 8 5 8 3 6 LSL Definitions in the Linker Script File 00 0 cece cece eee 8 6 8 3 7 Memory and Bus Definitions 0 cee tenet eee ee 8 6 8 3 8 Architecture Definition 2 4 0 5 6 cay cee ceed cas een eda dae Canna a dee de eee eee has 8 7 8 3 9 Derivative Definitions sser susina aA ed Rae AGE a Eee Ie edd oN ead 8 9 8 3 10 Processor Definition and Board Specification 0 ccc cece ees 8 10 8 3 11 Section Layout Definition and Section Setup 0 eee eee 8 10 8 4 Expression Evaluation csc cc2e0c tac aie Can cata tan na dans Od ee eg eae oe RAE pee one 8 13 8 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition 00 c cece ete 8 14 8 5 1 Defining am Archit cture orice secesia na uei na E chelated NE E E ARE E E A EE 8 15 8 5 2 Defining Internal BUSES erii rcssri rrrainis vrni si kini ene eee ONE ee 8 15 8 5 3 Defining Address Spaces 00 cece eect ene eee e eens 8 15 8 5 4 IAB UNS oa a Be eee cree ere e a a N Goce Mien e e watt ceded aera 8 18 8 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition 0 00 cece ete tenes 8 20 8 6 1 Defining a DeriVatIVE cresia oraa a eee iE ee ce 2 ee eee ee ee 8 20 8 6 2 Instantiating Core Architectures 0 c cc tte eens 8 20 8 6 3 Defining Internal Memory and Buses 0 c eee aaaeeeaa 8 21 8 7 Semantics of the Board Specification
334. modules of an application on the command line Example ccmb static modulel c module2 c module3 c Related information i 5 272 Tool Options Control Program Control Program undefine U Command line syntax undefine macro_name Umacro_name Description With this option you can undefine an earlier defined macro as with undef This option is for example useful to undefine predefined macros However you cannot undefine predefined ISO C standard macros The control program passes the option undefine U to the compiler Example To undefine the predefined macro _ TASKING_ ccmb undefine _ TASKING test c Related information d gt Control Pogram option define Define preprocessor macro 5 273 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program verbose v Command line syntax verbose V Description With this option you put the control program in verbose mode With the option v the control program performs it tasks while it prints the steps it performs to stdout Related information db Control Program option n dry run Verbose output and suppress execution 5 274 Tool Options Control Program Control Program version V Command line syntax version V Description Display version information The control program ignores all other options or input files Related information J 5 275 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Pr
335. mp table approach executes faster than the binary search table approach Also the jump table has a predictable behavior in execution speed independent of the switch argument every case is reached in the same execution time With a small number of cases the jump chain method can be faster in execution and shorter in size You can overrule the compiler chosen switch method by using a pragma pragma linear_switch force jump chain code pragma jump switch force jump table code pragma binary switch force binary search table code pragma smart_switch let the compiler decide the switch method used Using a pragma cannot overrule the restrictions as described earlier The switch pragmas must be placed before the function body containing the switch statement Nested switch statements use the same switch method unless the nested switch is implemented in a separate function which is preceded by a different switch pragma Example place pragma before function body pragma jump switch void test unsigned char val function containing the switch switch val use jump table 1 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1 9 Functions 1 9 1 Parameter Passing A lot of execution time of an application is spent transferring parameters between functions The fastest parameter transport is via registers Therefore function parameters are first passed via registers If no more registers are available for a parameter t
336. mpiler nonstd using decl Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option nonstd using decl to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax nonstd using decl Default non standard using declarations are not allowed Description Allow a non member using declaration that specifies an unqualified name Related information J 5 118 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no parse templates Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no parse templates to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no parse templates Default parsing of nonclass templates is enabled Description Disable the parsing of nonclass templates in their generic form i e even if they are not really instantiated It is done by default if dependent name processing is enabled Related information d gt C compiler option no dep name Disable dependent name processing 5 119 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no pch messages Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the o
337. mpiler Options 0 teen e tee ee ened 5 59 5 3 Assembler Options i c0c 4dooveies bnew sede Vida bak a dite dee ead bebe 5 160 5 4 Linker OPptiONS siisi ieina erat Adela boa dee Sate ee So nda be eee 5 190 5 5 Control Program Options e i a teeta 5 230 5 6 Make Utility Options 0 eees 5 277 5 7 Librarian Options aeeordi urinae dee a E edge ated aE i tind ke doug alee 5 303 List File Formats 6 1 6 1 Assembler List File Format 2 0 02 sceas ccd wan deine oy fowl paca ee eee ey ea 6 1 6 2 Linker Map File Format 2 i04 ccc hihacegeneietitawebepelddawateteieberswd need h 6 3 Object File Formats 7 1 7 1 ELF DWARF Object Format 2 23 60 irera n ena nin Seed er dna neg EAR Ea ea E ba a bes 7 1 7 2 Motorola S Record Format 000s cece tee eee eee eens 7 2 7 3 Intel Hex Record Format sse 2c ce secs cue cee eee ene oe ee pee dee eee eee 7 5 Linker Script Language 8 1 8 1 INMOCUCTION aa meen dine rad cng seer ndalyadibedhiun tai E 8 1 8 2 Structure of a Linker Script File 0 0 cece eects 8 1 8 3 Syntax of the Linker Script Language 00 cece eect eee eens 8 3 8 3 1 PreProCeSSING 2 2 ccdindsen ches eked Gone ees ea ante alee ee dae a eR aoe ell ee td Saeed gies 8 3 8 3 2 Lexical SYMAX ss aon cca old amen it nee Sedu bed a Donan wae BG ee Bo eee 8 3 8 3 3 IGDGNUTENS Tis chit Gate tone vidi eee lov nea anne dodo Sha iat ae ane caeaned 8 4 8 3 4 EXPRESSIONS rne e E ce wae eaige conten nde uate eta
338. mple EXTERN AA CC DD defined elsewhere EXTERN AA DATA assembler checks for type Related information Gls GLOBAL Declare global section symbol 4 22 Assembly Language FOR ENDFOR Syntax label FOR var IN expression expression ENDFOR or label FOR var IN start TO end STEP step ENDFOR Description With the FOR ENDFOR directive you can repeat a sequence of assembly source lines with an iterator As shown by the syntax you can use the FOR ENDFOR in two ways 1 Inthe first mehod the loop is repeated as many times as the number of arguments following IN If you use the symbol var in the assembly lines between FOR and ENDFOR for each repetition the symbol var is substituted by a subsequent expression from the argument list If the argument is a null then the loop is repeated with each occurrence of the symbol var removed 2 Inthe second method the loop is repeated using the symbol var as a counter The counter passes all integer values from start to end with a step If you do not specify step the counter is increased by one for every repetition If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Example In the following example the loop is repeated 4 times there are four arguments With the DB directive you allocate and initialize a byte of memory for each repetition of the loop a word for the Dw directive Effectively th
339. n For bit fields it depends on the implementation whether a plain int is treated as signed int orunsigned int By default an int bit field is treated as unsigned int This offers the best performance With this option you tell the compiler to treat int bit fields as signed int In this case you can still add the keyword unsigned to treat a particular int bit field as unsigned Related information J 5 48 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler source s Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Merge C source code with assembly in output file src Command line syntax source S Description With this option you tell the compiler to merge C source code with generated assembly code in the output file The C source lines are included as comments Related information i 5 49 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler static Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option static to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax static Description With this option the compiler treats external definitions at file scope except for main as if they were declared static Asa result unused functions will be elim
340. n map file format map file formatting you can specify which parts of the map file you want to see Example part of linker map file FEI ICICI ICICI ICICI GIG ICI OIC kkk Too and Invocation ee oa ddd d e k A rnin aici aI ICC I E A e I R A E A RII IIR RI IA oo 9 95 5 5 5 5 55 5 tool TASKING MicroBlaze object linker vx yrz Build 033 path lt installation dir gt System Tasking cmb bin lkmb exe arguments hello obj o hello abs dmb 1s1 M mngs lcmba lfpmba Irtmba task task1 oo 9 9 5 55 5 55 55 FE ISIC III ICIS IIIS DIGI OIG EOI IEICE Used ReSOUT CES JOS da gdd andi k k k k k a ind c I IDSC I Ae E R E ICCC I ICICI RR IIIA Memory usage in bytes system xram 0x0 0x0029a 0x02806 0x7d560 0x80000 system xrom 0x01848 0x0015b 0x00104 Ox0e559 0x10000 Total 0x01848 0x003f5 0x0290a Ox8bab9 0x90000 Space Native used Rom Native used Ram Foreign used Reserved Free Rom Free Ram Total system sw main 0x019a3 0x0029a 0x0 0x0290a Ox0e559 0x7d560 0x90000 Sr er a ee Total 0x019a3 0x0029a Largest gap i j 0x0e557 0x7d560 Herren nnn nn nnn nnn nn nn ne nn nn nn Note When spaces share memory with each other some space can be consumed by sections located in other spaces In th
341. n C function types Related information i 5 83 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler implicit include Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Implicit inclusion of source files for finding templates Command line syntax implicit include Description Enable implicit inclusion of source files as a method of finding definitions of template entities to be instantiated Related information C compiler option instantiate Instantiation mode Section 2 6 4 mplicit Inclusion in chapter C Language 5 84 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler incl suffixes Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option incl suffixes to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax incl suffixes suffixes Default no extension and stdh Description Specifies the list of suffixes to be used when searching for an include file whose name was specified without a suffix If a null suffix is to be allowed it must be included in the suffix list suffixes is a colon separated list of suffixes e g stdh Example To allow only the suffixes h and stdh as include file extensions enter cpmb incl
342. n a wrap around Do not shift a negative number of bits or more bits than exist in the operand The shift count of the shift operation may be negative or greater than or equal to the size of the left operand According to the C standard the behavior of such a shift operation is undefined Make sure the shift count is in range by adding appropriate range checks Evaluate integer expressions in a larger size before comparing or assigning to that size If an integer expression is compared to or assigned to a larger integer size that integer expression should be evaluated in that larger size by explicitly casting one of the operands 9 5 Floating Point FLP FLP30 C FLP35 C FLP36 C Do not use floating point variables as loop counters To avoid problems with limited precision and rounding floating point variables should not be used as loop counters Take granularity into account when comparing floating point values Floating point arithmetic in C is inexact so floating point values should not be tested for exact equality or inequality Beware of precision loss when converting integral types to floating point Conversion from integral types to floating point types without sufficient precision can lead to loss of precision 9 6 Arrays ARR ARR01 C ARR34 C ARR35 C Do not apply the sizeof operator to a pointer when taking the size of an array A function parameter declared as an array is converted to a pointer by the com
343. n also set the default priority with the pragma init priority Values from 1 to 100 are for internal use only and should not be used Values 101 to 65535 are available for user code A lower number means a higher priority Example cpmb init priority 101 test cc Related information J 5 89 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler instantiate Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Select an instantiation mode in the Instantiation mode of external template entities box Command line syntax instantiate mode tmode You can specify the following modes used default all local Description Control instantiation of external template entities External template entities are external that is non inline and non static template functions and template static data members The instantiation mode determines the template entities for which code should be generated based on the template definition Normally when a file is compiled template entities are instantiated wherever they are used the linker will discard duplicate definitions The overall instantiation mode can however be changed with this option You can specify the following modes used Instantiate those template entities that were used in the compilation This will include all static data members for which there are templa
344. n is typically followed by a semicolon Do not conclude a single statement macro definition with a semicolon Macro definitions consisting of a single statement should not conclude with a semicolon If required the semicolon should be included following the macro expansion Inadvertently inserting a semicolon can change the control flow of the program 9 2 Declarations and Initialization DCL DCL30 C DCL31 C DCL32 C DCL35 C Declare objects with appropriate storage durations The lifetime of an automatic object ends when the function returns which means that a pointer to the object becomes invalid Declare identifiers before using them The ISO C90 standard allows implicit typing of variables and functions Because implicit declarations lead to less stringent type checking they can often introduce unexpected and erroneous behavior or even security vulnerabilities The ISO C99 standard requires type identifiers and forbids implicit function declarations For backwards compatibility reasons the VX toolset C compiler assumes an implicit declaration and continues translation after issuing a warning message W505 or W535 Guarantee that mutually visible identifiers are unique The compiler encountered two or more identifiers that are identical in the first 31 characters The ISO C99 standard allows a compiler to ignore characters past the first 31 in an identifier Two distinct identifiers that are identical in the first 31 characte
345. n units but at the cost of requiring the use of one of the template instantiation mechanisms even for programs that don t use templates Definitions of extern inline functions can be provided either through use of the automatic instantiation mechanism or by use of the instantiate used or instantiate all instantiation modes There is no mechanism to manually control the definition of extern inline function bodies 2 9 Pragmas to Control the C Compiler Pragmas are keywords in the C source that control the behavior of the compiler Pragmas overrule compiler options The syntax is pragma pragma spec The C compiler supports the following pragmas and all C compiler pragmas that are described in section 1 5 Pragmas to Control the Compiler instantiate do_not_instantiate can_instantiate These are template instantiation pragmas They are described in detail in section 2 6 3 nstantiation pragma Directives hdrstop no_pch These are precompiled header pragmas They are described in detail in section 2 11 Precompiled Headers once When placed at the beginning of a header file indicates that the file is written in such a way that including it several times has the same effect as including it once Thus if the C compiler sees pragma once at the start of a header file it will skip over it if the file is included again A typical idiom is to place an ifndef guard around the body of the file with a define of the guard v
346. n when these names are declared extern C E g extern C void f int namespace N extern C void f Warning not error in g mode int main 1 This example is accepted by the C compiler but it will emit two conflicting declarations for the function When a using directive lookup encounters more than one extern C declaration created when more than one namespace declares an extern C function of a given name as described above only the first declaration encountered is considered for the lookup extern C int f void extern C int g void namespace N extern C int f void same type extern C void g void different type he using namespace N int i calls f int j g calls f The definition of a member of a class template that appears outside of the class definition may declare a nontype template parameter with a type that is different than the type used in the definition of the class template A warning is issued GNU version 30300 and below template lt int I gt struct A void f template lt unsigned int I gt void A lt I gt f A class template may be redeclared with a nontype template parameter that has a type that is different than the type used in the earlier declaration A warning is issued template lt int I gt class A template lt unsigned int I gt class A 2 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference
347. n you tell the make utility to perform its tasks without printing the commands it executes Error messages are normally printed Example tmk s The make utility rebuilds your files but does not print the commands it executes during the make process Related information d Make utility option n Perform a dry run 5 297 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility t Command line syntax t Description With this option you tell the make utility to touch the target files bringing them up to date rather than performing the rules to rebuild them Example tmk t The make utility updates out of date files by giving them a new date and time stamp The files are not actually rebuild Related information J 5 298 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility time Command line syntax time Description With this option you tell the make utility to display the current date and time on standard output Example tmk time The make utility displays the current date and time and updates out of date files Related information i 5 299 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility V Command line syntax V Description Display version information The make utility ignores all other options or input files Example tmk V The make utility displays the version information but does not perform any tasks Related information i 5 300 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility
348. nation E282 unterminated comment Make sure that every comment starting with has a matching Nested comments are not possible To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file cerrors html1 use redirection and enter cmb diag html all gt cerrors html Related information dE C compiler option cert Enable individual CERT checks 5 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler error file Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the compiler redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file will be named after the input file with extension err Example To write errors to errors err instead of stderr enter cmb error file errors err test c Related information ie 5 12 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler extern sdata Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Enable the option Enable allocation in sdata 4 Specify a size for Allocation in sdata for objects smaller than threshold default 4 5 Enable the option Assume external data objects will also be placed in sdata Command line syntax extern sdata Description With this option you tell the compiler to use small data addressing for external data as well as for symbols defined in the
349. nce of characters not starting with n r or t DOSTRING STRING double quoted string OCT_NUM octal number starting with a zero 06 045 DEC_NUM decimal number not starting with a zero 14 1024 HEX NUM hexadecimal number starting with Ox 0x0023 OxFFOO OCT_NUM DEC_NUM and HEX_NUM can be followed by a k kilo M mega or G giga Characters in bold are characters that occur literally Words in italics are higher order terms that are defined in the same or in one of the other sections To write comments in LSL file you can use the C style or C style MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 3 3 Identifiers arch_name IDENTIFIER bus_name IDENTIFIER core_name IDENTIFIER derivative_name IDENTIFIER file name DQSTRING group_name IDENTIFIER mem_name IDENTIFIER proc_name IDENTIFIER section_name DQSTRING space_name IDENTIFIER stack_name section_name symbol_name DOSTRING 8 3 4 Expressions The expressions and operators in this section work the same as in ISO C number OCT_NUM DEC_NUM HEX NUM expr number symbol_name unary _op expr expr binary_op expr expr expr expr expr function_call unary_op r logical NOT a bitwise complement negative value gt binary_op exclusive OR multiplication nN division modulus addition subtraction gt gt right shift
350. nd dest statements e Each map_descr can occur only once e You can define multiple mappings from a single source e Overlap between source ranges or destination ranges is not allowed e Ifthe src_dbits or dest_dbits statement is not present its value defaults to the width value if the source destination is a bus and to the mau size otherwise destination space space name bus lt proc_name core_name gt 0 1 bus name e Aspace_name refers to a defined address space e Aproc_name refers to a defined processor e Acore_name refers to a defined core e Abus_name refers to a defined bus e The following mappings are allowed source to destination space gt space space gt bus bus gt bus memory gt bus range expr ee expr e With address ranges the end address is not part of the range 8 3 8 Architecture Definition architecture_definition architecture arch _name lt parameter list gt 9 1 lt extends arch_name lt argument_list gt 1 gt 0 1 arch_spec 9 e Anarchitecture_definition defines a core architecture with the given arch_name as a unique name e Atleast one space_def and at least one bus_def have to be present in an architecture_definition e Anarchitecture_definition that uses the extends construct defines an architecture that inherits all elements of the architecture defined by the second arch_name The parent architecture must be defined in the LSL file as well paramet
351. nd enter a definition Then click an empty cell to confirm Command line syntax define macro_name macro_definition Dmacro_name macro_definition Description With this option you can define a macro and specify it to the preprocessor If you only specify a macro name no macro definition the macro expands as 1 You can specify as many macros as you like On the command line you can use the option define D multiple times If the command line exceeds the length limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the compiler with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the C source is for example useful to compile conditional C source as shown in the example below Example Consider the following C program with conditional code to compile a demo program and a real program void main void if DEMO demo_func compile for the demo program else real func compile for the real program endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag Macro Value DEMO 1 or empty On the command line use the option as follows cmb define DEMO test c cmb define DEMO 1 test c Note that both invocations have the same effect The next example shows how to specify a macro with arguments Macro definitions follow exactly the same rules as the define statement in the C language Macro V
352. nd passes it as such Example ccmb no default libraries test c The control program does not specify any libraries to the linker In normal cases this would result in unresoved externals To specify your own libraries libmy a and avoid unresolved externals comb no default libraries lmy test c Related information d gt Linker option library I Add library 5 260 Tool Options Control Program Control Program no double F Command line syntax no double F Description With this option you tell the compiler to treat variables of the type double as float Because the float type takes less space execution speed increases and code size decreases both at the cost of less precision Related information do 5 261 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program no map file Command line syntax no map file Description By default the control program tells the linker to generate a linker map file A linker map file is a text file that shows how the linker has mapped the sections and symbols from the various object files obj to the linked object file A locate part shows the absolute position of each section External symbols are listed per space with their absolute address both sorted on symbol and sorted on address With this option you prevent the generation of a map file Related information i 5 262 Tool Options Control Program Control Program no preprocessing
353. nds accesses null pointers and uninitialized automatic pointer variables This check will increase the code size and slow down the program considerably In addition some heap memory is allocated to store the bounds information You may enable bounds checking for individual modules or even parts of modules only see pragma runtime Report unhandled case in a switch Report an unhandled case value in a switch without a default part This check will add one function call to every switch without a default part but it will have little impact on the excution speed Malloc consistency checks This option enables the use of wrappers around the functions malloc realloc free that will check for common dynamic memory allocation errors like e buffer overflow e write to freed memory e multiple calls to free e passing invalid pointer to free Enabling this check will extract some additional code from the library but it will not enlarge your application code The dynamic memory usage will increase by a couple of bytes per allocation Related information i 5 46 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler sdata Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Enable the option Enable allocation in sdata 4 Specify a size for Allocation in sdata for objects smaller than threshold default 4 Command line syntax
354. ne a section you must always specify the section name The names have a special meaning to the locating process and have to start with a predefined name optionally extended by a dot and a user defined name The predefined section name also determines the type of the section code data or debug Optionally you can specify one or more attributes You can use the following predefined section names Section Name Description Section Type text Code sections code data Initialized data data sdata Initialized data in read write small data area data bss Uninitialized data cleared data sbss Uninitialized data in read write small data area cleared data rodata ROM data constants data debug Debug sections debug Table 4 4 Predefined section names Sections of a specified type are located by the linker in a memory space The space names are defined in a so called linker script file files with the extension 1s1 delivered with the product in the directory Program Files Altium Designer System Tasking include 1sl You can specify the following section attributes Attribute Description Allowed on align expression Align sections to the specified value text data sdata bss sbss rodata at address Locate the section at the specified address text data sdata bss sbss rodata clear Clear the DATA section at program startup default for bs
355. needed The option Generate Debug information g or debug does not affect profiling execution time or code size aN The control program automatically specifies the corresponding profiling libraries to the linker Example To generate block count information for the module test c during execution compile as follows ccmb profile block test c In this case the library pbmba Lib is linked 5 269 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Related information db Chapter 4 Profiling in the user s manual 5 270 Tool Options Control Program Control Program show c warnings Command line syntax show c warnings Description The C compiler may generate a compiled C file ic that causes warnings during compilation or assembling With this option you tell the control program to show these warnings By default warnings in C generated files are suppressed Related information J 5 271 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program static Command line syntax static Description This option is directly passed to the compiler With this option the compiler treats external definitions at file scope except for main as if they were declared static Asa result unused functions will be eliminated and the alias checking algorithm assumes that objects with static storage cannot be referenced from functions outside the current module This option only makes sense when you specify all
356. ng includes the character in the set Literal no assignment is done Table 3 3 Scanf conversion characters stdio h wchar h Description fscanf stream fwscanf stream Performs a formatted read from the given stream Returns the number of format format items converted succesfully FSS implementation scanf format wscanf format Performs a formatted read from the stdin stream Returns the number sscanf s format vfscanf stream format arg vscanf format arg vsscanf s format arg fprintf stream format printf format sprintf s format snprintf s n format vfprintf stream format arg vprintf format arg vsprintf s format arg swscanf s format vfwscanf stream format arg vwscanf format arg vswscanf s format arg fwprintf stream format wprintf format swprintf s n format vfwprintf stream format arg vwprintf format arg vswprintf s format arg of items converted succesfully FSS implementation Performs a formatted read from the string s Returns the number of items converted succesfully Same as fscanf fwscanf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h Same as scanf wscanf but extra arguments are given as variable ar gument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h Same as scanf wscanf but extra argument
357. ngs as errors Treat warnings as errors 5 36 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Select an optimization level in the Optimization level box 4 If you select Custom Optimization enable or disable the optimizations you want 5 In addition in the Size speed trade off field select a level between fully optimize for size or fully optimize for speed Command line syntax optimize flags Offlags Use the following options for predefined sets of flags optimize 0 O0 No optimization Alias for OaBCEFGIKLOPRSY optimize 1 O1 Few optimizations Alias for OabcefgIKLOPRSy optimize 2 O2 Medium optimization default Alias for Oabcefglkloprsy optimize 3 O3 Full optimization Alias for Oabcefgikloprsy You can enable the following individual optimizations coalesce a A Coalescer remove unnecessary moves ipro b B Interprocedural Register Optimization cse c C Common subexpression elimination CSE expression e E Expression simplification flow f F Control flow simplification optimization and code reordering glo g G Generic assembly code optimizations inline i I Function inlining schedule k K Instruction scheduler loop I L Loop transformations forward 0 0 Forward st
358. ns When you define a group that is both ordered and contiguous this is called a sequential group In a sequential group the linker places sections in the same order in the address space as they appear in the group and it occupies a contiguous range of memory e The clustered keyword tells the linker to locate the sections in the group in a number of contiguous blocks It tries to keep the number of these blocks to a minimum If enough memory is available the group will be located as if it was specified as contiguous Otherwise it gets split into two or more blocks If a contiguous or clustered group contains alignment gaps the linker can locate sections that are not part of the group in these gaps To prevent this you can use the 111 keyword If the group is located in RAM the gaps are treated as reserved scratch space If the group is located in ROM the alignment gaps are filled with zeros by default You can however change the fill pattern by specifying a bit pattern The result of the expression or list of expressions is used as values to write to memory each in MAU e The overlay keyword tells the linker to overlay the sections in the group The linker places all sections in the address space using a contiguous range of addresses Thus an overlay group is automatically also a contiguous group To overlay the sections all sections in the overlay group share the same run time address For each input section within the overlay the l
359. ns you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas With this option the linker does not link locate any files Example To display an explanation of message number 106 enter lkmb diag 106 This results in the following message and explanation E106 unresolved external lt message gt The linker could not resolve all external symbols This is an error when the incremental linking option is disabled The lt message gt indicates the symbol that is unresolved To write an explanation of all errors and warnings in HTML format to file Lerrors htm1 enter lkmb diag html all gt lerrors html Related information J 5 194 Tool Options Linker Linker error file Menu entry Command line syntax error file file Description With this option the linker redirects error messages to a file If you do not specify a filename the error file is 1kmb e1k Example To write errors to errors elk instead of stderr enter lkmb error file errors elk test obj Related information ie 5 195 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker error limit Menu entry Command line syntax error limit number Description With this option you tell the linker to only emit the specified maximum number of errors Wh
360. nstantiation at link time For cases where you want more explicit control over instantiation the C compiler also provides instantiation modes and instantiation pragmas which can be used to exert fine grained control over the instantiation process 2 6 1 Automatic Instantiation The goal of an automatic instantiation mode is to provide painless instantiation You should be able to compile source files to object code then link them and run the resulting program and never have to worry about how the necessary instantiations get done In practice this is hard for a compiler to do and different compilers use different automatic instantiation schemes with different strengths and weaknesses 1 Since templates are descriptions of entities typically classes that are parameterizable according to the types they operate upon they are sometimes called parameterized types 2 14 C Language e AT amp T USL Novell s cfront product saves information about each file it compiles in a special directory called ptrepository It instantiates nothing during normal compilations At link time it looks for entities that are referenced but not defined and whose mangled names indicate that they are template entities For each such entity it consults the ptrepository information to find the file containing the source for the entity and it does a compilation of the source to generate an object file containing object code for that entity This object code f
361. nt name processing is enabled by either a configuration flag or command line option Dependent Name Processing When doing dependent name lookup the C compiler implements the instantiation name lookup rules specified in the standard This processing requires that non class prototype instantiations be done This in turn requires that the code be written using the typename and template keywords as required by the standard Lookup Using the Referencing Context When not using dependent name lookup the C compiler uses a name lookup algorithm that approximates the two phase lookup rule of the standard but does so in such a way that is more compatible with existing code and existing compilers When a name is looked up as part of a template instantiation but is not found in the local context of the instantiation it is looked up in a synthesized instantiation context that includes both names from the context of the template definition and names from the context of the instantiation Here s an example namespace N int g int int x 0 template lt class T gt struct A T f T t return g t T return x hi namespace M int x 99 double g double N A lt int gt ai int i ai f 0 Nz A lt int gt f int calls N g int int i2 ai f Nz A lt int gt f returns 0 N x N A lt double gt ad double d ad f 0 N A lt double gt f double calls M g double double d2 ad f
362. nt library contents 5 307 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Librarian p Command line syntax p Description Print the specified object module s in the library to standard output This option is only useful when you redirect or pipe the output to other files or tools that serve your own purposes Normally you do not need this option Example tlb p mylib lib objl obj gt file obj The librarian prints the file obj1 obj to standard output where it is redirected to the file ile obj The effect of this example is very similar to extracting a file from the library but in this case the extracted file gets another name Related information i 5 308 Tool Options Librarian Librarian r Command line syntax r a posname b posname c u v Description You can use the option r for several purposes e Adding new objects to the library e Replacing objects in the library with the same object of a newer date e Creating a new library The option r normally adds a new module to the library However if the library already contains a module with the specified name the existing module is replaced If you specify a library that does not exist the librarian creates a new library with the specified name If you add a module to the library without specifying the suboption a or b the specified module is added at the end of the archive Use the suboptions a or b to insert them to a specified plac
363. ntaining larger space In this example a small space of 64k is mapped on a large space of 16M space small id 2 mau 4 map src_offset 0 dest_offset 0 dest space large size 64k From space to bus All spaces that are not mapped to another space must map to a bus in the architecture space large id 1 mau 4 map src_offset 0 dest_offset 0 dest bus bus_name size 16M From bus to bus The next example maps an external bus called e_bus to an internal bus called i_bus This internal bus resides on a core called mycore The source bus has 16 data lines whereas the destination bus has only 8 data lines Therefore the keywords src_dbits and dest_dbits specify which source data lines are mapped on which destination data lines architecture mycore bus i_bus mau 4 space i_space map dest bus i bus size 256 bus e_bus mau 16 width 16 map dest bus mycore i_ bus srce_dbits 0 7 dest_dbits 0 7 It is not possible to map an internal bus to an external bus 8 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 6 Semantics of the Derivative Definition Keywords in the derivative definition derivative extends core architecture bus mau width map memory type reserved rom ram nvram mau size speed 171 map section_layout section_setup map dest bus space dest_dbits dest_offset size src_dbits srce_offset 8 6 1 Defining a Derivat
364. ntrol A violation is reported when the loop initialization or loop update expression modifies an object that is not referenced in the loop test Numeric variables being used within a for loop for iteration counting shall not be modified in the body of the loop Boolean operations whose results are invariant shall not be permitted There shall be no unreachable code All non null statements shall either a have at least one side effect however executed or b cause control flow to change Before preprocessing a null statement shall only occur on a line by itself it may be followed by a comment provided that the first character following the null statement is a white space character The goto statement shall not be used The continue statement shall not be used For any iteration statement there shall be at most one break statement used for loop termination A function shall have a single point of exit at the end of the function The statement forming the body of a switch while do while or for statement be a compound statement An if expression construct shall be followed by a compound statement The else keyword shall be followed by either a compound statement or another if statement Allif else if constructs shall be terminated with an else clause Switch statements 10 8 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 3333 2 A switch label shall only be used when the most closely enclosing compound statement is the b
365. ntry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no explicit to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no explicit Default the explicit specifier is allowed Description Disable support for the explicit specifier on constructor declarations Related information f 5 110 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no export Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no export to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no export Default exported templates declared with the keyword export are allowed Description Disable recognition of exported templates This option requires that dependent name processing be done and cannot be used with implicit inclusion of template definitions Related information d gt Section 2 6 5 Exported Templates in chapter C Language 5 111 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no extern inline Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no extern inline to the Additional C compiler options field Comm
366. nversions such as conversion from T toT const const are allowed e Digraphs are recognized e Operator keywords e g not and bitand etc are recognized e Static data member declarations can be used to declare member constants e When option wchar_t keyword is set wchar_t is recognized as a keyword and a distinct type e bool is recognized e RTTI run time type identification including dynamic_cast and the typeid operator is implemented e Declarations in tested conditions in if switch for and while statements are supported e Array new and delete are implemented e New style casts static_cast reinterpret_cast and const_cast are implemented e Definition of a nested class outside its enclosing class is allowed e mutable is accepted on non static data member declarations e Namespaces are implemented including using declarations and directives Access declarations are broadened to match the corresponding using declarations e Explicit instantiation of templates is implemented e The typename keyword is recognized e explicit is accepted to declare non converting constructors e The scope of a variable declared in the for init statement of a for loop is the scope of the loop not the surrounding scope e Member templates are implemented e The new specialization syntax using template lt gt is implemented e Cv qualifiers are retained on rvalues in particular on function return values e The
367. nversions which may result in information loss 44 A Redundant explicit casts should not be used 45 R Type casting from any type to or from pointers shall not be used 46 R The value of an expression shall be evaluation order independent This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that a violation will be reported when a possible alias may cause the result of an expression to be evaluation order dependent 47 A No dependence should be placed on operator precedence rules 48 A Mixed arithmetic should use explicit casting 49 A Tests of a non Boolean value against 0 should be made explicit 50 R F P variables shall not be tested for exact equality or inequality 51 A Constant unsigned integer expressions should not wrap around 52 R There shall be no unreachable code 53 R All non null statements shall have a side effect 54 R Anull statement shall only occur on a line by itself 55 A Labels should not be used 56 R The goto statement shall not be used 57 R The continue statement shall not be used 58 R The break statement shall not be used except in a switch 59 R An if or loop body shall always be enclosed in braces 60 A All if else if constructs should contain a final else 61 R Every non empty case clause shall be terminated with a break 62 R All switch statements should contain a final default case 10 2 MISRA C
368. o arguments are accepted as in C99 A trailing comma in the definition of an enumeration type is silently accepted a feature carried over from C99 enum E e 2 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e Ifthe command line option long long is specified the type long long is accepted Unsuffixed integer literals that cannot be represented by type long but could potentially be represented by type unsigned long have type long long instead this matches C99 but not the treatment of the long long extension in C89 or default C mode e The keyword typename followed by a qualified id can appear outside a template declaration struct S struct N typename S N p Silently accepted in C 0x mode 2 3 3 Anachronisms Accepted The following anachronisms are accepted when anachronisms are enabled with anachronisms e overload is allowed in function declarations It is accepted and ignored e Definitions are not required for static data members that can be initialized using default initialization The anachronism does not apply to static data members of template classes they must always be defined e The number of elements in an array may be specified in an array delete operation The value is ignored e A single operator and operator function can be used to overload both prefix and postfix operations e The base class name may be omitted in a base class initializer if there is only one immediate base class
369. o measure the time spent in a function This includes the time spent in all sub functions callees Static profiling With this option you do not need to run the application to get profiling results The compiler generates profiling information at compile time AN If you use the profiling option you must link the corresponding libraries too Refer to Section 6 4 Linking with Libraries in Chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual for an overview of the profiling libraries When you use Altium Designer automatically the correct libraries are linked Example To generate block count information for the module test c during execution compile as follows cmb profile block test c In this case you must link the library pbmba 1ib Related information d gt Chapter 4 Profiling in the user s manual 5 43 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler rename sections R Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option rename sections to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax rename sections name suffix f m fm R name suffix f m fm Description In case a module must be loaded at a fixed address or a data section needs a special place in memory you can use this option to generate different section names You can then use this unique sect
370. o not wait for information the channel may not provide data Returns true if valid data was read from the specified channel otherwise false _ putfsl _Bool volatile _ putfsl unsigned char channel unsigned int data _Bool wait Write data words to a specified fast simplex link fsl channel Channel must be a constant value in the range 0 7 The data to write must be stored in data With the boolean wait you can choose whether or not to wait for information True means wait for information false means do not wait for information the channel may not accept data Returns true if valid data was written to the specified channel otherwise false C Language __getfsr unsigned int volatile _ getfsr void Get the value of the floating point state register FSR Returns the value of the floating point state register FSR __putfsr void volatile _ putfsr unsigned int value Set the value of the floating point state register FSR to value Returns nothing __cgetfsl _Bool volatile _ cgetfsl unsigned char channel unsigned int ctrl _Bool wait Read control words from a specified fast simplex link fsl channel Returns true if valid data was read from the specified channel otherwise false __cputfs _Bool volatile _ cputfsl unsigned char channel unsigned int ctrl _Bool wait Write control words to a specified fast simplex link fsl channel Returns true if valid data was read from the specif
371. ody of a switch statement An unconditional break statement shall terminate every non empty switch clause The final clause of a switch statement shall be the default clause A switch expression shall not represent a value that is effectively Boolean Every switch statement shall have at least one case clause MISRA C Rules Functions 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 3 aoaaa a D D 2 gt 2 R R Functions shall not be defined with variable numbers of arguments Functions shall not call themselves either directly or indirectly A violation will be reported for direct or indirect recursive function calls in the source file being checked Recursion via functions in other source files or recursion via function pointers is not detected Identifiers shall be given for all of the parameters in a function prototype declaration The identifiers used in the declaration and definition of a function shall be identical Functions with no parameters shall be declared with parameter type void The number of arguments passed to a function shall match the number of parameters A pointer parameter in a function prototype should be declared as pointer to const if the pointer is not used to modify the addressed object All exit paths from a function with non void return type shall have an explicit return statement with an expression A function identifier shall only be used with either a prec
372. of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When atext line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines DDEMO 1 test c Specify the option file to the control program ccmb option file myoptions This is equivalent to the following command line ccmb DDEMO 1 test c Related information i 5 265 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program output o Command line syntax output file 0 file Description Default the control program generates a file with the same basename as the first specified input file With this option you specify another name for the resulting absolute object file Example ccmb test c prog c The contro
373. ogram warnings as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors number number Description If one of the tools encounters an error it stops processing the file s With this option you tell the tools to treat warnings as errors or treat specific control program warning messages as errors e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are treated as errors e If you specify this option with a number only the specified control program warning is treated as an error You can specify the option warnings as errors number multiple times Use one of the pass foo options to pass this option directly to a tool when a specific warning for that tool must be treated as an error For example use pass c warnings as errors number to treat a specific C compiler warning as an error Related information Control program option no warnings Suppress all warnings Control program option pass Pass option to tool 5 276 Tool Options Make Utility 5 6 Make Utility Options When you build a project in Altium Designer Altium Designer generates a makefile and uses the make utility tmk to build all your files However you can also use the make utility directly from the command line to build your project The invocation syntax is tmk option target macro def This section describes all options for the make utility The make utility is a command line tool so there are no equivalent options in Alt
374. om text No smoking long long _ sdata k 1234 The __sfr keyword lets you define a variable as a special function register Though special function registers are not available for the MicroBlaze the compiler accepts the __sfr keyword as a qualifier for compatibility reasons Variables declared with __sfr have some special characteristics Because special function registers are dealing with I O it is incorrect to optimize away the access to them Therefore the compiler deals with __sfr variables as if they were declared with the volatile qualifier Non initialized global __sfr variables are not cleared at startup For example _ sfr int i global _ sfr variable not cleared It is not allowed to initialize global ___sfr variables and they are not initialized at startup For example __sfr int j 10 not allowed to initialize global _ sfr variable 1 3 1 Placing an Object at an Absolute Address __at Just like you can declare a variable in a specific part of memory using memory type qualifiers you can also place an object at an absolute address in memory With the attribute __at you can specify an absolute address Examples unsigned char Display 80 24 at 0x2000 The array Display is placed at address 0x2000 In the generated assembly an absolute section is created On this position space is reserved for the variable Display int i _ at 0x1000 1 The variable i is placed at address 0x1000 and is in
375. on This method allows most programs written using the cfront convention to be compiled with our approach See section 2 6 4 Implicit Inclusion e The ad hoc approach you make sure that the files that define template entities also have the definitions of all the available types and add code or pragmas in those files to request instantiation of the entities there Exported templates are also supported by our automatic instantiation method but they require additional mechanisms explained further on The automatic instantiation mode is enabled by default It can be turned off by the command line option no auto instantiation If automatic instantiation is turned off the extra information about template entities that could be instantiated in a file is not put into the object file 2 6 2 Instantiation Modes Normally when a file is compiled template entities are instantiated everywhere where they are used The overall instantiation mode can however be changed by a command line option instantiate used Instantiate those template entities that were used in the compilation This will include all static data members for which there are template definitions This is the default 2 The actual implementation allows for several different suffixes and provides a command line option to change the suffixes sought 3 Isn t this always the case No Suppose that file A contains a definition of class x and a reference to Stack lt xX gt push and th
376. on and the assembly language vii MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Short Table of Contents Chapter 1 C Language The TASKING C compilers are fully compatible with ISO C This chapter describes the specific target features of the C language including language extensions that are not standard in ISO C For example pragmas are a way to control the compiler from within the C source The following language extensions are described e Data types e Keywords e Function qualifiers e Intrinsic functions e Pragmas e Predefined macros Chapter 2 C Language Describes the C language implementation The C language itself is not described Chapter 3 Libraries Contains overviews of all library functions you can use in your C source First libraries are listed per header file that contains the prototypes These tables also show the level of implementation per function Second all library functions are listed and discussed into detail Chapter 4 Assembly Language Describes the specific features of the assembly language as well as directives which are pseudo instructions that are interpreted by the assembler Chapter 5 Tool Options Contains a description of all tool options e C compiler options e C compiler options e Assembler options e Linker options e Control program options e Make utility options e Librarian options Chapter 6 List File Formats Contains a description of the following list file
377. on character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Length specifier and length modifier are optional the conversion character is not The conversion character must be one of the following if a character following is not in the list the behavior is undefined Character Scanned as d int signed decimal i int the integer may be given octal i e a leading 0 is entered or hexadecimal leading 0x or 0X or just decimal int unsigned octal int unsigned decimal int unsigned hexadecimal in lowercase or uppercase single character converted to unsigned char on Oo xX O char a string of non white space characters The argument should point to an array of characters large enough to hold the string and a terminating NULL character 3 14 Libraries Character Scanned as f float e E float g G float a A float n int the number of characters written so far is written into the argument No scanning is done p pointer hexadecimal 24 bit value which must be entered without Ox prefix Matches a string of input characters from the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to termi nate the string Specifying includes the character in the set of scanning characters m Matches a string of input characters not in the set between the brackets A NULL character is added to termi nate the string Specifyi
378. only Command line syntax no preprocessing only Description On the command line the control program stops after preprocessing If you also want to compile the C source you can specify the option no preprocessing only In this case the control program calls the compiler twice once with option preprocess and once for a regular compilation Related information db Control program option preprocess E 5 263 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program no warnings w Command line syntax no warnings number number w number number Description With this option you can suppress all warning messages or specific C compiler warning messages e If you do not specify this option all warnings are reported e If you specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number or a range only the specified C compiler warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Related information ie 5 264 Tool Options Control Program Control Program option file f Command line syntax option file file f file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the control program Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits
379. ons shall not be used Preprocessing directives 19 1 19 2 x 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 19 8 jae e ee 2 include statements in a file should only be preceded by other preprocessor directives or comments Non standard characters should not occur in header file names in include directives The include directive shall be followed by either a lt filename gt or filename sequence C macros shall only expand to a braced initializer a constant a parenthesized expression a type qualifier a storage class specifier or a do while zero construct Macros shall not be define d or undef d within a block undef shall not be used A function should be used in preference to a function like macro A function like macro shall not be invoked without all of its arguments 10 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 19 9 R 19 10 R 19 11 R 19 12 R 19 13 A 19 14 R 19 15 R 19 16 R 19 17 R Standard libraries 20 1 R 20 2 R x 20 3 R 20 4 R 20 5 R 20 6 R 20 7 R 20 8 R 20 9 R 20 10 R 20 11 R 20 12 R Run time failures x 10 10 21 1 R Arguments to a function like macro shall not contain tokens that look like preprocessing directives A violation is reported when the first token of an actual macro argument is In the definition of a function like macro each instance of a parameter shall be enclosed in parentheses unless it is used as the operand of
380. ons that are unusable because of nondeductible template parameters are accepted and ignored template lt class T gt struct A class C template lt class T gt struct B enum e 1 template lt class T gt struct B lt typename A lt T gt C gt enum e 2 int main int argc char argv printf d n B lt int gt e printf d n B lt A lt int gt C gt e e Template parameters that are not used in the signature of a function template are not ignored for partial ordering purposes i e the resolution of core language issue 214 is not implemented when gnu_version is lt 40100 template lt class S class T gt void f T t template lt class T gt void f T t int main f lt int gt 3 not ambiguous when gnu_version is lt 40100 e Prototype instantiations of functions are deferred until the first actual instantiation of the function to allow the compilation of programs that contain definitions of unusable function templates gnu_version 30400 and above The example below is accepted when prototype instantiations are deferred class A template lt class T gt struct B B error no initializer for reference member B lt T gt a A amp a hi e When doing nonclass prototype instantiations e g gnu_version 30400 and above the severity of the diagnostic issued if a const template static data member is defined without an initializer is reduced to a warning template lt
381. onversions 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 R The value of an expression of integer type shall not be implicitly converted to a different underlying type if a it is not a conversion to a wider integer type of the same signedness or b the expression is complex or c the expression is not constant and is a function argument or d the expression is not constant and is a return expression The value of an expression of floating type shall not be implicitly converted to a different type if a it is not a conversion to a wider floating type or b the expression is complex or c the expression is a function argument or d the expression is a return expression The value of a complex expression of integer type may only be cast to a type that is narrower and of the same signedness as the underlying type of the expression The value of a complex expression of floating type may only be cast to a narrower floating type If the bitwise operators and lt lt are applied to an operand of underlying type unsigned char or unsigned short the result shall be immediately cast to the underlying type of the operand A U suffix shall be applied to all constants of unsigned type Pointer type conversions 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 Expressions 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 R R DES A R 333 2 Conversions shall not be performed between a pointer to a function and any t
382. or copying overlay sections at appropriate moment from its load time location to its run time location this is typically done by the startup code The run_addr keyword defines the run time address If the run time location of a group is set explicitly the given order between groups specify whether the run time address propagates to the parent group or not The location of the sections a group can be restricted either to a single absolute address or to a number of address ranges not including the end address With an expression you can specify that the group should be located at the absolute address specified by the expression group run_addr 0xa00f0000 You can use the offset variant to locate the group at the given absolute offset in memory group run_addr mem A 0x1000 A range can be an absolute space address range written as expr expr acomplete memory device written as mem mem_name Or a memory address range mem mem name expr expr group run_addr mem my dram You can use the to specify an address range of more than one physical memory device group run_addr mem A mem B The load_addr keyword changes the meaning of the section selection in the group the linker selects the load time ROM copy of the named section s instead of the regular sections Just like run_addr you can specify an absolute address or an address range The load_addr keyword itself without an assignment specifies that the
383. or instantiated objects is then combined with the normal object code in the link step If you are using cfront you must follow a particular coding convention all templates must be declared in h files and for each such file there must be a corresponding cc file containing the associated definitions The compiler is never told about the cc files explicitly one does not for example compile them in the normal way The link step looks for them when and if it needs them and does so by taking the h filename and replacing its suffix 2 This scheme has the disadvantage that it does a separate compilation for each instantiated function or at best one compilation for all the member functions of one class Even though the function itself is often quite small it must be compiled along with the declarations for the types on which the instantiation is based and those declarations can easily run into many thousands of lines For large systems these compilations can take a very long time The link step tries to be smart about recompiling instantiations only when necessary but because it keeps no fine grained dependency information it is often forced to recompile the world for a minor change in a h file In addition cfront has no way of ensuring that preprocessing symbols are set correctly when it does these instantiation compilations if preprocessing symbols are set other than on the command line e Borland s C compiler instantiates ev
384. order in the address space for sections in the group and 3 restrict the possible addresses for the sections in a group The linker creates labels that allow you to refer to the begin and end address of a group from within the application software Labels _le_gb_group_name and _1le_ge_group_name mark the begin and end of the group respectively where the begin is the lowest address used within this group and the end is the highest address used Notice that a group not necessarily occupies all memory between begin and end address The given label refers to where the section is located at run time versus load time 1 Assign properties to the group like alignment and read write attributes These properties are assigned to all sections in the group and subgroups and override the attributes of the input sections e The align field tells the linker to align all sections in the group and the group as a whole according to the align value By default the linker uses the largest alignment constraint of either the input sections or the alignment of the address space e The attributes field tells the linker to assign one or more attributes to all sections in the group This overrules the default attributes By default the linker uses the attributes of the input sections You can set the r wor rw attributes and you can switch between the b and s attributes e The copy field tells the linker to locate a read only section in RAM and generate a ROM copy and a copy
385. ore propagate p P Constant propagation compact r R Code compaction reverse inlining subscript s S Subscript strength reduction peephole y Y Peephole optimizations For an extensive description of these optimizations please refer to section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual Description The TASKING C compilers offer four optimization levels and a custom level at each level a specific set of optimizations is enabled e No optimization O0 No optimizations are performed except for the coalescer to allow better debug information The compiler tries to achieve a 1 to 1 resemblance between source code and produced code Expressions are evaluated in the order written in the source code associative and commutative properties are not used e Few optimizations O1 Enables optimizations that do not affect the debug ability of the source code Use this level when you encounter problems during debugging your source code with optimization level 2 e Medium optimization O2 Enables more optimizations to reduce code size and or execution time This is the default optimization level 5 37 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e Full optimization O3 This is the highest optimization level Use this level to decrease execution time to meet your real time requirements e Custom optimization 0Ox X you can enable disable specific optimizations With these options y
386. orting a class template is equivalent to exporting each of its static data members and each of its non inline member functions An exported template is special because its definition does not need to be present in a translation unit that uses that template In other words the definition of an exported non class template does not need to be explicitly or implicitly included in a translation unit that instantiates that template For example the following is a valid C program consisting of two separate translation units File 1 include lt stdio h gt static void trace printf File 1 n export template lt class T gt T const amp min T const amp T const amp int main trace return min 2 3 File 2 include lt stdio h gt static void trace printf File 2 n export template lt class T gt T const amp min T const amp a T const amp b trace return a lt b a b Note that these two files are separate translation units one is not included in the other That allows the two functions trace to coexist with internal linkage Support for exported templates is enabled by default but you can turn it off with command line option no export You cannot use exported templates together with the command line option implicit include 2 6 5 1 Finding the Exported Template Definition The automatic instantiation of exported templates is somewhat similar from a user s
387. ory info from LSL file Command line syntax Isl dump file Description With this option you tell the linker to dump the LSL part of the map file in a separate file independent of the option map file generate map file If you do not specify a filename the file Lktarget 1df is used Related information db Linker option map file format Map file formatting 5 211 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker IsI file d Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Use project specific LSL file 4 Inthe LSL file field type a name or click and select an LSL file Command line syntax lIsl file file diile Description A linker script file contains vital information about the core for the locating phase of the linker A linker script file is coded in LSL and contains the following types of information e the architecture definition describes the core s hardware architecture e the memory definition describes the physical memory available in the system e the section layout definition describes how to locate sections in memory With this option you specify a linker script file to the linker If you do not specify this option the linker uses a default script file You can specify the existing file mb 1s1 or the name of a manually written linker script file You can us
388. ory that is set with the environment variable LIBMB Then the linker looks in the default directory PRODDIR cmb 1ib for libraries Related information d gt Linker option library Link system library Section 6 4 1 How the linker searches libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 208 Tool Options Linker Linker link only Menu entry Command line syntax link only Description With this option you suppress the locating phase The linker stops after linking and informs you about unresolved references Related information dE Control program option cl Stop after linking 5 209 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker Isl check Menu entry Command line syntax Isl check Description With this option the linker just checks the syntax of the LSL file s and exits No linking or locating is performed Use the option Isl file file to specify the name of the Linker Script File you want to test Related information Gb Linker option IsI file Linker script file Linker option Isl dump Dump LSL info Section 6 9 Controlling the Linker with a Script in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 210 Tool Options Linker Linker Isl dump Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enable the option Dump processor and mem
389. ote that if you specify a filename you have to specify one filename for every input file Related information db Control program option mil link mil split 5 27 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler misrac Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Inthe MISRA C checking box select a MISRA C configuration If you select Custom MISRA C configuration 4 Inthe left pane expand the MISRA C entry and select Custom 2004 or Custom 1998 5 Enable or disable the individual rules Command line syntax misrac all number number Description With this option you specify to the compiler which MISRA C rules must be checked With the option misrac all the compiler checks for all supported MISRA C rules Example cmb misrac 9 13 test c The compiler generates an error for each MISRA C rule 9 10 11 12 or 13 violation in file test c Related information C compiler option misrac advisory warnings C compiler option misrac required warnings Linker option misrac report 5 28 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler misrac advisory warnings misrac required warnings Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select MISRA C 3 Enable one or both options Turn advisory rule viol
390. ou can control the level of optimization The default optimization level is Medium optimization option O2 or O or Oabcefglkloprsy You can overrule these settings in your C source file with the pragma pair pragma optimize flag and pragma endoptimize AN In addition to the command line option optimize O you can specify the option tradeoff t With this option you specify whether the used optimizations should optimize for more speed regardless of code size or for smaller code size regardless of speed Example The following invocations are equivalent and result all in the default optimization set cmb test c cmb 02 test c cmb optimize 2 test c cmb O test c cmb optimize test c cmb Oabcefgikloprsy test c cmb optimize coalesce ipro cse expression flow glo inline schedule loop forward propagate compact subscript peephole test c Related information d gt Section 2 6 Compiler Optimizations in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual C compiler option tradeoff t Trade off between speed t0 and size t4 5 38 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler option file f Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option option file to the Additional C compiler options field Be aware that the options in the option file are added to the C com
391. ou specify this option but without numbers all warnings are suppressed e If you specify this option with a number only the specified warning is suppressed You can specify the option no warnings number multiple times Example To suppress warnings 135 and 136 enter 135 136 in the Specific warnings to suppress field or enter the following on the command line asmb test srce no warnings 135 136 Related information db Assembler option warnings as errors Treat warnings as errors 5 176 Tool Options Assembler Assembler optimize O Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Assembler entry and select Optimization 3 Enable or disable the optimization options e Generic instructions e Jump chains e Instruction size Command line syntax Oflags optimize flags You can set the following flags generics g G Allow generic instructions jumpchains j J Jump chains instr size s S Optimize instruction size Default optimize gJs Description Allow generic instructions If you use generic instructions in your assembly source the assembler can optimize them by replacing it with the fastest or shortest possible variant of that instruction By default this option is enabled If you turn off this optimization the assembler generates an error on generic instructions Be aware that the compiler also generates generic
392. ous 3 Add the option list file to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax list file file Liile Default 1 Description Generate raw listing information in the file This information is likely to be used to generate a formatted listing The raw listing file contains raw source lines information on transitions into and out of include files and diagnostics generated by the C compiler Each line of the listing file begins with a key character that identifies the type of line as follows N A normal line of source the rest of the line is the text of the line X The expanded form of a normal line of source the rest of the line is the text of the line This line appears following the N line and only if the line contains non trivial modifications comments are considered trivial modifications macro expansions line splices and trigraphs are considered non trivial modifications Comments are replaced by a single space in the expanded form line S A line of source skipped by an if or the like the rest of the line is text Note that the else elif or endif that ends a skip is marked with an N L An indication of a change in source position The line has a format similar to the line identifying directive output by the C preprocessor that is to say L line_number file name key where key is 1 for entry into an include file 2 for exit from an include file and omitted otherwise Th
393. out generating code This saves time in developing your application because the code will not actually be compiled The C compiler reports any warnings and or errors Related information C compiler option check Check syntax Assembler option check Check syntax 5 65 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler context limit Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option context limit to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax context limit number Default 10 Description Set the context limit to number The context limit is the maximum number of template instantiation context entries to be displayed as part of a diagnostic message If the number of context entries exceeds the limit the first and last N context entries are displayed where N is half of the context limit A value of zero is used to indicate that there is no limit Example To set the context limit to 5 enter cpmb context limit 5 test cc Related information i 5 66 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler create pch Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Precompiled Headers 3 Enter a filename in the Create precompiled header file field Command line
394. output is easier to read Related information d C compiler option make target Specify target name for Em output 5 41 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler profile p Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Debug Information 3 Enable the option Generate profiling information 4 Enable one or more of the following suboptions to select which profiles should be obtained e Block counters not in combination with with Call graph or Function timers e Call graph e Function counters e Function timers LN Note that the more detailled information you request the larger the overhead in terms of execution time code size and heap space needed The option Generate Debug information debug or g does not affect profiling execution time or code size Command line syntax profile flags plflags Use the following option for a predefined set of flags profile g pg profiling with call graph and function timers Alias for pBcFt You can set the following flags when you specify p without flags the default is pBCfST block b B block counters callgraph c C call graph function f F function counters static s S static profile generation time t T function timers Description Profiling is the process of collecting statistical data about a running application With th
395. p enabled but otherwise calls operator A int 2 6 Template Instantiation The C language includes the concept of templates A template is a description of a class or function that is a model for a family of related classes or functions For example one can write a template for a Stack class and then use a stack of integers a stack of floats and a stack of some user defined type In the source these might be written Stack lt int gt Stack lt float gt and Stack lt x gt From a single source description of the template for a stack the compiler can create instantiations of the template for each of the types required The instantiation of a class template is always done as soon as it is needed in a compilation However the instantiations of template functions member functions of template classes and static data members of template classes hereafter referred to as template entities are not necessarily done immediately for several reasons e One would like to end up with only one copy of each instantiated entity across all the object files that make up a program This of course applies to entities with external linkage e The language allows one to write a specialization of a template entity i e a specific version to be used in place of a version generated from the template for a specific data type One could for example write a version of Stack lt int gt or of just Stack lt int gt push that replaces the template genera
396. parameters that are not used in the function signature of the function template Related information i 5 107 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no double F Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no double to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no double F Description With this option you tell the C compiler to treat variables of the type double as float Because the float type takes less space execution speed increases and code size decreases both at the cost of less precision Example cpmb no double test cc The file test cc is compiled where variables of the type double are treated as float Related information J 5 108 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no enum overloading Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no enum overloading to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no enum overloading Description Disable support for using operator functions to overload built in operations on enum typed operands Related information i 5 109 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no explicit Menu e
397. pch 5 67 define 5 68 dep file 5 69 dollar 5 70 embedded c 5 71 error file 5 72 error limit 5 73 exceptions 5 74 exported template file 5 75 extended variadic macros 5 76 force vtbl 5 77 friend injection 5 78 g 5 79 gnu version 5 80 guiding decls 5 81 help 5 82 implicit extern c type conversion 5 83 implicit include 5 84 incl suffixes 5 85 include directory 5 86 include file 5 87 include macros file 5 88 init priority 5 89 instantiate 5 90 io streams 5 91 late tiebreaker 5 92 list file 5 93 long lifetime temps 5 95 long long 5 96 make target 5 97 multibyte chars 5 98 namespaces 5 99 no arg dep lookup 5 100 no array new and delete 5 101 no auto instantiation 5 102 no bool 5 103 no class name injection 5 104 no const string literals 5 105 no dep name 5 106 no distinct template signatures 5 107 Index 4 no double 5 108 no enum overloading 5 109 no explicit 5 110 no export 5 111 no extern inline 5 112 no for init diff warning 5 113 no implicit typename 5 114 no inlining 5 115 no nonconst ref anachronism 5 116 no parse templates 5 119 no pch messages 5 120 no preprocessing only 5 121 no stdinc 5 122 no stdstlinc 5 122 no type traits helpers 5 150 no typename 5 123 no use before set warnings 5 124 no warnings 5 125 nonconst ref anachronism 5 116
398. pe thereof struct A A int A operator A amp A operator const A amp hi main A b 1 b A 1 A 2 Allowed as anachronism 2 3 4 Extensions Accepted in Normal C Mode The following extensions are accepted in all modes except when strict ANSI ISO violations are diagnosed as errors or were explicitly noted e A friend declaration for a class may omit the class keyword class A friend B Should be friend class B yi 2 4 C Language Constants of scalar type may be defined within classes class A const int size 10 int a size he In the declaration of a class member a qualified name may be used struct A int A Should be int f hi The restrict keyword is allowed Implicit type conversion between a pointer to an extern C function and a pointer to an extern C function is permitted Here s an example extern C void f f s type has extern C linkage void pf pf points to an extern C function amp f error unless implicit conversion is allowed This extension is allowed in environments where C and C functions share the same calling conventions It is enabled by default A operator whose second and third operands are string literals or wide string literals can be implicitly converted to char or wchar_t Recall that in C string literals are const There is a deprecated implicit conversion that allows
399. pecified in the environment variable LIBMB So the linker ignores steps 2 and 3 as listed below The priority order in which the linker searches for system libraries specified with the library option is 1 The path that is specified with the library directory option 2 The path that is specified in the environment variable LIBMB 3 The default directory PRODDIR cmb 1ib or a processor specific sub directory Example Suppose you call the control program as follows ccmb test c library directory c mylibs library cmba First the linker looks in the directory c mylibs for library cmba 1ib this option If it does not find the requested libraries it looks in the directory that is set with the environment variable LIBMB Then the linker looks in the default directory PRODDIR cmb 1ib for libraries Related information d Linker option library Link system library 5 254 Tool Options Control Program Control Program list files Command line syntax list files name Description With this option you tell the assembler via the control programma to generate a list file for each specified input file A list file shows the generated object code and the relative addresses Note that the assembler generates a relocatable object file with relative addresses With name you can specify a name for the list file This is only possible if you specify only one input file to the control program If you do not specify name
400. piler Therefore the sizeof operator applied to this parameter yields the size of a pointer and not the size of an array Ensure that array types in expressions are compatible Using two or more incompatible arrays in an expression results in undefined behavior Do not allow loops to iterate beyond the end of an array Reading or writing of data outside the bounds of an array may lead to incorrect program behavior or execution of arbitrary code MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 9 7 Characters and Strings STR STR30 C STR33 C STR34 C STR36 C Do not attempt to modify string literals Writing to a string literal has undefined behavior as identical strings may be shared and or allocated in read only memory Size wide character strings correctly Wide character strings may be improperly sized when they are mistaken for narrow strings or for multi byte character strings Cast characters to unsigned types before converting to larger integer sizes A signed character is sign extended to a larger signed integer value Use an explicit cast or cast the value to an unsigned type first to avoid unexpected sign extension Do not specify the bound of a character array initialized with a string literal The compiler issues this warning when the character buffer initialized by a string literal does not provide enough room for the terminating null character 9 8 Memory Management MEM MEMO0 C MEM08 C MEM30 C MEM31 C
401. piler options you have set in the other dialogs Only in extraordinary cases you may want to use them in combination Altium Designer automatically saves the options with your project Command line syntax option file file f file Description This option is primarily intended for command line use Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the compiler Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing You can specify the option option file multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded e When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whitespace between quotes is preserved This is a continuation line gt This is a continuation line e Itis possible to nest command line files up to 25 levels Example Suppose the file myoptions contains the following lines
402. process repeats until no new unresolved symbols are found Related information Gb Section 6 4 Linking with Libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 197 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker first library first Menu entry Command line syntax first library first Description When the linker processes a library it searches for symbols that are referenced by the objects and libraries processed so far If the library contains a definition for an unresolved reference the linker extracts the object that contains the definition from the library By default the linker processes object files and libraries in the order in which they appear on the command line If you specify the option first library first the linker always tries to take the symbol definition from the library that appears first on the command line before scanning subsequent libraries This is for example useful when you are working with a newer version of a library that partially overlaps the older version Because they do not contain exactly the same functions you have to link them both However when a function is present in both libraries you may want the linker to extract the most recent function Example Consider the following example lkmb first library first a lib test obj b lib If the file test obj calls a function which is both present in a 1ib and b 1ib normally the function in b 1ib would be extracted With this op
403. processing a source file from the export libary the command line macros specified when the corresponding et file was produced do apply All other compilation options other than the include search path and command line macro definitions used when recompiling the exported templates will be used to compile the client program When a library is installed on a new system it is likely that the export_info file will need to be adapted to reflect the location of the required headers on that system 2 7 __Inlining Functions The C compiler supports a minimal form of function inlining When the C compiler encounters a call of a function declared inline it can replace the call with the body of the function with the parameters replaced by the corresponding arguments When a function call occurs as a statement the statements of the function body are inserted in place of the call When the function call occurs within an expression the body of the function is rewritten as one large expression and that expression is inserted in the proper place in the containing expression It is not always possible to do this sort of inlining there are certain constructs e g loops and inline assembly that cannot be rendered in expression form Even when inlining is done at the statement level there are certain constructs that are not practical to inline Calls that cannot be inlined are left in their original call form and an out of line copy of the function is used When
404. profile settings The pragma works the same as compiler option profile p Note that this pragma will only be checked at the start of a function endprofile switches back to the previous profiling settings Gb See C compiler option profile p in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options profiling If profiling is enabled on the command line C compiler option profile p you can disable part of your source code for profiling with the pragmas profiling off and profiling protect endprotect With these pragmas you can protect sections against linker optimizations This excludes a section from unreferenced section removal and duplicate section removal by the linker endprotext restores the default section protection ramstring Allocate strings in ROM and RAM The strings are copied to RAM at startup romstring Same as compiler option source S Allocate strings in ROM only d gt See C compiler option source S in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options runtime flag Check for run time errors The pragma works the same as compiler option runtime r db See C compiler option runtime r in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options sdata size With this pragma you tell the compiler to place all data objects smaller than the specified size bytes in sdata or sbss sections You can still overrule this option with the keywords _no_sda
405. ption no pch messages to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no pch messages Default a message is displayed indicating that a precompiled header file was created or used in the current compilation For example test cc creating precompiled header file test pch Description Disable the display of a message indicating that a precompiled header file was created or used in the current compilation Related information C compiler option pch Automatic PCH mode C compiler option use pch Use precompiled header file C compiler option create pch Create precompiled header file Section 2 11 Precompiled Headers in chapter C Language 5 120 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no preprocessing only Menu entry Altium Designer always does a full compilation Command line syntax no preprocessing only Description You can use this option in conjunction with the options that normally cause the C compiler to do preprocessing only e g preprocess etc to specify that a full compilation should be done not just preprocessing When used with the implicit inclusion option this makes it possible to generate a preprocessed output file that includes any implicitly included files Example cpmb preprocess implicit include no preprocessing only test cc Related information C compiler option preprocess Preprocessing only C compiler option implicit include
406. ption Allow GNU C extensions language gcc you tell the compiler to enable the following gcc languages extensions e The identifier FUNCTION__ expands to the current function name e Alternative syntax for variadic macros e Alternative syntax for designated initializers e Allow zero sized arrays e Allow empty struct union e Allow empty initializer list e Allow initialization of static objects by compound literals e The middle operand of a operator may be omitted e Allow a compound statement inside braces as expression e Allow arithmetic on void pointers and function pointers e Allow a range of values after a single case label e Additional preprocessor directive warning e Allow comma operator conditional operator and cast as lvalue e An inline function without static or extern will be global 5 23 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e An extern inline function will not be compiled on its own e An attribute directly following a struct union definition relates to that tag instead of to the objects in the declaration For an exact description of these gcc extensions please refer to the gcc info pages info gcc When you disable the option Allow optimization across volatile access with language volatile you tell the compiler to block optimizations when reading or writing a volatile object by treating the access as a call to an unknown function This way you can prevent for example that code below
407. quired The vector_prefix argument defines the names of vector sections the section for a vector with id vector_id is vector_prefix vector_id Vectors defined in C or assembly source files that should be included in the vector table must have the correct symbol name The compiler uses the prefix that is defined in the default LSL file s if this attribute is changed the vectors declared in C source files are not included in the vector table When a vector supplied in an object file has exactly one relocation the linker will assume it is a branch to a handler function and can be removed when the handler is inlined in the vector table Otherwise no inlining is done This argument is required With the optional no_inline argument the vectors handlers are not inlined in the vector table With the optional copy argument a ROM copy of the vector table is made and the vector table is copied to RAM at startup With the optional id_symbol_prefix argument you can set an internal string representing a symbol name prefix that may be found on symbols in vector handler code When the linker detects such a symbol in a handler the symbol is assigned the vector number If the symbol was already assigned a vector number a warning is issued The i11 argument sets the default contents of vectors If nothing is specified for a vector this setting is used See below When no default is provided empty vectors may be used to locate large vector handlers and othe
408. r Description Normally variables are cleared at program startup With this option you tell the compiler to generate code to prevent non initialized global variables from being cleared at program startup Related information d gt 5 31 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no double F Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Floating Point 3 Enable the option Use single precision floating point only Command line syntax no double F Description With this option you tell the compiler to treat variables of the type double as float Because the float type takes less space execution speed increases and code size decreases both at the cost of less precision Related information i 5 32 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler noframe Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Disable the option Generate frame for interrupt handler Command line syntax noframe Description With this option you can specify whether the compiler should generate an interrupt frame saving restoring registers for interrupt handlers or not Related information C compiler option vector offset Reset interrupt vector offset C compiler option novector Generate code for inte
409. r error limit e Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option error limit to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax error limit number Default 100 enumber Description Set the error limit to number The C compiler will abandon compilation after this number of errors remarks and warnings are not counted By default the limit is 100 Example When you want compilation to stop when 10 errors occurred enter cpmb error limit 10 test cc Related information i 5 73 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler exceptions x Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Support for exception handling Command line syntax exceptions X Description With this option you enable support for exception handling in the C compiler The macro __EXCEPTIONS is defined when exception handling support is enabled Related information J 5 74 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler exported template file Menu entry Command line syntax exported template file file Description This option specifies the name to be used for the exported template file used for processing of exported t
410. r boolean type and values are consistent with C You are allowed to undefine or redefine the macros below define bool _Bool define true 1 define false 0 define bool true false are defined 1 3 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 3 2 20 stddef h This header file defines the types for common use ptrdiff_t size t wchar_t signed integer type of the result of subtracting two pointers unsigned integral type of the result of the sizeof operator integer type to represent character codes in large character sets Besides these types the following macros are defined NULL expands to the null pointer constant offsetof _type _ member expands to an integer constant expression with type size_t that is the offset in bytes of 3 2 21 stdint h _member within structure type type d See section 3 2 9 inttypes h and stdint h 3 2 22 stdio h and wchar h Types The header file stdio h contains functions for performing input and output A number of functions also have a parallel wide character function or macro defined in wchar h The header file wchar h also includes stdio h In the C language many I O facilities are based on the concept of streams The stdio h header file defines the data type FILE which holds the information about a stream An FILE object is created with the function fopen The pointer to this object is used as an argument in many of the in this header file The FILE object can contain the fo
411. r generates the appropriate interrupt vector consisting of an instruction jumping to the interrupt function You can suppress this with the compiler option novector or the pragma novector The difference between a normal function and an interrupt function is that an interrupt function ends with a RTSD RTID or RTBD instruction instead of a RET instruction and that all registers that might possibly be corrupted during the execution of the interrupt function are saved on function entry this is called the interrupt frame and restored on function exit C compiler option novector Do not generate interrupt vectors in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual Specify another vector offset For certain ROM monitors it is necessary to specify an offset for all interrupt vectors For this you can use the command vector offset va ue Suppose a ROM monitor has the interrupt table at offset 0x4000 When you compile with vector of fset 0x00004000 interrupt vector address 8 is being located at address 0x00004008 instead of 0x00000008 C compiler option vector offset Specify a 32 bit offset address for interrupt vectors in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options of the reference manual C Language 1 9 5 2 Interrupt Frame __ frame With the function type qualifier frame can specify which registers and SFRs must be saved for a particular interrupt function Only the specified regist
412. r not It does not rebuild any files Related information J 5 294 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility r Command line syntax r Description When you call the make utility it first reads the implicit rules from the file tmk mk then it reads the makefile with the rules to build your files The file tmk mk is located in the etc directory of the toolset With this option you tell the make utility not to read tmk mk and to rely fully on the make rules in the makefile Example tmk r The make utility does not read the implicit make rules in tmk mk Related information J 5 295 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility S Command line syntax S Description With this option you cancel the effect of the option k This is only necessary in a recursive make where the option k might be inherited from the top level make via MAKEFLAGS or if you set the option k in the environment variable MAKEFLAGS Example tmk S The effect of the option k is cancelled so the make utility stops with the make process after it encounters an error The option k in this example may have been set with the environment variable MAKEFLAGS or in a recursive call to tmk in the makefile Related information db Make utility option k On error abandon the work for the current target only 5 296 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility s Command line syntax s Description With this optio
413. r of elements succesfully read FSS implementation Writes nobj members of size bytes from to the array pointed to by pir to the given stream Returns the number of elements succesfully written FSS implementation Description fseek stream offset origin Sets the position indicator for stream FSS implementation When repositioning a binary file the new position origin is given by the following macros SEEK_SET 0 SEEK_CUR 1 SEEK_END 2 offset characters from the beginning of the file offset characters from the current position in the file offset characters from the end of the file Libraries ftell stream rewind stream fgetpos stream pos fsetpos stream pos Operations on files stdio h Returns the current file position for stream or 1L on error FSS implementation Sets the file position indicator for the stream to the beginning of the file This function is equivalent to void fseek stream OL SEEK _SET clearerr stream FSS implementation Stores the current value of the file position indicator for stream in the object pointed to by pos FSS implementation Positions stream at the position recorded by getpos in pos FSS implementation Description remove file rename old new tmpfile tmpnam buffer Error handling stdio h Removes the named file so that a subsequent attempt to open it fails Returns a non zero value if not succesful Chang
414. r sections Only one fill argument is allowed The vector field defines the content of vector with the number specified by id If a range is specified for id p q s t all vectors in the ranges inclusive are defined the same way With i111 symbo1_name the vector must jump to this symbol If the section in which the symbol is defined fits in the vector table size may be gt m locate the section at the location of the vector Otherwise insert code to jump to the symbol s value A template handler section name symbol name for the target code must be supplied in the LSL file i11 value s fills the vector with the specified MAU values With i111 1loop the vector jumps to itself With the optional offset you can specify an offset from the vector table entry 8 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Reserved address ranges e The reserved keyword specifies to reserve a part of an address space even if not all of the range is covered by memory See also the reserved keyword in section 8 9 3 Creating or Modifying Special Sections Start address e The start_address keyword specifies the start address for the position where the C startup code is located When a processor is reset it initializes its program counter to a certain start address sometimes called the reset vector In the architecture definition you must specify this start address in the correct address space in combination with the name of the label in th
415. r the null pointer if not found Returns a pointer to the last occurence of character c in string s or the null pointer if not found Searches s for a sequence of characters specified in set Returns the length of the first sequence found Searches s for a sequence of characters not specified in set Returns the length of the first sequence found Same as strspn wcsspn but returns a pointer to the first character in s that also is specified in set Searches for a substring sub in s Returns a pointer to the first occurence of sub in s A sequence of calls to this function breaks the string s into a sequence of tokens delimited by a character specified in delim The token found in s is terminated with a null character The function returns a pointer to the first position in s of the token Description memset s c n strerror errno strlen s 3 20 wmemset s C Nn weslen s Fills the first n bytes of s with character c and returns s Typically the values for errno come from int errno This function re turns a pointer to the associated error message See also section 3 2 4 errno h Returns the length of string s Libraries 3 2 25 time h and wehar h The header file time h provides facilities to retrieve and use the calendar date and time and the process time Time can be represented as an integer value or can be broken down in components Two arithmetic data types are defined w
416. r towlower Returns c converted to a lowercase character if it is an uppercase character otherwise c is returned toupper towupper Returns c converted to an uppercase character if it is a lowercase character otherwise c is returned _tolower Converts c to a lowercase character does not check if c really is an uppercase character Implemented as macro This macro function is not defined in ISO C99 _toupper Converts c to an uppercase character does not check if c really is a lowercase character Implemented as macro This macro function is not defined in ISO C99 isascii Returns a non zero value when c is in the range of 0 and 127 This function is not defined in ISO C99 toascii Converts c to an ASCII value strip highest bit This function is not defined in ISO C99 3 3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 3 2 4 errno h int errno External variable that holds implementation defined error codes The following error codes are defined as macros in errno h EPERM 1 Not owner ENOENT 2 No such file or directory EINTR 3 Interrupted system call EIO 4 I O error EBADF 5 Bad file number EAGAIN 6 No more processes ENOMEM 7 Not enough core EACCES 8 Permission denied EFAULT 9 Bad address EEXIST 10 File exists ENOTDIR 11 Not a directory EISDIR 12 Is a directory EINVAL 13 Invalid argument ENFILE 14 File table overflow EMFILE 15 Too many open files ETXTBSY 16 Text file busy ENOSPC 17 No space left on device ESPIPE 18 Illeg
417. r wc into another wide character described by desc Function Equivalent to locale specific transformation towlower wc towctrans wc wctrans tolower towupper wc towctrans wc wctrans toupper 3 24 4 Assembly Language Summ ary This chapter describes the most important aspects of the TASKING assembly language and contains a detailed description of all built in assembly functions and assembler directives For a complete overview of the architecture you are using and a description of the assembly instruction set refer to the target s Core Reference Manual 4 1 Assembly Syntax An assembly program consists of zero or more statements A statement may optionally be followed by a comment Any source statement can be extended to more lines by including the line continuation character as the last character on the line The length of a source statement first line and continuation lines is only limited by the amount of available memory Mnemonics and directives are case insensitive Labels symbols directive arguments and literal strings are case sensitive The syntax of an assembly statement is label instruction directive macro_call comment label A label is a special symbol which is assigned the value and type of the current program location counter A label can consist of letters digits and underscore characters _ The first character cannot be a digit A label which is prefixed by whitespac
418. r4 r0 4 r4 r13 b _base_r13 r3 r3 r4 r3 r13 result _base_r13 r15 8 r0 r0 r0 Example 4 reserve registers r b Sometimes an instruction knocks out certain specific registers The most common example of this is a function call where the called function is allowed to do whatever it likes with some registers If this is the case you can list specific registers that get clobbered by an operation after the inputs Same as Example 3 but now register R3 is a reserved register You can do this by adding a reserved register list R3 As you can see in the generated assembly code register R3 is not used char a b int result void main void a 3 b 4 __asm ADD 0 1 2 r result r a Generated assembly code main label code addik sbi addik sbi ADD swi rtsd or r4 r0 3 r4 r13 a _base _r13 r5 r0 4 r5 r13 b _base_r13 r4 r4 r5 r4 r13 result _base_r13 r15 8 r0 r0 xr0 xr b 2 R3 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 1 5 Pragmas to Control the Compiler Pragmas are keywords in the C source that control the behavior of the compiler Pragmas overrule compiler options Put pragmas in your C source where you want them to take effect Unless stated otherwise a pragma is in effect from the point where it is included to the end of the compilation unit or until another pragma changes its status For example you can set a compiler option to specify which optimizations
419. radeoff Example cmb inline max incr 40 inline max size 15 test c The compiler first inlines all functions with the function qualifier inline and all functions that are smaller than the specified threshold of 15 If the code size has still not increased with 40 the compiler decides which other functions it can inline Related information db C compiler option optimize inline Optimization automatic function inlining Section 1 9 3 nlining Functions in chapter C Language Section 2 6 3 Optimize for Size or Speed in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual 5 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler integer enumeration Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat enumerated types always as integer Command line syntax integer enumeration Description Normally the compiler treats enumerated types as the smallest data type possible char instead of int This reduces code size With this option the compiler always treats enum types as int as defined in the ISO C99 standard Related information dL 5 20 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler iso c Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Select the ISO C standard C9
420. rdingly to the ISO C99 standard been moved to the header file math h See also section 3 2 15 math h and tgmath h 3 2 8 fss h The header file fss h contains definitions for the debugger s file system simulation FSS This header file is not defined in ISO c99 fss h Description _fss_break void Buffer and breakpoint functions for the debugger Opens file descriptors O stdin 1 stdout and 2 stderr and associates them with terminal sere ed eee window Fss 0 of the debugger 3 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 3 2 9 inttypes h and stdint h The header files stdint h and inttypes h provide additional declarations for integer types and have various characteristics The stdint h header file contains basic definitions of integer types of certain sizes and corresponding sets of macros This header file clearly refers to the corresponding sections in the ISO C99 standard The inttypes h header file includes stdint h and adds portable formatting and conversion functions Below the conversion functions from inttypes h are listed intmax_t imaxabs intmax_t j Returns the absolute value of j imaxdiv_t imaxdiv intmax_t numer Computes numer denom and numer denom The result is stored in the quot intmax_t denom and rem components of the imaxdiv_t structure type intmax_t strtoimax const char Convert string to maximum sized integer Compare strtol restrict nptr char restrict endptr int base uintm
421. rds e g not and and digraphs enter cpmb alternative tokens test cc Related information ie 5 60 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler anachronisms Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Anachronisms Command line syntax anachronisms Description Enable C anachronisms This option also enables nonconst ref anachronism But you can turn this off individually with option no nonconst ref anachronism Related information C compiler option nonconst ref anachronism Nonconst reference anachronism Section 2 3 3 Anachronisms Accepted in chapter C Language 5 61 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler base assign op is default Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option base assign op is default to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax base assign op is default Description Enable the anachronism of accepting a copy assignment operator that has an input parameter that is a reference to a base class as a default copy assignment operator for the derived class Related information d 5 62 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler building r
422. re EP r read open text file for reading yy w write create text file for writing if the file already exists its contents is discarded a append open existing text file or create new text file for writing at end of file r open text file for update reading and writing create text file for update previous contents if any is discarded W a append open or create text file for update writes at end of file fclose name Flushes the data stream and closes the specified file that was previously opened with fopen fflush name If stream is an output stream any buffered but unwritten date is written Else the effect is undefined freopen name mode stream Similar to fopen but rather then generating a new value of type FILE the existing value is associated with a new stream setbuf stream buffer If buffer is NULL buffering is turned off for the stream Otherwise setbuf is equivalent to void setvbuf stream buf IOFBF BUFSIZ setvbuf stream buffer Controls buffering for the stream this function must be called before reading or writing mode size Mode can have the following values _IOFBF causes full buffering _IOLBF causes line buffering of text files _IONBF causes no buffering If buffer is not NULL it will be used as a buffer otherwise a buffer will be allocated size determines the buffer size Character input output The format string of printf related functions can contain p
423. recognizes certain text operators within macro definitions which allow text substitution of arguments during macro expansion You can use these operators for text concatenation numeric conversion and string handling Operator Name Description Macro argument Concatenates a macro argument with adjacent alphanumeric characters concatenation Return decimal Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the decimal value value of symbol of the symbol Return hex Substitutes the symbo sequence with a character string that represents the hexadecimal value of symbol value of the symbol Macro string Allows the use of macro arguments as literal strings delimiter Macro local label Prevents name mangling on labels in macros override Example Argument Concatenation Operator Consider the following macro definition MAC_A MACRO reg val addik r reg r reg val ENDM The macro is called as follows MAC_A 3 1 The macro expands as follows addik r3 r3 1 The macro preprocessor substitutes the character 3 for the argument reg and the character 1 for the argument val The concatenation operator indicates to the macro preprocessor that the substitution characters for the arguments are to be concatenated with the characters r Without the operator the macro would expand as addik rreg rreg 1l which results in an assembler error invalid operand
424. rectives are variants of the DS directive DSB The expression argument specifies the number of bytes to reserve DSH The expression argument specifies the number of half words to reserve one half word is16 bits DSW The expression argument specifies the number of words to reserve one word is 32 bits DSD The expression argument specifies the number of double words to reserve one double word is 64 bits Example RES DS 5 3 allocate 8 bytes Related information d BS Block Storage DB_ Define Byte DH Define Half Word DW Define Word DD Define Double Word Assembly Language DW Syntax label DW argument argumeni Description With the Dw directive Define Word you allocate and initialize one word of memory for each argument One word is 32 bits An argument is e asingle or multiple character string constant e an expression e NULL indicated by two adjacent commas If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Multiple arguments are stored in sets of four bytes If an argument is NULL its corresponding address locations are flled with zeros Word arguments are stored as is Floating point values are not allowed If the evaluated argument is too large to be represented in a word the assembler issues a warning and truncates the value In case of single and multiple character strings each ASCII value of the character is sto
425. red and not initialized To select all read only sections group select attributes r w Keep in mind that all section selections are restricted to the address space of the section layout in which this group definition occurs e With the ref_tree field you can select a group of related sections The relation between sections is often expressed by means of references By selecting just the root of tree the complete tree is selected This is for example useful to locate a group of related sections in special memory e g fast memory The referenced sections must meet the following conditions in order to be selected 1 The sections are within the section layout s address space 2 The sections match the specified attributes 3 The sections have no absolute restriction as is the case for all wildcard selections For example to select the code sections referenced from fool group refgrp ordered contiguous run_addr mem ext_c select ref_tree fool attributes x If section foo1 references foo2 and foo2 references foo3 then all these sections are selected by the selection shown above Locating a group group group _name group_specifications section_statements With the group_specifications you actually define how the linker must locate the group You can roughly define three things 1 assign properties to the group like alignment and read write attributes 2 define the mutual
426. red below void operator new size_t void p When doing name lookup in a base class the injected class name of a template class is ignored namespace N template lt class T gt struct A struct A int i hi struct B N A lt int gt B A x x i 1 g uses A not N A he The injected class name is found in certain contexts in which the constructor should be found instead struct A A int he A A a 1 2 8 C Language In a constructor definition what should be treated as a template argument list of the constructor is instead treated as the template argument list of the enclosing class template lt int ul gt struct A template lt gt struct A lt 1 gt template lt class T gt A T i int j hi template lt gt A lt 1 gt A lt 1 gt int i int j accepted in g mode A difference in calling convention is ignored when redeclaring a typedef typedef void F extern C typedef void F Accepted in GNU C mode error otherwise The macro _ GNUG __is defined identically to _GNUC__ i e the major version number of the GNU compiler version that is being emulated The macro _GNU_SOURCE is defined as 1 Guiding declarations a feature present in early drafts of the standard but not in the final standard are disabled Namespace std is predeclared No connection is made between declarations of identical names in different scopes eve
427. red in successive locations starting at the least significant byte of a word The standard C escape sequences are allowed DW AB D gt 0x0004142 0x0000000 second argument is empty 0x0000044 Example TABLE DW 14 253 0x62 ABCD CHARS DW A B C D Related information d gt BS Block Storage DS Define Storage DB Define Byte DH Define Half Word DD_ Define Double Word 4 19 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference END Syntax END Description With the END directive you tell the assembler that the end of the module is reached If the assembler finds assembly source lines beyond the END directive it ignores those lines and issues a warning Example section text source lines END End of assembly module 4 20 Assembly Language EQU Syntax symbol EQU expression Description With the EQU directive you assign the value of expression to symbol permanently Once defined you cannot redefine the symbol With the GLOBAL directive you can define the symbol global The expression can either be absolute or relocatable and cannot contain forward references Normally the defined symbol gets the same type as the result of the expression However when the resulting expression has type none the symbol gets no type when the EQU is used outside a section and it gets the type of the section when it is defined inside a section Example MYSYMBOL1
428. ression Returns the most significant byte of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as16 bits MSH expression Returns the most significant half word bits 16 31 of the result of the absolute expression The result of the expression is calculated as a word 32 bits MSH expression is equivalent to expression gt gt 16 amp Oxffff MSW expression Returns the most significant word bits 32 63 of the result of the expression The result of the expression is calculated as a double word 64 bits STRCAT string1 string2 Concatenates string1 and string2 and returns them as a single string You must enclose string1 and string2 either with single quotes or with double quotes Example DEFINE ID STRCAT TAS KING ID TASKING STRCMP string 1 string2 Compares string with string2 by comparing the characters in the string The function returns the difference between the characters at the first position where they disagree or zero when the strings are equal lt 0 if string lt string2 0 if string string2 gt 0 if string1 gt string2 Example IF STRCMP STR MAIN does STR equal MAIN MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference STRLEWN string Returns the length of string as an integer Example SLEN SET STRLEN string SLEN 6 STRPOS string1 string2 start Returns the position of string2 in string1 as an in
429. rf Computes the error function of x Not implemented erfc erfcl erfcf erc Computes the complementary error function of x Not implemented lgamma lgammal lgammaf lgamma Computes the loge I x Not implemented tgamma tgammal tgammaf tgamma Computes T x Not implemented Comparison macros The next are implemented as macros For any ordered pair of numeric values exactly one of the relationships less greater and equal is true These macros are type generic and therefor do not have a parallel function in tgmath h All arguments must be expressions of real floating type math h tgmath h Description isgreater Returns the value of x gt y isgreaterequal Returns the value of x gt y isless Returns the value of x lt y islessequal Returns the value of x lt y islessgreater Returns the value of x lt y x gt y isunordered Returns 1 if its arguments are unordered 0 otherwise Classification macros The next are implemented as macros These macros are type generic and therefor do not have a parallel function in tgmath h All arguments must be expressions of real floating type math h tgmath h Description fpclassify Returns the class of its argument FP_INFINITE FP_NAN FP_NORMAL FP_SUBNORMAL or FP_ZERO isfinite Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has a finite value isinf Returns a nonzero value if and only if its argument has an infinit value isnan R
430. rip line source position info lines starting with line The compiler sends the preprocessed file to stdout To capture the information in a file specify an output file with the option output Description When compiling each file is preprocessed first With this option you can store the result of preprocessed C files Altium Designer stores the preprocessed file in a file called name pre where name is the name of the C source file being compiled C comments are not preserved similar to ECILMP With preprocess comments you tell the preprocessor to keep the comments from the C source file in the preprocessed output With preprocess includes the compiler will generate a list of all included source files The preprocessor output is discarded With preprocess list the compiler will generate a list of all macro definitions The preprocessor output is discarded With preprocess make the compiler will generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile The preprocessor output is discarded The default target name is the basename of the input file with the extension obj With the option make target you can specify a target name which overrules the default target name With preprocess noline you tell the preprocessor to strip the line source position information lines starting with line These lines are normally processed by the assembler and not needed in the preprocessed output When you leave these lines out the
431. ription With the option D the make utility prints every line of the makefile to standard output as it is read by tmk With the option DD not only the lines of the makefile are printed but also the lines of the tmk mk file implicit rules Example tmk D Each line of the makefile that is read by the make utility is printed to standard output usually your screen Related information J 5 282 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility d dd Command line syntax d dd Description With the option d the make utility shows which files are out of date and thus need to be rebuild The option dd gives more detail than the option d Example tmk d Shows which files are out of date and rebuilds them Related information J 5 283 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility e Command line syntax e Description If you use macro definitions they may overrule the settings of the environment variables With the option e the settings of the environment variables are used even if macros define otherwise Example tmk e The make utility uses the settings of the environment variables regardless of macro definitions Related information i 5 284 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility err Command line syntax err file Description With this option the make utility redirects error messages and verbose messages to a specified file With the option s the make utility only displa
432. ro after one or more compiler warnings As a consequence the assembler now also stops after encountering a warning You can also limit this option to specific warnings by specifying a comma separated list of warning numbers Related information d gt Assembler option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 5 189 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 5 4 Linker Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that you cannot run the linker separately However you can set options specific for the linker Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional Linker options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt The invocation syntax on the command line is lkmb option file When you are linking multiple files either relocatable object files obj or o out files or libraries 1ib or a it is important to specify the files in the right order F
433. rocess make Generate dependencies for make Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler diag Menu entry 1 From the View menu select Workspace Panels System Messages The Message pannel appears 2 In the Message panel right click on the message you want more information on A popup menu appears 3 Select More Info A Message Info box appears with additional information Command line syntax diag format all msg msog Description With this option you can ask for an extended description of error messages in the format you choose The output is directed to stdout normally your screen and in the format you specify You can specify the following formats html rtf or text default To create a file with the descriptions you must redirect the output With the suboption all the descriptions of all error messages are given except for the CERT checks If you want the description of one or more selected error messages you can specify the error message numbers separated by commas or you can specify a range With diag cert you can see a list of the available CERT checks or you can use a three letter mnemonic to list only the checks in a particular category For example diag pre lists all supported preprocessor checks With this option the compiler does not compile any files Example To display an explanation of message number 282 enter cmb diag 282 This results in the following message and expla
434. ror is issued if it is used outside of a function __PTRDIFF MIN __PTRDIFF_MAX Used in stdint h to define the minimum maximum value of a ptrdiff_t type respectively REGION NUMBER_TYPE Defines the type of a region number field in the exception handling tables This macro is used when building the C library __ REVISION __ Expands to the revision number of the C compiler Digits are represented as they are characters for prototypes alphas betas are represented by 1 Examples v1 0r1 gt 1 v1 0rb gt 1 __RTTI Defined when RTTI is enabled rtti __RUNTIME_USES NAMESPACES Defined when the run time uses namespaces __SIGNED_CHARS _ Defined when plain char is signed __ SINGLE _FP__ Expands to 1 if you used option no double Treat double as float otherwise unrecognized as macro SIZE MIN SIZE MAX Used in stdint h to define the minimum maximum value of a size_t type respectively STDC Always defined but the value may be redefined __STDC_VERSION _ Identifies the ISO C version number Expands to 199901L for ISO C99 but the value may be redefined _STLP_NO_IOSTREAMS Defined when option io streams is not used This disables I O stream functions in the STLport C library __ TASKING _ Always defined for the TASKING C compiler _ TIME _ Expands to the compilation time hh mm ss TYPE TRAITS ENABLED Def
435. rrupt vector Section 1 9 5 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 5 33 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no stdinc Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no stdinc to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no stdinc Description With this option you tell the compiler not to look in the default include directory relative to the installation directory when searching for include files This way the compiler only searches in the include file search paths you specified Related information d gt C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path 5 34 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler novector Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Disable the option Generate code for interrupt vector Command line syntax novector Description With this option you tell the compiler not to generate code for interrupt vectors and references to the interrupt handler in the run time library Use this option if you do not use interrupts in your application or if you want to write your own interrupt vectors Related information C compiler option vector offset Specify a base address
436. rs may lead to problems when the code is ported to a different compiler Do not invoke a function using a type that does not match the function definition This warning is generated when a function pointer is set to refer to a function of an incompatible type Calling this function through the function pointer will result in undefined behavior Example void my function int a int main void int new_function int a my_function return new_function 10 the behavior is undefined 9 3 Expressions EXP EXP01 C EXP12 C EXP30 C EXP32 C EXP33 C 9 2 Do not take the size of a pointer to determine the size of the pointed to type The size of the object s allocated by malloc calloc or realloc should be a multiple of the size of the base type of the result pointer Therefore the sizeof expression should be applied to this base type and not to the pointer type Do not ignore values returned by functions The compiler gives this warning when the result of a function call is ignored at some place although it is not ignored for other calls to this function This warning will not be issued when the function result is ignored for all calls or when the result is explicitly ignored with a void cast Do not depend on order of evaluation between sequence points Between two sequence points an object should only be modified once Otherwise the behavior is undefined Do not access a volatile object throu
437. ructions Related information i 5 55 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler vector offset Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Code Generation 3 Enable the option Generate code for interrupt vector 4 Inthe Reset interrupt vector offset field enter an offset address in the range 0x0000 0xFFFF Command line syntax vector offset address Description With this option you can specify a 16 bit offset address for the interrupt vector table The default offset address is 0x0000 This option is for example useful to place the vector table in RAM Example Type 0x4000 as the base address of the interrupt vector table in the Reset interrupt vector offset field or enter the following on the command line cmb vector offset 0x4000 test c Suppose your C source contains the following interrupt function __interrupt 0x0013 void isr void The compiler adds the offset address to the vector address in the C source so the actual vector address becomes 0x4013 Related information C compiler option novector Do not generate interrupt vectors C compiler option noframe Do not generate frame for interrupt handler Section 1 9 5 nterrupt Functions in chapter C Language 5 56 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler version V Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax
438. s 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option max call depth to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax max call depth va ue Default 1 Description This option is related to the compiler optimization optimize compact Code compaction or reverse inlining Code compaction is the opposite of inlining functions large sequences of code that occur more than once are transformed into a function This reduces code size possibly at the cost of execution speed During code compaction the compiler generates nested calls This may cause the program to run out of its stack To prevent stack overflow caused by too deeply nested function calls you can use this option to limit the call depth This option can have the following values 1 Poses no limit to the call depth default 0 The compiler will not generate any function calls Effectively the same as if you turned of code compaction with option optimize compact gt 0 Code sequences are only reversed if this will not lead to code at a call depth larger than specified with value Function calls will be placed at a call depth no larger than va ue 1 Note that if you specified a value of 1 the option optimize compact may remain without effect when code sequences for reversing contain function calls This option does not influence the call depth of user written functions aN If you use this option with various C modules t
439. s They have the following layout SO record S 0 lt length_byte gt lt 2 bytes 0 gt lt comment gt lt checksum_byte gt A linker generated S record file starts with a SO record with the following contents length_byte 07 comment Ikmb checksum 52 lkmb S00700006C6B6D6252 The SO record is a comment record and does not contain relevant information for program execution The length_byte represents the number of bytes in the record not including the record type and length byte The checksum is calculated by first adding the binary representation of the bytes following the record type starting with the length_byte to just before the checksum Then the one s complement is calculated of this sum The least significant byte of the result is the checksum The sum of all bytes following the record type is OFFH S1 record With the linker option ofilename SREC 2 the actual program code and data is supplied with S1 records with the following layout S 1 lt length_byte gt lt address gt lt code bytes gt lt checksum_byte gt This record is used for 2 byte addresses Example 1130250F03EF04DFOACE8A408A2A013EDFCDBO0E6 _ checksum _ code _ address _ length The linker has an option that controls the length of the output buffer for generating S1 records The default buffer length is 32 code bytes The checksum calculation of S1 records is identical to SO S2 record With th
440. s I O streams require substantial resources they are disabled by default Use this option to enable I O streams support in the C library This option also enables exception handling Related information J 5 91 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler late tiebreaker Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option late tiebreaker to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax late tiebreaker Default early tiebreaker processing Description Select the way that tie breakers e g cv qualifier differences apply in overload resolution In early tie breaker processing the tie breakers are considered at the same time as other measures of the goodness of the match of an argument value and the corresponding parameter type this is the standard approach In late tie breaker processing tie breakers are ignored during the initial comparison and considered only if two functions are otherwise equally good on all arguments the tie breakers can then be used to choose one function over another Related information J 5 92 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler list file L Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellane
441. s and sbss bss sbss noclear Do not clear the DATA section at program startup default for text data ssdata and text data rodata sdata bss sbss rodata init Copies the data from the section from ROM to RAM at program setup default for data sdata data and sdata noinit Do not initialize section default for text bss soss and rodata text data sdata bss sbss rodata inpage Indicates that the section must fit within a 256 byte page text data sdata bss sbss rodata max When sections with the same name occur in different object modules with the MAX data sdata attribute the linker generates a section of which the size is the maximum of the sizes bss sbss in the individual object modules rodata 4 36 Assembly Language Attribute Description Allowed on noalloc debug page Align sections to a page boundary Cannot be used together with align text data sdata bss sbss rodata romdata Indicates that the section contains data to be placed in ROM default for rodata rodata overlay overlay Generated by the C compiler to create overlaid sections data sdata bss sbss rodata group group Used to group sections for example for placing in the same page text data sdata bss sbss rodata Table 4 5 MicroBlaze section attributes Example SECTION data Declare a data section SECTION dat
442. s are given as variable ar gument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h Performs a formatted write to the given stream Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Performs a formatted write to the stream stdout Returns EOF WEOF on error FSS implementation Performs a formatted write to string s Returns EOF WEOF on error Same as sprintf but n specifies the maximum number of characters including the terminating null character to be written Same as fprintf fwprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h FSS implementation Same as printf wprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h FSS implementation Same as sprintf swprintf but extra arguments are given as variable argument list arg See section 3 2 18 stdarg h FSS implementation 3 15 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Character input output stdio h wchar h Description fgetc stream getc stream getchar stdin fgets s n stream gets s n stdin ungetc c stream fputc c stream putc c stream putchar c stdout fputs s stream puts s Direct input output stdio h fgetwc stream getwc stream getwchar stdin fgetws s n stream ungetwc c stream fputwe c stream putwe c stream putwchar c stdout fputws s stream Description Reads one character from strea
443. s can be defined by appending a macro parameter list to macro_name On the command line you can use the option define D multiple times If the command line exceeds the length limit of the operating system you can define the macros in an option file which you then must specify to the C compiler with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the C source is for example useful to compile conditional C source as shown in the example below The definition can be tested by the preprocessor with if ifdef and ifndef for conditional compilations Example Consider the following program with conditional code to compile a demo program and a real program void main void if DEMO demo_func compile for the demo program else real _func compile for the real program endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag cpmb define DEMO test cc cpmb define DEMO 1 test cc Note that both invocations have the same effect The next example shows how to define a macro with arguments Note that the macro name and definition are placed between double quotes because otherwise the spaces would indicate a new option cpmb define MAX A B A gt B A B test cc Related information C compiler option undefine Remove preprocessor macro C compiler option option file Specify an option file 5 68 Tool Options C Compiler
444. s dialog box appears 2 Select Build Options 3 Add a pathname in the Include Files Path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax include directory path lpath Description With this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory The order in which the assembler searches for include files is 1 The pathname in the assembly file and the directory of the assembly source 2 The path that is specified with this option 3 The path that is specified in the environment variable ASMBINC when the product was installed 4 The default include directory relative to the installation directory Example Suppose that your assembly source file test src contains the following line INCLUDE myinc inc You can call the assembler as follows asmb include directory c proj include test src First the assembler looks in the directory where test src is located for the file myinc inc If it does not find the file it looks in the directory c proj include for the file myinc inc this option If the file is still not found the assembler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information db Assembler option include file H Include file before source 5 170 Tool Options Assembler Assembler include file H Menu entry
445. s resolved by the linker when a global or weak definition is found in one of the object files However a weak reference will not cause the extraction of a module from a library to resolve the reference When a weak external reference cannot be resolved the null pointer is substituted A weak definition can be overruled by a normal global definition The linker will not complain about the duplicate definition and ignore the weak definition d gt See assembler directive WEAK in Section 4 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language 1 6 Predefined Preprocessor Macros In addition to the predefined macros required by the ISO C standard such as DATE __ and __FILE__ the TASKING C compiler supports the predefined macros as defined in the table below The macros are useful to create conditional C code Macro Description __ BIG ENDIAN__ Expands to 1 indicating the processor accesses data in big endian _ BUILD __ Identifies the build number of the compiler composed of decimal digits for the build number three digits for the major branch number and three digits for the minor branch number For example if you use build 1 22 1 of the compiler _ BUILD _ expands to 1022001 If there is no branch number the branch digits expand to zero For example build 127 results in 127000000 __ CMB Expands to 1 for the MicroBlaze toolset otherwise unrecognized as macro _ DOUBLE _FP__ Expands to 1 if you did not use option no
446. s the absolute value of x x abs labs llabs div ldiv lldiv are defined in stdlib h fma fmal fmaf fma Floating point multiply add Returns x y z Not implemented hypot hypotl hypotf hypot Returns the square root of x2 y2 pow powl powf power Returns x raised to the power y xY sqrt sqrtl sqrtf sqrt Returns the non negative square root of x x0 Manipulation functions copysign nan nextafter nexttoward math h tgmath h Description copysign copysignl copysign Returns the value of x with the sign of y copysignf nan nanl nanf Returns a quiet NaN if available with content indcated through tagp Not implemented nextafter nextafterl nextafter Returns the next representable value in the specified format after x in the nextafterf direction of y Returns y is x y Not implemented nexttoward nexttowardl nexttoward Same as nextafter except that the second argument in all three variants is nexttowardf of type long double Returns y if x y Not implemented 3 9 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Positive difference maximum minimum math h tgmath h Description fdim fdiml fdimf fdim Returns the positive difference between x y Not implemented fmax fmaxl fmaxf fmax Returns the maximum value of their arguments Not implemented fmin fminl fminf fmin Returns the minimum value of their arguments Not implemented Error and gamma Not implemented math h tgmath h Description erf erfl erff e
447. sdata size Default 4 bytes Description With this option you tell the compiler to place all global and static data objects smaller than the specified size bytes into the small data section sdata or small bss section sbss This results in smaller and faster code In total 64kB is available for this kind of addressing Without this option all global and static data objects of 4 bytes and smaller are placed into the small data sections and small bss sections You can still overrule this option with the keywords sdata and __no_sdata for individiual data objects in your source External data that falls within the threshold is not considered part of sdata If you want external data to be part of this too also specify option extern sdata LN If you use option extern sdata you must use the option sdata with the same value for all modules in your application Example To put all global and static data objects with a size of 8 bytes or smaller into the sdata section cmb sdata 8 test c Related information C compiler option extern sdata Section 1 3 Memory Qualifiers 5 47 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler signed bitfields Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable the option Treat int bit fields as signed Command line syntax signed bitfields Descriptio
448. sen optimizations expect to affect ease of debugging Small set of debug information With this suboption only DWARF call frame information and type information are generated This enables you to inspect parameters of nested functions The type information improves debugging You can perform a stack trace but stepping is not possible because debug information on function bodies is not generated You can use this suboption for example to compact libraries Default debug information This provides all debug information you need to debug your application It meets the debugging requirements in most cases without resulting in over sized assembler object files Full debug information With this information extra debug information is generated In extra ordinary cases you may use this debug information for instance if you use your own debugger which makes use of this information With this suboption the resulting assembler object file increases significantly Related information i 5 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler define D Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Preprocessing 3 Select User macro and click on the down arrow in the right pane to expand macro input 4 Click on an empty Macro field and enter a macro name Then click an empty cell to confirm 5 Optionally click in the Value field a
449. sions will be disabled Additionally the following language extensions are supported attributes Attributes introduced by the keyword __ attribute __ can be used on declarations of variables functions types and fields The alias aligned cdecl const constructor deprecated destructor format format_arg init_priority malloc mode naked no_check_memory_ usage no_instrument_function nocommon noreturn packed pure section sentinel stdcall transparent_union unused used visibility volatile and weak attributes are supported pragmas The C compiler supports the same pragmas as the C compiler and some extra pragmas as explained in section 2 9 Pragmas to Control the C Compiler Pragmas give directions to the code generator of the compiler 2 3 C Dialect Accepted The C compiler accepts the C language as defined by the ISO IEC 14882 1998 standard and modified by TC1 for that standard Command line options are also available to enable and disable anachronisms and strict standard conformance checking 2 3 1 Standard Language Features Accepted The following features not in traditional C the C language of The Annotated C Reference Manual by Ellis and Stroustrup ARM but in the standard are implemented e The dependent statement of an if while do while or for is considered to be a scope and the restriction on having such a dependent statement be a declaration is removed e The expression teste
450. so there are no equivalent options in Altium Designer Description Option Suboption Main functions key options Replace or add an object module r a b c u v Extract an object module from the library X 0 V Delete object module from library d V Move object module to another position m a b v Print a table of contents of the library t s0 s1 Print object module to standard output p Suboptions Append or move new modules after existing module name a name Append or move new modules before existing module name b name Create library without notification if library does not exist c Preserve last modified date from the library 0 Print symbols in library modules s 0 1 Replace only newer modules u Verbose vV Miscellaneous Display options Display version header V Read options from file f file Suppress warnings above level n wn Table 5 1 Overview of librarian options and suboptions 5 303 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Librarian Command line syntax Description Displays an overview of all command line options Example The following invocations display a list of the available command line options tlb tlb Related information i 5 304 Tool Options Librarian Librarian d Command line syntax d v Description Delete the specified object modules from a library With the suboption v the librarian shows which files are remo
451. solute ranged e Ifa reserved section has attributes r rw x rx or rwx and no fill pattern is defined the section is filled with zeros If no attributes are set the section is created as a scratch section attributes ws no image fill_spec fill fill_values fill_values expr expr lt expr gt gt 9 aggregate _section_statement lt section_statement gt gt group_descr if statement section_creation_statement group_descr group lt group_name gt 1 lt group specs gt 9 1 section_statement e For every group with a name the linker defines a label e No two groups for address spaces of a core can have the same group_name group_specs group_spec lt group_spec gt 0 8 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference group_spec group _alignment attributes copy nocopy group_load_address fill lt fill _values gt 1 group_page group_run_address group_type allow_cross_references priority number e The allow cross references property is only allowed for overlay groups e Sub groups inherit all properties from a parent group group_alignment align expr attributes attributes lt attribute gt gt 1 attribute r readable sections w writable sections x executable code sections i initialized sections s scratch sections b blanked cleared sections group_load_address load_addr lt load_or_run_addr gt
452. source The C compiler sends the preprocessed output to the file name pre where name is the name of the C source file being compiled Altium Designer also compiles the C source On the command line the control program stops after preprocessing If you also want to compile the C source you can specify the option no preprocessing only In this case the control program calls the compiler twice once with option preprocess and once for a regular compilation With preprocess comments you tell the preprocessor to keep the comments from the C source file in the preprocessed output With preprocess includes the compiler will generate a list of all included source files The preprocessor output is discarded With preprocess list the compiler will generate a list of all macro definitions The preprocessor output is discarded With preprocess make the compiler will generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile The information is written to a file with extension d The preprocessor output is discarded The default target name is the basename of the input file with the extension obj With the option make target you can specify a target name which overrules the default target name With preprocess noline you tell the preprocessor to strip the line source position information lines starting with line These lines are normally processed by the assembler and not needed in the preprocessed output When you leave these l
453. special and localized meaning related to the TASKING versions of certain header files and is unlikely to be of much use to end users of the TASKING C compiler Related information C compiler option namespaces Support for namespaces Section 2 5 Namespace Support in chapter C Language 5 154 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler variadic macros Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option variadic macros to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax variadic macros Default macros with a variable number of arguments are not allowed Description Allow macros with a variable number of arguments Related information dE C compiler option extended variadic macros Allow extended variadic macros 5 155 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler version V Menu entry Command line only Command line syntax version V Description Display version information The C compiler ignores all other options or input files Related information J 5 156 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 Enable the option Treat warnin
454. ss Record 16 or 32 bit formats e Extended Linear Address Record 32 bit format only e Start Linear Address Record 32 bit format only By default the linker generates records in the 32 bit format 4 byte addresses General Record Format In the output file the record format is length offset type content Ea Where is the record header length is the record length which specifies the number of bytes of the content field This value occupies one byte two hexadecimal digits The linker outputs records of 255 bytes 32 hexadecimal digits or less that is ength is never greater than FFH offset is the starting load offset specifying an absolute address in memory where the data is to be located when loaded by a tool This field is two bytes long This field is only used for Data Records In other records this field is coded as four ASCII zero characters 0000 type is the record type This value occupies one byte two hexadecimal digits The record types are Byte Type Record type 00 Data 01 End of File 02 Extended segment address not used 03 Start segment address not used 04 Extended linear address 32 bit 05 Start linear address 32 bit content is the information contained in the record This depends on the record type checksum is the record checksum The linker computes the checksum by first adding the binary representation of the previous bytes from length to content The linker then
455. st of symbols 5 311 print module 5 308 replace module 5 309 warning level 5 313 Libraries linking 5 198 5 218 Library specifying 5 207 5 208 5 253 5 254 5 255 Lifetime 5 95 linear_switch 1 11 Linker macro 5 193 Linker options 5 190 5 200 case insensitive 5 191 chip output 5 192 define 5 193 diag 5 194 error file 5 195 error limit 5 196 extern 5 197 extra verbose 5 227 first library first 5 198 global type checking 5 199 help 5 200 hex format 5 201 hex record size 5 202 ignore default library path 5 208 import object 5 203 include directory 5 204 incremental 5 205 keep output files 5 206 library 5 207 library directory 5 208 link only 5 209 Index Isl check 5 210 Isl dump 5 211 Is file 5 212 map file 5 213 map file format 5 214 misra c report 5 215 munch 5 216 no rescan 5 218 no rom copy 5 219 no warnings 5 220 non romable 5 217 optimize 5 221 option file 5 222 output 5 223 print mangled symbols 5 224 strip debug 5 225 user provided initialization code 5 226 verbose 5 227 version 5 228 warnings as errors 5 229 c 5 192 D 5 193 d 5 212 e 5 197 f 5 222 I 5 204 i 5 226 k 5 206 L 5 208 I 5 207 M 5 213 m 5 214 N 5 219 O 5 221 0 5 223 P 5 224 r 5 205 S 5 225 V 5 228 V 5 227 w 5 227 w 5 220 diagnostics 5 220 5 2
456. statement2 select_section_statement group _descr2 lt section_statement2 gt group_descr2 group lt group_name gt 1 group_specs2 section_statement2 group_specs2 group _spec2 lt group_spec2 gt 0 group_spec2 group_alignment attributes load_addr section_setup section_setup space ref lt section_setup_item gt gt section_setup_item vector _table_ statement reserved_range stack_def 8 4 Expression Evaluation Only constant expressions are allowed including sizes but not addresses of sections in object files All expressions are evaluated with 64 bit precision integer arithmetic The result of an expression can be absolute or relocatable A symbol you assign is created as an absolute symbol 8 13 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 8 5 Semantics of the Architecture Definition Keywords in the architecture definition architecture extends endianness big little bus mau width map space id mau align page_size page direction low_to_high high _to_low stack min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id heap min_size grows low_to_high high _to_low align fixed id copytable align copy_unit dest page vector table vector _size size id_symbol_ prefix run_addr template template_symbol vector_prefix ill no_inline copy vector id 211 loop reserved start_address run_addr symbol map 8 14 Linker Script Language
457. status as the return value Status can also be specified with the predefined macros EXIT_SUCCES or EXIT_FAILURE Same as exit but no registered by the atexit function or signal handlers registerd by the signal function are called Libraries getenv s system s Searching and sorting bsearch key base n size cmp qsort base n size cmp Integer arithmetic int abs j long labs j long long llabs j div_t div x y ldiv_t ldiv x y lldiv_t lldiv x y Searches an environment list for a string s Returns a pointer to the contents of s NOTE this function is not implemented because there is no OS Passes the string s to the environment for execution NOTE this function is not implemented because there is no OS This function searches in an array of n members for the object pointed to by key The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The given array must be sorted in ascending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Returns a pointer to the matching member in the array or NULL when not found This function sorts an array of n members using the quick sort algorithm The initial base of the array is given by base The size of each member is specified by size The array is sorted in as cending order according to the results of the function pointed to by cmp Compute the absolute value of an int long int and long long intj resepecti
458. structs a value of type wctype_t that describes a class of wide characters identified by the string property If property identifies a valid class of wide characters according to the LC_TYPE category see section 3 2 13 ocale h of the current locale a non zero value is returned that can be used as an argument in the iswctype function Tests whether the wide character wc is a member of the class represented by wctype_t desc Returns a non zero value if tested true Function Equivalent to locale specific test iswalnum wc iswctype wc wctype alnum iswalpha wc iswctype wc wctype alpha iswentrl wc iswctype wc wctype cntr1 iswdigit wc iswctype wc wctype digit iswgraph wc iswctype wc wctype graph iswlower wc iswctype wc wctype lower iswprint wc iswctype wc wctype print iswpunct wc iswctype wc wctype punct iswspace wc iswctype wc wctype space iswupper wc iswctype wc wctype upper iswxditig wc iswctype wc wctype xdigit wctrans property towctrans wc desc Constructs a value of type wctype_t that describes a mapping between wide characters identi fied by the string property If property identifies a valid mapping of wide characters according to the LC_TYPE category see section 3 2 13 ocale h of the current locale a non zero value is returned that can be used as an argument in the towctrans function Transforms wide characte
459. support for namespaces When you used option embedded c namespaces are disabled With option namespaces you can enable support for namespaces in this case The macro __ NAMESPACES is defined when namespace support is enabled Related information C compiler option embedded c Embedded C compliancy tests C compiler option using sid Implicit use of the std namespace Section 2 5 Namespace Support in chapter C Language 5 99 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no arg dep lookup Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no arg dep lookup to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no arg dep lookup Default argument dependent lookup of unqualified function names is performed Description With this option you disable argument dependent lookup of unqualified function names Related information f 5 100 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no array new and delete Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no array new and delete to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no array new and delete Default array new and delete are suppor
460. t alignment of objects or structure members to n bytes 1 3 Memory Qualifiers You can use static memory qualifiers to allocate static objects in a particular part of the addressing space of the processor or to use a specific addressing mode You can specify the following memory types Qualifier Description __no_sdata Direct addressable RAM __sdata Direct short near addressable RAM Small data 64k __sfr For compatibilty with special function registers _ rom Data defined with this qualifier is placed in ROM This section is excluded from automatic initialization by the startup code __rom always implies the type qualifier const Table 1 2 Memory Type Qualifiers for the MicroBlaze MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference By default all global and static data objects smaller than 4 bytes are placed in small data sections With the _ no_sdata and ___sdata keywords you overrule this default See C compiler option sdata size in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Too Options to change the size beneath which data objects are placed in small memory Examples using explicit memory types _ rom char text No smoking long long 1 1234 long long reserved in data by default __sdata long long k 1234 long long reserved in sdata The memory type qualifiers are treated like any other data type specifier such as unsigned This means the examples above can also be declared as char _ r
461. t already exist it will be created A weak external reference is resolved by the linker when a global or weak definition is found in one of the object files However a weak reference will not cause the extraction of a module from a library to resolve the reference You can overrule a weak definition with a GLOBAL definition in another module The linker will not complain about the duplicate definition and ignore the weak definition Only program labels and symbols defined with EQU can be made weak Example LOOPA EQU 1 definition of symbol LOOPA GLOBAL LOOPA LOOPA will be globally accessible by other modules WEAK LOOPA mark symbol LOOPA as weak se Related information d gt EXTERN Import global section symbol GLOBAL Declare global section symbol 4 44 Assembly Language 4 9 Macro Operations Macros provide a shorthand method for inserting a repeated pattern of code or group of instructions You can define the pattern as a macro and then call the macro at the points in the program where the pattern would repeat Some patterns contain variable entries which change for each repetition of the pattern Others are subject to conditional assembly When a macro is called the assembler executes the macro and replaces the call by the resulting in line source statements In line means that all replacements act as if they are on the same line as the macro call The generated statements may contain substit
462. t attempt to open it fails Calls _unlink FSS implementation Write a sequence of characters to a file Calls write FSS implementation Many in wchar h represent the wide character variant of other so these are discussed together See sections 3 2 22 sidio h and wehar h 3 2 23 stdlib h and wehar h 3 2 24 string h and wehar h and 3 2 25 time h and wchar h The remaining are described below They perform conversions between multi byte characters and wide characters In these ps points to struct mobstate_t which holds the conversion state information necessary to convert between sequences of multibyte characters and wide characters typedef struct wchar_t wc_value wide character value solved so far unsigned short n_bytes number of bytes of solved multibyte unsigned short encoding encoding rule for wide character lt gt mbstate_t multibyte conversion When multibyte characters larger than 1 byte are used this struct will be used to store the conversion information when not all the bytes of a particular multibyte character have been read from the source In this implementation multi byte characters are 1 byte long MB_CUR_MAX and MB_LEN_MAX are defined as 1 and this will never occur mbsinit ps Determines whether the object pointed to by ps is an initial conversion state Returns a non zero value if so mbsrtowcs pwes src n ps Restartable version of mbstowcs See section 3 2
463. t causes a formfeed the next source line is printed on the next page in the list file You can omit an argument by using two adjacent commas If the remaining arguments after an argument are all empty you can omit them A label is not allowed with this directive Example PAGE formfeed the next source line is printed on the next page in the list file PAGE 96 set pagewidth to 96 Note that you can omit the last four arguments PAGE 5 insert five blank lines at the top Note that you can omit the last two arguments Related information Gls TITLE Set program title in header of assembler list file Assembler option list file Generate list file in Section 5 3 Assembler Options of Chapter Tool Options 4 33 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference REPEAT ENDREP Syntax label REPEAT expression ENDREP Description With the REPEAT ENDREP directive you can repeat a sequence of assembly source lines With expression you specify the number of times the loop is repeated If you specify label it gets the value of the location counter at the start of the directive processing Example In this example the loop is repeated 3 times Effectively the preprocessor repeats the source lines DB 10 three times then the assembler assembles the result REPEAT 3 DB 10 assembly source lines ENDREP Related information Gs FOR ENDFOR Repeat sequence of source lines n times 4 34
464. t event or service request occurs The MicroBlaze supports five types of exceptions The next table lists the types of exceptions and the processor mode that is used to process that exception When an exception occurs execution is forced from a fixed memory address corresponding to the type of exception These fixed addresses are called the exception vectors Exception type Vector Return register Return Function type qualifier address instruction Reset Ox00000000 __interrupt 0x00000000 User vector exception Ox00000008 r15 rtsd __interrupt 0x00000008 Interrupt 0x00000010 r14 rtid __interrupt 0x00000010 Break 0x00000018 r16 rtbd __interrupt 0x00000018 Hardware exception 0x00000020 r17 rted __interrupt 0x00000020 Table 1 7 Exception processing modes 1 9 5 1 Defining an Interrupt Service Routine _interrupt With the function type qualifier interrupt you can declare a function as an interrupt service routine The function type qualifier interrupt takes one vector address as argument With the interrupt keyword a jump to the actual interrupt handler is caused Interrupt functions cannot return anything and must have a void argument type list void _ interrupt vector_address isr void Example void _interrupt 0x00000008 my_handler void Suppress generation of interrupt vectors When you define an interupt service routine the compile
465. t to map them a bus or another address space and the offset address in the destination e The dest argument specifies the destination This can be a bus or another address space only for a space to space mapping This argument is required e The src_offset argument specifies the offset of the source addresses In combination with size this specifies the range of address that are mapped By default the source offset is Ox0000 e The size argument specifies the number of addresses that are mapped This argument is required e The dest_offset argument specifies the position in the destination to which the specified range of addresses is mapped By default the destination offset is Ox0000 If you are mapping a bus to another bus the number of data lines of each bus may differ In this case you have to specify a range of source data lines you want to map sre_dbits begin end and the range of destination data lines you want to map them to dest_dbits first last e The srce_dbits argument specifies a range of data lines of the source bus By default all data lines are mapped e The dest_dbits argument specifies a range of data lines of the destination bus By default all data lines from the source bus are mapped on the data lines of the destination bus starting with line 0 Linker Script Language From space to space If you map an address space to another address space nesting you can do this by mapping the subspace to the co
466. ta and __sdata for individiual data objects in your source db See C compiler option sdata in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options section name suffix f m fm endsection Rename sections by adding a suffix to all section names specified with name or restore default section naming If you specify only a suffix without a name the suffix is added to all section names See C compiler option rename sections in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in Chapter Tool Options See assembler directive SECTION Start or continue section in section 4 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language C Language section_code_init section_no_code_init Copy or do not copy code sections from ROM to RAM at application startup section_const_init section_no_const_init Copy or do not copy read only data sections from ROM to RAM at application startup source nosource With these pragmas you can choose which C source lines must be listed as comments in assembly output Gb See also C compiler option source s stdinc This pragma changes the behavior of the include directive When set the C compiler options include directory and no stdinc are ignored linear_switch jump_switch binary_switch smart_switch With these pragmas you can overrule the compiler chosen switch method linear_switch Force jump chain code A jump chain is comparable with an if else if
467. te a reserved section or an output section or modify special sections like a stack or a heap Because you cannot define these sections in the input files you must use the linker to create them Stack The keyword stack tells the linker to reserve memory for the stack The name for the stack section refers to the stack as defined in the architecture definition If no name was specified in the architecture definition the default name is stack With the keyword size you can specify the size for the stack If the size is not specified the linker uses the size given by the min_size argument as defined for the stack in the architecture definition Normally the linker automatically tries to maximize the size unless you specified the keyword fixed group stack mystack size 2k The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the stack _1c_ub_stack_name for the begin of the stack and _1c_ue_stack_name for the end of the stack The linker allocates space for the stack when there is a reference to either of the labels See also the stack keyword in section 8 5 3 Defining Address Spaces Heap The keyword heap tells the linker to reserve a dynamic memory range for the malloc function Optionally you can assign a name to the heap section With the keyword size you can change the size for the heap If the size is not specified the linker uses the size given by the min_size argument as defined for the heap in the
468. te definitions This is the default all Instantiate all template entities declared or referenced in the compilation unit For each fully instantiated template class all of its member functions and static data members will be instantiated whether or not they were used Non member template functions will be instantiated even if the only reference was a declaration local Similar to instantiate used except that the functions are given internal linkage This is intended to provide a very simple mechanism for those getting started with templates The compiler will instantiate the functions that are used in each compilation unit as local functions and the program will link and run correctly barring problems due to multiple copies of local static variables However one may end up with many copies of the instantiated functions so this is not suitable for production use You cannot use instantiate local in conjunction with automatic template instantiation Related information C compiler option no auto instantiation Disable automatic C instantiation Section 2 6 Template Instantiation in chapter C Language 5 90 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler io streams Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select C Language 3 Enable the option Support for I O streams Command line syntax io streams Description A
469. te space or the keyword may be immediately followed by option When the second form is used there may not be any white space on either side of the equal sign Options can have flags or sub options To switch a flag on use a lowercase letter or a ongflag To switch a flag off use an uppercase letter or a ongflag Separate longflags with commas The following two invocations are equivalent cpmb Ecp test cc cpmb preprocess comments noline test cc When you do not specify an option a default value may become active The priority of the options is left to right when two options conflict the first most left one takes effect The options define and undefine are not considered conflicting options so they are processed left to right for each source file You can overrule the default output file name with the option output file 5 59 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler alternative tokens Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option alternative tokens to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax alternative tokens Description Enable recognition of alternative tokens This controls recognition of the digraph tokens in C and controls recognition of the operator keywords e g not and bitand etc Example To enable operator keywo
470. ted Description Disable support for array new and delete The macro__ ARRAY OPERATORS is defined when array new and delete is enabled Related information J 5 101 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no auto instantiation Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no auto instantiation to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no auto instantiation Default the C compiler automatically instantiates templates Description With this option automatic instantiation of templates is disabled Related information C compiler option instantiate Instantiation mode Section 2 6 Template Instantiation in chapter C Language 5 102 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no bool Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no bool to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no bool Default bool is recognized as a keyword Description Disable recognition of the bool keyword The macro _BOOL is defined when bool is recognized as a keyword Related information i 5 103 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler no class name inje
471. ted version often such a specialization provides a more efficient representation for a particular data type Since the compiler cannot know when compiling a reference to a template entity if a specialization for that entity will be provided in another compilation it cannot do the instantiation automatically in any source file that references it e C templates can be exported i e declared with the keyword export Such templates can be used in a translation unit that does not contain the definition of the template to instantiate The instantiation of such a template must be delayed until the template definition has been found e The language also dictates that template functions that are not referenced should not be compiled that in fact such functions might contain semantic errors that would prevent them from being compiled Therefore a reference to a template class should not automatically instantiate all the member functions of that class It should be noted that certain template entities are always instantiated when used e g inline functions From these requirements one can see that if the compiler is responsible for doing all the instantiations automatically it can only do so on a program wide basis That is the compiler cannot make decisions about instantiation of template entities until it has seen all the source files that make up a complete program This C compiler provides an instantiation mechanism that does automatic i
472. teger If string2 does not occur in string7 the last string postition 1 is returned With start you can specify the starting position of the search If you do not specify start the search is started from the beginning of string7 Example ID set STRPOS TASKING ASK ID ID set STRPOS TASKING BUG ID 7 USE_BARREL_SHIFT Returns 1 if hardware barrel shift is available O otherwise USE_DIVIDE Returns 1 if hardware divide is available 0 otherwise USE_MULTIPLY Returns 1 if hardware multiply is available 0 otherwise 4 8 Assembler Directives An assembler directive is simply a message to the assembler Assembler directives are not translated into machine instructions but can produce data There are three types of assembler directives e Assembler directives that tell the assembler how to go about translating instructions into machine code This is the most typical form of assembly directives Typically they tell the assembler where to put a program in memory what space to allocate for variables and allow you to initialize memory with data When the assembly source is assembled a location counter in the assembler keeps track of where the code and data is to go in memory The following directives fall under this group Assembly control directives Symbol definition directives Data definition Storage allocation directives HLL directives e Directives that are interpreted by the m
473. ters enclosed in single or double quotes constitue an ASCII string Strings between double quotes allow symbol substitution by a DEFINE directive whereas strings between single quotes are always literal strings Both types of strings can contain escape characters Strings constants in expressions are evaluated to a number each character is replaced by its ASCII value Strings in expressions can have a size of up to 8 characters or less depending on the operand of an instruction or directive any subsequent characters in the string are ignored In this case the assembler issues a warning An exception to this rule is when a string is used in a DB assembler directive in that case all characters result in a constant value of the specified size Null strings have a value of 0 Square brackets delimit a substring operation in the form string offset length offset is the start position within string length is the length of the desired substring Both values may not exceed the size of string Examples ABCD 0x41424344 ee Bal to enclose a quote double it A BC or to enclose a quote escape it AB 1 0x4143 string used in expression ey null string TASKING 0 4 results in the substring TASK 4 4 Assembly Language 4 6 3 Expression Operators The next table shows the assembler operators They are ordered according to their precedence Operators of the same precedence are evaluated
474. th this option you can specify the path where your include files are located A relative path will be relative to the current directory Example Suppose that the C source file test c contains the following lines include lt stdio h gt include myinc h You can call the control program as follows comb include directory myinclude test c First the compiler looks for the file stdio h in the directory myinc lude relative to the current directory If it was not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory The compiler now looks for the file myinc h in the directory where test c is located If the file is not there the compiler searches in the directory myinclude If it was still not found the compiler searches in the environment variable and then in the default include directory Related information C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path C compiler option include file Include file at the start of a compilation Section 2 4 How the Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual 5 247 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program instantiate Command line syntax instantiate mode You can specify the following modes used default all local Description Control instantiation of external template entities External template entities are external that is non inlin
475. the control program with the option option file file f Defining macros with this option instead of in the C source is for example useful to compile or assemble conditional source as shown in the example below The control program passes the option define D to the compiler and the assembler Example Consider the following C program with conditional code to compile a demo program and a real program void main void if DEMO demo_func compile for the demo program else real_func compile for the real program endif You can now use a macro definition to set the DEMO flag With the control program this looks as follows ccmb define DEMO test c ccmb define DEMO 1 test c Note that both invocations have the same effect The next example shows how to define a macro with arguments Note that the macro name and definition are placed between double quotes because otherwise the spaces would indicate a new option comb D MAX A B A gt B A B test c Related information Control Program option undefine Undefine preprocessor macro Control Program option option file Read options from file 5 235 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program dep file Command line syntax dep file file Description With this option you tell the compiler to generate dependency lines that can be used in a Makefile In contrast to the option preprocess make the
476. the PCH file is reused e No references to predefined macros DATE or TIME _ may have appeared e Nouse of the line preprocessing directive may have appeared e pragma no_pch see below must not have appeared e The code preceding the header stop point must have introduced a sufficient number of declarations to justify the overhead associated with precompiled headers The minimum number of declarations required is 1 When the host system does not support memory mapping so that everything to be saved in the precompiled header file is assigned to preallocated memory MS Windows two additional restrictions apply e The total memory needed at the header stop point cannot exceed the size of the block of preallocated memory e No single program entity saved can exceed 16384 the preallocation unit When a precompiled header file is produced it contains in addition to the snapshot of the compiler state some information that can be checked to determine under what circumstances it can be reused This includes e The compiler version including the date and time the compiler was built e The current directory i e the directory in which the compilation is occurring e The command line options e The initial sequence of preprocessing directives from the primary source file including include directives e The date and time of the header files specified in include directives This information comprises the PCH prefix The prefix informa
477. the command line option long long is specified the extensions for the long long and unsigned long long types are enabled e Zero length array types specified by 0 are supported These are complete types of size zero e C99 style flexible array members are accepted In addition the last field of a class type have a class type whose last field is a flexible array member In GNU C mode flexible array members are treated exactly like zero length arrays and can therefore appear anywhere in the class type e The C99 _Pragma operator is supported e The gcc built in lt stdarg h gt and lt varargs h gt facilities __builtin_va_list _ builtin_va_arg are accepted e The sizeof operator is applicable to void and to function types and evaluates to the value one e Variables can be redeclared with different top level cv qualifiers the new qualification is merged into existing qualifiers For example extern int volatile x int const x 32 x is now const volatile e The assembler name of variables and routines can be specified For example int counter _asm_ counter_vl 0 e Register variables can be mapped on specific registers using the asm keyword register int i asm eax Map i onto register eax e The keyword inline is ignored with a warning on variable declarations and on block extern function declarations e Excess aggregate initializers are ignored with a warning struct S int a b struct S al
478. the compiler should perform With the pragma optimize flags you can set an optimization level for a specific part of the C source This overrules the general optimization level that is set in the C compiler Optimization page in the Project Options dialog command line option optimize O The general syntax for pragmas is pragma pragma spec ON OFF DEFAULT RESTORE or _Pragma pragma spec ON OFF DEFAULT RESTORE Pragmas marked with accept the following special arguments default set the pragma to the initial value restore restore the previous value of the pragma Pragmas marked with are boolean flags and accept the following arguments on switch the flag on same as without argument off switch the flag off The compiler recognizes the following pragmas other pragmas are ignored alias symbol defined_symbol Define symbol as an alias for definined_symbol It corresponds to an equate directive equ at assembly level The symbol should not be defined elsewhere and defined_symbo should be defined with static storage duration not extern or automatic Gb See assembler directive EQU in section 4 8 2 Assembler Directives in Chapter Assembly Language clear noclear By default uninitialized global or static variables are cleared to zero on startup With pragma noclear this step is skipped Pragma clear resumes normal behavior d gt See C compiler option noclear in section 5 1 C Compiler Options in
479. the left operand is not evaluated in such cases enum types can contain values larger than can be contained in an int Default arguments of function templates and member functions of class templates are instantiated only when the default argument is used in a call String literals and wide string literals have const type Class name injection is implemented Argument dependent Koenig lookup of function names is implemented Class and function names declared only in unqualified friend declarations are not visible except for functions found by argument dependent lookup A void expression can be specified on a return statement in a void function Function try blocks i e try blocks that are the top level statements of functions constructors or destructors are implemented Universal character set escapes e g uabcd are implemented On a call in which the expression to the left of the opening parenthesis has class type overload resolution looks for conversion functions that can convert the class object to pointer to function types and each such pointed to surrogate function type is evaluated alongside any other candidate functions Dependent name lookup in templates is implemented Nondependent names are looked up only in the context of the template definition Dependent names are also looked up in the instantiation context via argument dependent lookup Value initialization is implemented This form of initialization is indi
480. the locate phase You can select the input sections with select statements You can use groups inside output sections but you can only set the align attributes and load_addr attributes The fi11 field contains a bit pattern that the linker writes to all unused space in the output section When all input sections have an image code data you must specify a fill pattern If you do not specify a fill pattern all input sections must be scratch sections The fill pattern is aligned at the start of the output section As with a reserved section you can use the attributes field to set the access type of the output section group section myoutput size 4k attributes rw fill Oxaa select myinput1 select myinput2 8 31 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference The available room for input sections is determined by the size blocksize and overflow fields With the keyword size you specify the fixed size of the output section Input sections are placed from output section start towards higher addresses offsets When the end of the output section is reached and one or more input sections are not yet placed an error is emitted If however the overflow field is set to another output section remaining sections are located as if they were selected for the overflow output section group section tskl_ data size 4k attributes rw f1i11 0 overflow overflow_data select data tsk1 sec
481. tion With this option you tell the control program to treat all cc files as C files instead of C files This means that the control program does not call the C compiler and forces the linker to link C libraries Related information d Control program option force c Force C compilation and linking 5 241 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program force c Command line syntax force c Description With this option you tell the control program to treat all c files as C files instead of C files This means that the control program calls the C compiler prior to the C compiler and forces the linker to link C libraries Related information d Control program option force c Treat C files as C files 5 242 Tool Options Control Program Control Program force munch Command line syntax force munch Description With this option you force the control program to activate the muncher in the pre locate phase Related information J 5 243 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program format Command line syntax format format You can specify the following formats IEEE IEEE 695 ELF ELF DWARF IHEX Intel Hex SREC Motorola S records Description With this option you specify the output format for the resulting absolute object file The default output format is ELF DWARF which can directly be used by the debugger If you choose IHEX or SREC you c
482. tion template directory to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax template directory directory Description Specifies a directory name to be placed on the exported template search path The directories are used to find the definitions of exported templates et files and are searched in the order in which they are specified on the command line The current directory is always the first entry on the search path Example To add the directory export to the exported template search path enter cpmb template directory export test cc Related information dE Section 2 6 5 Exported Templates in chapter C Language 5 147 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler timing Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option timing to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax timing Default no timing information is generated Description Generate compilation timing information This option causes the C compiler to display the amount of CPU time and elapsed time used by each phase of the compilation and a total for the entire compilation Example cpmb timing test cc processed 180 lines at 8102 lines min Related information J 5 148 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler trace includes Menu entry 1 From
483. tion tsk2 data size 4k attributes rw f1i11 0 overflow overflow_data select data tsk2 section overflow data size 4k attributes rx i11 0 With the keyword blocksize the size of the output section will adapt to the size of its content For example group flash_area run_addr 0x10000 section flash_code blocksize 4k attributes rx i11 0 select flash If the content of the section is 1 mau the size will be 4k if the content is 11k the section will be 12k etc If you use size in combination with blocksize the size value is used as default minimal size for this section If it is omitted the default size will be of blocksize It is not allowed to omit both size and blocksize from the section definition The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section _1c_ub_name for the start and_1c_ue_name for the end of the output section Copy table The keyword copytable tells the linker to select a section that is used as copy table The content of the copy table is created by the linker It contains the start address and length of all sections that should be initialized by the startup code The linker creates two labels to mark the begin and end of the section _lc_ub_table for the start and_1c_ue_table for the end of the copy table The linker generates a copy table when a reference to either of the section labels exists in one of the input object
484. tion and writes it to separate files with suffix ms One file is written for each input file or MIL library specified on the command line The ms files are only updated on a change With option mil split you can perform application wide optimizations during the frontend phase by specifying all modules at once and still invoke the backend phase one module at a time to reduce the total compilation time Related information d gt C compiler option mil mil split 5 258 Tool Options Control Program Control Program no auto instantiation Command line syntax no auto instantiation Default the C compiler automatically instantiates templates Description With this option automatic instantiation of templates is disabled Related information Control program option instantiate Set instantiation mode Section 2 6 Template Instantiation in chapter C Language 5 259 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program no default libraries Command line syntax no default libraries Description By default the control program specifies the standard C libraries C99 and run time library to the linker With this option you tell the control program not to specify the standard C libraries and run time library to the linker In this case you must specify the libraries you want to link to the linker with the option I ibrary_name The control program recognizes the option I as an option for the linker a
485. tion file Definition section Symbol Referenced in l cstart obj text libe 27 _START hello obj hello obj text 2 main cstart obj Fr nnn _init hello obj RIS E k ke ke ke de hede e IS IIIS IE IRI IIE IE IE IEICE IE IE ICI IISA IE IA II IAI I main printloop printf printf printf _doprint _doprint_int c _emitchar _doprint_int c _putnumber _doprint_int c _emitchar _doprint_int c _putstring strlen _doprint_int c _ltoa _doprint_int c _putstring _doflt Cal Graph eter A e e A e A k Ae e K e K e A E e K e A e A EIEIO IEE ISI ISIE I III EE IIe List File Formats FEISS ICI I ICICI IOI ICIS IOI IGFET Locate Res uT t AA a ia k e e e e k A e aida a I E E III e e R ICCC I ICICI RR I IA RR IIIA Task entry address Space system sw main MAU 8bit Fr a nh Chip Group Section Size MAU Space addr Chip addr system xrom text libc 28 0x00000008 0x0 0x0 system xrom data 323 0x0000000e 0x00000008 0x00000008 system xrom data libc 324 0x000000c8 0x00000018 0x00000018 system xrom data libc 325 0x0000000c 0x000000e0 0x000000e0 system xrom rodata libe 51 0x00000034 0x000000ec 0x000000ec system xrom text 2 0x00000034 0x00000120 0x00000120 system xrom table 321 0x00000041 0x00001a68 0x00001a68 system xram anchor_r13 sdata 3 0x00000
486. tion of a given source file can be compared to the prefix information of a PCH file to determine whether the latter is applicable to the current compilation As an illustration consider two source files a ce include xxx h ae Start of code b ce include xxx h Start of code When a cc is compiled with pch a precompiled header file named a pch is created Then when b cc is compiled or when a cc is recompiled the prefix section of a pch is read in for comparison with the current source file If the command line options are identical if xxx h has not been modified and so forth then instead of opening xxx h and processing it line by line the C compiler reads in the rest of a pch and thereby establishes the state for the rest of the compilation It may be that more than one PCH file is applicable to a given compilation If so the largest i e the one representing the most preprocessing directives from the primary source file is used For instance consider a primary source file that begins with include xxx h include yyy h include zzz h If there is one PCH file for xxx h and a second for xxx h and yyy h the latter will be selected assuming both are applicable to the current compilation Moreover after the PCH file for the first two headers is read in and the third is compiled a new PCH file for all three headers may be created When a precompiled header file is created it takes the n
487. tion returns 1 if the section section_name exists in one or more object file O otherwise If the section is not present in input object files but generated from LSL the result of this function is undefined To check whether the section mysection exists in one of the object files that is specified to the linker exists mysection max int max expr expr Returns the value of the expression that has the largest value To get the highest value of two symbols max Syml sym2 8 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference ming int min expr expr Returns the value of the expression hat has the smallest value To get the lowest value of two symbols min syml sym2 sizeof int sizeof size_id Returns the size of the object group section or memory the identifier refers to To get the size of the section asection sizeof sect asection LN The group and sect arguments only works in assignments The mem argument can be used anywhere in section layouts 8 3 6 LSL Definitions in the Linker Script File description lt definition gt 1 definition architecture_definition derivative _definition board_spec section definition section_setup e Atleast one architecture_definition must be present in the LSL file 8 3 7 Memory and Bus Definitions mem_def memory mem_name lt mem descr gt 7 e Amem def defines a memory with the mem_name as a unique name
488. tion the linker first tries to extract the symbol from the first library a Lib Note that routines in b lib that call other routines that are present in both a lib and b 1ib are now also resolved from a lib Related information d gt Linker option no rescan Rescan libraries to solve unresolved externals 5 198 Tool Options Linker Linker global type checking Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option global type checking to the Additional linker options field Command line syntax global type checking Description Use this option when you want the linker to check the types of variable and function references against their definitions using DWARF 2 or DWARF 3 debug information This check should give the same result as the C compiler when you use MIL linking Related information J 5 199 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker help Menu entry Command line syntax help options Description Displays an overview of all command line options When you specify the argument options you can list detailed option descriptions Example The following invocations all display a list of the available command line options lkmb lkmb help lkmb To see a detailed description of the available options enter lkmb help options 5 200
489. tions dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Language 3 Enable or disable the following options e Allow GNU C extensions e Allow C style comments in ISO C90 mode only available when ISO C 90 is selected e Check assignment of string literal to non const string pointer e Allow optimization across volatile access Command line syntax language flags Afflags You can set the following flags gcc g G Enable a number of gcc extensions comments p P Allow C style comments in C source code volatile v V Do not optimize across volatile access strings x X Relaxed const check for string literals The option language A is the equivalent of AGPVX which disables all language extensions The default is AGpVx Description With this option you control the language extensions the compiler accepts Default the C compiler allows all language extensions With Allow C style comments in ISO C90 mode language comments you tell the compiler to allow C style comments in ISO C90 mode option c90 In ISO C99 mode this style of comments is always accepted With Check assignment of string literal to non const string pointer language strings you tell the compiler to generate a warning when you assign a constant string to a non constant string pointer When you disable this option the following example produces no warning char p void main void p hello With o
490. to use the generated file For example when you know that a particular error does not result in a corrupt object file or when you want to inspect the output file or send it to Altium support Related information J 5 206 Tool Options Linker Linker library l Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the Linker entry and select Libraries 3 Enable the option Link default C libraries Command line syntax library name Iname Description With this option you tell the linker to use system library name Lib where name is a string The linker first searches for system libraries in any directories specified with library directory then in the directories specified with the environment variable LIBMB unless you used the option ignore default library path Example To search in the system library cmba 1ib C library lkmb test obj mylib lib library cmba The linker links the file test obj and first looks in mylib 1ib in the current directory only then in the system library cmba 1ib to resolve unresolved symbols Related information d Linker option library directory Additional search path for system libraries Section 6 4 Linking with Libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 207 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Linker library directory L ignore default library path Menu entr
491. trailing comma in the definition of an enumeration type is silently accepted a feature carried over from C99 enum E e 2 4 GNU Extensions The C compiler can be configured to support the GNU C mode command line option g In this mode many extensions provided by the GNU C compiler are accepted The following extensions are provided in GNU C mode Extended designators are accepted Compound literals are accepted 2 5 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference e Non standard anonymous unions are accepted e The typeof operator is supported This operator can take an expression or a type like the sizeof operator but parentheses are always required and expands to the type of the given entity It can be used wherever a typedef name is allowed typeof 2 2 3 d Declares a double typeof int i Declares an int This can be useful in macro and template definitions e The __extension__ keyword is accepted preceding declarations and certain expressions It has no effect on the meaning of a program __extension_ inline int f int a return a gt 0 a 2 __extension_ l a e In all GNU C modes and in GNU C modes with gnu_version lt 30400 the type modifiers signed unsigned long and short can be used with typedef types if the specifier is valid with the underlying type of the typedef in ANSI C E g typedef int I unsigned I pui OK in GNU C mode same as unsigned int pui e If
492. try and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option nonconst ref anachronism to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax nonconst ref anachronism no nonconst ref anachronism default Description Enable or disable the anachronism of allowing a reference to nonconst to bind to a class rvalue of the right type This anachronism is also enabled by the option anachronisms Related information C compiler option anachronisms Enable C anachronisms Section 2 3 3 Anachronisms Accepted in chapter C Language 5 116 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler nonstd qualifier deduction Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option nonstd qualifier deduction to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax nonstd qualifier deduction Description Controls whether non standard template argument deduction should be performed in the qualifier portion of a qualified name With this feature enabled a template argument for the template parameter T can be deduced in contexts like A lt T gt B or T B The standard deduction mechanism treats these as non deduced contexts that use the values of template parameters that were either explicitly specified or deduced elsewhere Related information J 5 117 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Co
493. twchar 3 16 Q qsort 3 19 Qualifier deduction 5 117 R raise 3 11 Index 11 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference ramstring 1 10 rand 3 18 RAND_MAX 3 17 read 3 23 realloc 3 7 3 18 Register usage 1 14 remainder functions 3 9 Remarks 5 137 remove 3 17 remquo functions 3 9 rename 3 17 Renaming sections 5 44 repeat endrep 4 34 Reserved address ranges 8 18 Reset vector 8 18 resume 4 35 Return decimal value operator 4 47 Return hex value operator 4 47 Reverse inlining 5 26 rewind 3 17 rint functions 3 9 romstring 1 10 round functions 3 9 Run time C library 5 63 Run time checks 5 46 Run time type information 5 139 runtime 1 10 S scalbln functions 3 8 scalbn functions 3 8 scanf 3 14 3 15 conversion characters 3 15 scanf versions 1 20 sdata 1 10 Secondary translation unit 2 19 Section 4 36 section endsection 1 10 Section attributes 4 36 Section information 5 184 Section layout definition 8 2 8 25 Section renaming 5 44 Section setup definition 8 24 section_code_init 1 11 section_const_init 1 11 section_no_code_init 1 11 section_no_const_init 1 11 Sections 4 36 grouping 8 26 nested 5 175 SEEK_CUR 3 12 3 16 SEEK_END 3 12 3 16 SEEK_SET 3 12 3 16 Service request 1 18 set 4 38 setbuf 3 13 setjmp 3 11 setlocale 3 7 Index 12 setvbuf 3 13 SIGABRT 3 11 SIGFPE 3 11 SIGILL 3 11 SIGINT 3 11 signal 3 11 signbit 3 1
494. u cannot run the C compiler separately If you compile a single C source file from within Altium Designer the file is also compiled and assembled However you can set options specific for the C compiler Options in Altium Designer versus options on the command line Most command line options have an equivalent option in Altium Designer but some options are only available on the command line for example in a Windows Command Prompt If there is no equivalent option in Altium Designer you can specify a command line option in Altium Designer as follows 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Enter one or more command line options in the Additional C compiler options field Invocation syntax on the command line Windows Command Prompt To call the C compiler from the command line use the following syntax cpmb option file The input file must be a C source file cc cxx or cpp Short and long option names Options can have both short and long names Short option names always begin with a single minus character long option names always begin with double minus characters You can abbreviate long option names as long as the name is unique You can mix short and long option names on the command line If along option requires an argument the argument may be separated from the keyword by whi
495. u tell the linker via the control program to use system library name Lib where name is a string The linker first searches for system libraries in any directories specified with library directory then in the directories specified with the environment variable LIBMB unless you used the option ignore default library path Example To search in the system library cmba 1ib C library ccmb test obj mylib lib library cmba The linker links the file test obj and first looks in mylib 1ib in the current directory only then in the system library cmba 1ib to resolve unresolved symbols Related information d gt Linker option library directory Additional search path for system libraries Section 6 4 Linking with Libraries in chapter Using the Linker of the user s manual 5 253 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Control Program library directory L ignore default library path Command line syntax library directory dir Loir ignore default library path L Description With this option you can specify the path s where your system libraries specified with the library option are located If you want to specify multiple paths use the option library directory for each separate path By default path this is PRODDIR cmb 1ib directory If you specify only L without a pathname or the long option ignore default library path the linker will not search the default path and also not in the paths s
496. unter a new offset relative to the start of the section When the assembler encounters the OFFSET directive it moves the location counter forwards to the specified address relative to the start of the section and places the next instruction on that address If you specify an address equal to or lower than the current position of the location counter the assembler issues an error Example SECTION text nop nop nop OFFSET 0x20 the assembler places nop this instruction at address 0x20 relative to the start of the section SECTION text nop nop nop OFFSET 0x02 WRONG the current position of the nop location counter is 0x0C se 4 32 Assembly Language PAGE Syntax PAGE width length blanktop blankbtm blankleft Description If you generate a list file see assembler option list file you can use the PAGE directive to format the generated list file width Number of characters on a line 1 255 Default is 132 length Number of lines per page 10 255 Default is 66 blanktop Number of blank lines at the top of the page Default 0 Specify a value so that blanktop blankbtm lt length 10 blankbtm Number of blank lines at the bottom of the page Default 0 Specify a value so that blanktop blankbtm lt length 10 blankleft Number of blank columns at the left of the page Default 0 Specify a value smaller than width If you use the PAGE directive without arguments i
497. untime Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option building runtime to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax building runtime Description Special option for building the C run time library Used to indicate that the C run time library is being compiled This causes additional macros to be predefined that are used to pass configuration information from the C compiler to the run time Related information i 5 63 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler c 0x Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option c 0x to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax C 0x Description Enable the C extensions that are defined by the latest C working paper Related information i 5 64 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler check Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option check to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax check Description With this option you can check the source code for syntax errors with
498. urns the base e logarithm of 1 x x lt gt 1 Not implemented log2 log2 1log21 log2 Returns the base 2 logarithm of x x gt 0 Not implemented ilogb ilogbf ilogbl ilogb Returns the signed exponent of x as an integer x gt 0 Not implemented logb logbf logbl logb Returns the exponent of x as a signed integer in value in floating point notation x gt 0 Not implemented frexp Idexp modf scalbn scalbin math h tgmath h Description frexp frexpl frexpf frexp Splits a float x into fraction f and exponent n so that f 0 0 or 0 5 lt f lt 1 0 and 2 x Returns f stores n ldexp ldexpl ldexpf ldexp Inverse of frexp Returns the result of x 22 x and n are both arguments modf modf1 modff Splits a float x into fraction f and integer n so that f lt 1 0 and f n x Returns f stores n scalbn scalbnl scalbnf scalbn Computes the result of x FLT_RADIX efficiently not normally by computing scalblnscalblnlscalblnf scalblin 3 8 FLT RADIX explicitly Same as scalbn but with argument n as long int Libraries Rounding functions math h tgmath h Description ceil ceilf ceill ceil Returns the smallest integer not less than x as a double floor floorf floorl floor Returns the largest integer not greater than x as a double rint rintl rintf rint Returns the rounded integer value as an int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented lrint lrintf Ilrintl lrint Ret
499. urns the rounded integer value as a long int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented llrint lrintf lrintl llrint Returns the rounded integer value as a Long long int according to the current rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented nearbyint nearbyintf nearbyint Returns the rounded integer value as a floating point according to the current nearbyintl rounding direction See fenv h Not implemented round roundl roundf round Returns the nearest integer value of x as int Not implemented lround lroundl lroundf lround Returns the nearest integer value of x as long int Not implemented llround1llroundlllroundf 1lround Returns the nearest integer value of x as long long int Not implemented trunc truncl truncf trunc Returns the truncated integer value x Not implemented Remainder after devision math h tgmath h Description fmod fmodl fmodf fmod Returns the remainder r of x ny n is chosen as trunc Xx y r has the same sign as x remainder remainderl remainder Returns the remainder r of x ny n is chosen as trunc Xx y r may not have remainderf the same sign as x Not implemented remquo remquol remquof remquo Same as remainder In addition the argument quo is given a specific value Power and absolute value functions see ISO Not implemented math h tgmath h Description cbrt cbrtl cbrtf ebrt Returns the real cube root of x x1 3 Not implemented fabs fabsl fabsf fabs Return
500. us 3 Add the option no dep name to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no dep name Default dependent name processing is enabled Description Disable dependent name processing i e the special lookup of names used in templates as required by the C standard This option implies the use of no parse templates Related information d gt C compiler option no parse templates Disable parsing of nonclass templates 5 106 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler no distinct template signatures Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option no distinct template signatures to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax no distinct template signatures Description Control whether the signatures for template functions can match those for non template functions when the functions appear in different compilation units By default a normal function cannot be used to satisfy the need for a template instance e g a function void int could not be used to satisfy the need for an instantiation of a template void T with T set to int no distinct template signatures provides the older language behavior under which a non template function can match a template function Also controls whether function templates may have template
501. utable arguments The statements produced by a macro can be any processor instruction almost any assembler directive or any previously defined macro Source statements resulting from a macro call are subject to the same conditions and restrictions as any other statements Macros can be nested The assembler processes nested macros when the outer macro is expanded 4 9 1 Defining a Macro The first step in using a macro is to define it The definition of a macro consists of three parts e Header which assigns a name to the macro and defines the arguments e Body which contains the code or instructions to be inserted when the macro is called e Terminator which indicates the end of the macro definition ENDM directive A macro definition takes the following form macro_name MACRO arg arg comment source statements ENDM If the macro name is the same as an existing assembler directive or mnemonic opcode the assembler replaces the directive or mnemonic opcode with the macro and issues a warning The arguments are symbolic names that the macro preprocessor replaces with the literal arguments when the macro is expanded called Each argument must follow the same rules as global symbol names Argument names cannot start with a percent sign Example Consider the following macro definition RESERV MACRO val reserve space DS val ENDM After the following macro call section text RESERV 8 endsec The
502. ved V Verbose the librarian shows which files are removed Example tlb d mylib lib objl obj obj2 obj The librarian deletes obj1 obj and obj2 obj from the library mylib lib tlb d v mylib lib objl obj obj2 o0bj The librarian deletes obj1 obj and obj2 obj from the library mylib 1ib and displays which files are removed Related information J 5 305 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Librarian f Command line syntax f file Description Instead of typing all options on the command line you can create an option file which contains all options and flags you want to specify With this option you specify the option file to the librarian tlb Use an option file when the command line would exceed the limits of the operating system or just to store options and save typing Option files can also be generated on the fly for example by the make utility You can specify the option f multiple times Format of an option file e Multiple arguments on one line in the option file are allowed e To include whitespace in an argument surround the argument with single or double quotes e If you want to use single quotes as part of the argument surround the argument by double quotes and vise versa This has a single quote embedded This has a double quote embedded This has a double quote and a single quote embedded When a text line reaches its length limit use a to continue the line Whit
503. vely Compute x y and x y in a single operation X and y have respectively type int long int and long long int The result is stored in the members quot and remof struct div_t ldiv_t and 11div_t which have the same types Multibyte wide character and string conversions mblen s n mbtowc pwc s n wctomb s wc mbstowcs pwces s n wcestombs s pwcs n Determines the number of bytes in the multi byte character pointed to by s At most n characters will be examined See also mbr1len in section 3 2 27 wchar h Converts the multi byte character in s to a wide character code and stores it in pwc At most n characters will be examined Converts the wide character wc into a multi byte representation and stores it in the string pointed to by s At most MB_CUR_MAX characters are stored Converts a sequence of multi byte characters in the string pointed to by s into a sequence of wide characters and stores at most n wide characters into the array pointed to by pwcs See also mbsrtowcs in section 3 2 27 wchar h Converts a sequence of wide characters in the array pointed to by pwcs into multi byte charac ters and stores at most n multi byte characters into the string pointed to by s See also wcsrtowmb in section 3 2 27 wchar h 3 2 24 string h and wchar h This header file provides numerous functions for manipulating strings By convention strings in C are arrays of characters with a terminating null character Most fun
504. verrule the default target name in the make dependencies generated by the options preprocess make Em and dep file The default target name is the basename of the input file with extension obj Related information C compiler option preprocess make Generate dependencies for make C compiler option dep file Generate dependencies in a file 5 97 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler multibyte chars Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option multibyte chars to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax multibyte chars Default multibyte character sequences are not allowed Description Enable processing for multibyte character sequences in comments string literals and character constants Multibyte encodings are used for character sets like the Japanese SJIS Related information i 5 98 Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler namespaces Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Miscellaneous 3 Add the option namespaces to the Additional C compiler options field Command line syntax namespaces no namespaces Default namespaces are supported Description With option no namespaces you disable
505. version V Description Displays version information of the compiler The compiler ignores all other options or input files Related information J 5 57 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler warnings as errors Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Diagnostics 3 In the Treat warnings as errors field select None Treat all warnings as errors or Treat specific warnings as errors If you select Treat specific warnings as errors 4 Enter the numbers separated by commas or as a range of the warnings you want to treat as errors Command line syntax warnings as errors number number Description If the compiler encounters an error it stops compiling When you use this option without arguments you tell the compiler to treat all warnings as errors This means that the exit status of the compiler will be non zero after one or more compiler warnings As a consequence the compiler now also stops after encountering a warning You can also limit this option to specific warnings by specifying a comma separated list of warning numbers or ranges Related information d C compiler option no warnings Suppress some or all warnings 5 58 Tool Options C Compiler 5 2 C Compiler Options Altium Designer uses a makefile to build your entire project This means that in Altium Designer yo
506. wing values R_OK Checks read permission W_OK Checks write permission X_OK Checks execute Search permission F_OK Checks to see if the file exists FSS implementation chdir path Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to change the current directory on the host to the directory indicated by path FSS implementation close fd File close function The given file descriptor should be properly closed This function calls _close FSS implementation getcwd buf size Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to retrieve the current directory on the host 3 22 Returns the directory name FSS implementation Libraries lseek fd offset whence read fd buff cnt stat name buff lstat name buff fstat fd buff unlink name write fd buff cnt 3 2 27 wchar h Moves read write file offset Calls _1seek FSS implementation Reads a sequence of characters from a file This function calls _read FSS implementation Use the file system simulation feature of the debugger to stat a file on the host platform FSS implementation This function is identical to stat except in the case of a symbolic link where the link itself is stat ed not the file that it refers to Not implemented This function is identical to stat except that it uses a file descriptor instead of a name Not implemented Removes the named file so that a subsequen
507. with another file or no file at all The specified include file is included before all other includes This is the same as specifying include file at the very beginning of each of your C source files Example cmb include file stdio h testl c test2 c The file stdio h is included at the beginning of both test1 c and test2 c Related information db C compiler option include directory Add directory to include file search path Section 2 4 How the Compiler Searches Include Files in chapter Using the Compiler of the user s manual 5 17 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference C Compiler inline Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Expand the C Compiler entry and select Optimization 3 Enable the option Always inline function calls Command line syntax inline Description With this option you instruct the compiler to inline calls to functions without the noinline function qualifier whenever possible This option has the same effect as a pragma inline atthe start of the source file This option can be useful to increase the possibilities for code compaction compiler option optimize compact Related information Gb C compiler option optimize compact Code compaction Tool Options C Compiler C Compiler inline max incr inline max size Menu entry 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Opt
508. writing it to a disk file before completing the compilation then when recompiling the same source file or compiling another file with the same set of header files it can recognize the snapshot point verify that the corresponding precompiled header PCH file is reusable and read it back in Under the right circumstances this can produce a dramatic improvement in compilation time the trade off is that PCH files can take a lot of disk space 2 11 1 Automatic Precompiled Header Processing When pch appears on the command line automatic precompiled header processing is enabled This means the C compiler will automatically look for a qualifying precompiled header file to read in and or will create one for use on a subsequent compilation The PCH file will contain a snapshot of all the code preceding the header stop point The header stop point is typically the first token in the primary source file that does not belong to a preprocessing directive but it can also be specified directly by pragma hdrstop see below if that comes first For example include xxx h include yyy h int i The header stop point is int the first non preprocessor token and the PCH file will contain a snapshot reflecting the inclusion of xxx h and yyy h If the first non preprocessor token or the pragma hdrstop appears within a if block the header stop point is the outermost enclosing if To illustrate heres a more complicated example inc
509. xpressions 00 00 24a ie E EE E A a E el E 4 3 4 6 1 Nuimeric Constants osiv0 oseesiei yeaa i ea a bende e a ENA 4 4 4 6 2 SINGS esa py a a E E EE Ee A O E E E EE E EEEE A OREA 4 4 4 6 3 Expression Operators oriau eaae aa E ii ened A EE a E EE E E R E 4 5 4 7 Built in Assembly Functions 0 cece eee eet tenes 4 5 4 7 1 Overview of Built in Assembly Functions 0 0 c cece eee eee ees 4 6 4 7 2 Detailed Description of Built in Assembly Functions 00 0 eee eee ee eee ees 4 6 4 8 Assembler Directives j cs 9 cic avd vette bid shin paki ia doin bine dated Cad a doe Oh 4 8 4 8 1 Overview of Assembler Directives 0 eees 4 8 4 8 2 Detailed Description of Assembler Directives 00 ccc ees 4 10 4 9 Macro Operations ireren ene heed ong wkd ow dey das playa he eke Dawe peas bas 4 45 4 9 1 DeTINING AMACKO 2 26 2028 04 de crer wanda deal a na bh paar dee eee he aad eed ee ee 4 45 4 9 2 Calling a Maro scaccinanaie cedeun Ph eee EE obama dees Adan aaa eae Ae ee ee 4 45 4 9 3 Using Operators for Macro Arguments 0 0 eee neces 4 46 4 9 4 Using the FOR and REPEAT Directives as Macros 00 cece eee eens 4 48 4 9 5 Conditional Assembly 0 eee teeta 4 48 4 10 Generic INStructiOnS oeseri cadeia oaa ied nek et bead satiated dd de ke dee ie 4 50 Table of Contents Tool Options 5 1 5 1 C Compiler Options csse 2 506203 beeen eee dee Meade Rees ee wee eee ced 5 1 5 2 C Co
510. y 1 From the Project menu select Project Options The Project Options dialog box appears 2 Open the Build Options page 3 Add a pathname in the Library files path field If you enter multiple paths separate them with a semicolon Command line syntax library directory dir Loir ignore default library path L Description With this option you can specify the path s where your system libraries specified with the library option are located If you want to specify multiple paths use the option library directory for each separate path The default path is PRODDIR cmb 1ib If you specify only L without a pathname or the long option ignore default library path the linker will not search the default path and also not in the paths specified in the environment variable LIBMB So the linker ignores steps 2 and 3 as listed below The priority order in which the linker searches for system libraries specified with the library option is 1 The path that is specified with the library directory option 2 The path that is specified in the environment variable LIBMB 3 The default directory PRODDIR cmb 1ib or a processor specific sub directory Example Suppose you call the linker as follows lkmb test obj library directory c mylibs library cmba First the linker looks in the directory c mylibs for library cmba Lib this option If it does not find the requested libraries it looks in the direct
511. yntax symbol TYPE typeid Description With the TYPE directive you set a symbol s type to the specified value in the ELF symbol table Valid symbol types are FUNC The symbol is associated with a function or other executable code OBJECT The symbol is associated with an object such as a variable an array or a structure FILE The symbol name represents the filename of the compilation unit Labels in code sections have the default type FUNC Labels in data sections have the default type OBJECT Example _Afunc TYPE FUNC Related information db SIZE Set Symbol Size 4 42 Assembly Language UNDEF Syntax UNDEF symbol Description With the UNDEF directive you can undefine a substitution string that was previously defined with the DEFINE directive The substitution string associated with symbol is released and symbol will no longer represent a valid DEFINE substitution The assembler issues a warning if you redefine an existing symbol Example UNDEF LEN Undefines the LEN substitution string that was previously defined with the DEFINE directive Related information Gb DEFINE Define substitution string 4 43 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference WEAK Syntax WEAK symbol symbol Description With the WEAK directive you mark one or more symbols as weak The symbol can be defined in the same module with the GLOBAL directive or the EXTERN directive If the symbol does no
512. ype other than an integral type Conversions shall not be performed between a pointer to object and any type other than an integral type another pointer to object type or a pointer to void A cast should not be performed between a pointer type and an integral type A cast should not be performed between a pointer to object type and a different pointer to object type A cast shall not be performed that removes any const or volatile qualification from the type addressed by a pointer Limited dependence should be placed on C s operator precedence rules in expressions The value of an expression shall be the same under any order of evaluation that the standard permits This rule is checked using worst case assumptions This means that a violation will be reported when a possible alias may cause the result of an expression to be evaluation order dependent The sizeof operator shall not be used on expressions that contain side effects The right hand operand of a logical amp amp or operator shall not contain side effects The operands of a logical amp amp or shall be primary expressions The operands of logical operators amp amp and should be effectively Boolean Expressions that are effectively Boolean should not be used as operands to operators other than amp amp and Bitwise operators shall not be applied to operands whose underlying type is signed 10 7 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference 12
513. ys error messages Example tmk err error txt The make utility writes messages to the file error txt Related information d gt Make utility option s Do not print commands before execution 5 285 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility f Command line syntax f my_makefile Description Default the make utility uses the file makefile to build your files With this option you tell the make utility to use the specified file instead of the file makefile Multiple f options act as if all the makefiles were concatenated in a left to right order Example tmk f mymake The make utility uses the file mymake to build your files Related information J 5 286 Tool Options Make Utility Make Utility G Command line syntax G path Description Normally you must call the make utility tmk from the directory where your makefile and other files are stored With the option G you can call the make utility from within another directory The path is the path to the directory where your makefile and other files are stored and can be absolute or relative to your current directory Example Suppose your makefile and other files are stored in the directory myfiles You can call the make utility for example as follows tmk G myfiles Related information J 5 287 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference Make Utility i Command line syntax i Description When an error occurs durin

TR0129 MicroBlaze Embedded Tools Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents